Type = 11 iDate=10/2/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  TECH VOLUME AND 2 WAY COMM   Remimeo Tech Secs Qual Secs Staff Training Officers Course Supervisors D of T  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 10 FEBRUARY 1971 Remimeo Tech Secs Qual Secs Staff Training Officers Course Supervisors D of T TECH VOLUME AND 2 WAY COMM (LRH ED 92 INT of 25 March 1970 re-issued as an HCO B by request of many Course Supervisors) I've been busy studying the problems of volume auditing and training and have made a vital discovery. We lost a key basic process! TWO WAY COMM is missing in today's line-up in Academies, on Courses and in HCGs. It goes this way -- to get volume auditing going, you need auditors. To make auditors you need fast training. The reason fast training isn't occurring is because 2 Way Comm seems to be out between Course Supervisors and Students. Course Supervisors in most instances are not asking students if anything is wrong or how to help them and then letting the students talk. While the Supervisor LISTENS. I am putting together new practical for Course Supervisors. But meanwhile it's very elementary. 1. Detect a student's concern. 2. Get the student to talk about his problems and troubles in study. 3. Listen. 4. Do what one can to help without evaluating. 5. Let the student get back to it. Students who drift off of courses or who are very slow LACK SOMEBODY TO TALK TO! Where a student's progress is slow or he or she appears to be troubled or struggling, a good Supervisor notices it early. He gets the student to talk about it. He listens and acknowledges. He does what he can to help without evaluating and lets the student get back to studying. This action went out when Supervisors were found to be lecturing and evaluating on data which data, entered on the course, upset the high workability of tech as it is found in HCO Bs and on tapes. This was at the time when Supervisors ceased to be named Instructors and became Course Supervisors. This was in the early days of the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course. Two Way Comm with students tended to vanish also. 175 Giving a student off-line data and letting the student discuss his troubles are two different things. QUAL In Qual there should also be a Consultant Service which uses a meter and Two Way Comm to find out about cases before patch-up or review. The Qual Consultant should also handle students who are slow or dropped out. This letting the pc tell his side of it is very valuable. One can handle them much better. Analyzing what they say and how they say it helps the Case Supervisor also. I.e., Natter = ARC Brks and overts. The pc's comm has been chopped. An old old session evaluated for him. Etc. Etc. Etc. GET IT IN Two Way Comm should be gotten in on all Courses fast. It will speed training and add up eventually to volume auditing by making trained auditors available. This is the way to unlock that flow. In the HGC pcs can be Two Way Commed by the Tech Sec. In Qual someone can two way comm those sent to Review to help the person and get more accurate data for C/Sing. THE PROCESS Two Way Comm is not a rote process. That's why it is hard to teach. The trick is to get the person to talk, to keep him looking and talking until he has a Cog and Very Good Indicators -- and sometimes an F/N at the end (not vital). If you can LISTEN you have it progressing. If you can get a person to talk about his troubles and listen and ack, you really can run it. THIS IS YOUR PRIMARY BLOCK ON VOLUME AUDITING. No Two Way Comm in training! I hope it helps. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 176  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=28/2/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 24 METERING READING ITEMS   IMPORTANT Remimeo HGC Auditor Checksheet Academy Level 0 Checksheet Dn Cse Checksheet FOR LRH COMM COMPLIANCE  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 28 FEBRUARY 1971 Remimeo HGC Auditor Checksheet C/S Series 24 Academy Level 0 Checksheet Dn Cse Checksheet IMPORTANT FOR LRH COMM COMPLIANCE METERING READING ITEMS (NOTE: Observation I have recently done while handling a C/S line has resulted in a necessary clarification of the subject of "a reading item or question" which improves older definitions and saves some cases.) It can occasionally happen that an auditor misses a read on an item or question and does not run it as it "has not read". This can hang up a pc badly if the item was in fact a reading item or question. It does not get handled and exists in records as "No read" when in fact it DID read. THEREFORE ALL DIANETIC AUDITORS WHOSE ITEMS OCCASIONALLY "DON'T READ" AND ALL SCIENTOLOGY AUDITORS WHO GET LIST QUESTIONS THAT DON'T READ MUST BE CHECKED OUT ON THIS HCO B IN QUAL OR BY THE C/S OR SUPERVISOR. These errors come under the heading of Gross Auditing Errors as they affect metering. 1. An Item or Question is said to "Read" when the needle falls. Not when it stops or slows on a rise. A tick is always noted and in some cases becomes a wide read. 2. The read is taken when the pc first says it or when the question is cleared. THIS is the valid time of read. It is duly marked (plus any blow down). THIS reading defines what is a reading item or question. CALLING IT BACK TO SEE IF IT READ IS NOT A VALID TEST as the surface charge may be gone but the item or question will still run or list. 3. Regardless of any earlier statements or material on READING ITEMS, an item does not have to read when the auditor calls it to be a valid item for running engrams or listing. The test is did it read when the pc first said it on originating it or in Clearing it? 4. That an item or question is marked as having read is sufficient reason to run it or use it or list it. Pc Interest, in Dianetics, is also necessary to run it, but that it did not read again is no reason to not use it. 5. When listing items the auditor must have an eye on the meter NOT necessarily the pc and must note on the list he is making the extent of read and any BD and how much. THIS is enough to make it a "reading item" or "reading question". 6. In Clearing a listing Question the auditor watches the meter, NOT necessarily the pc and notes any read while clearing the question. 7. An additional calling of the item or question to see if it read is unnecessary and not a valid action if the item or question read on origination or Clearing. 8. That an item is marked as having read on an earlier Dianetic list is enough (also checking interest) to run it with no further read test. 9. To miss seeing a read on an origin or clearing is a Gross Auditing Error. 177 10. Failing to mark on the list or worksheet the read and any BD seen during pc origination or clearing the question is a Gross Auditing Error. EYESIGHT Auditors who miss reads or have poor eyesight should be tested and should wear the proper glasses while auditing. GLASSES The rims of some glasses could obstruct seeing the meter while the auditor is looking at the worksheet or pc. If this is the case the glasses should be changed to another type with broader vision. WIDE VISION A good auditor is expected to see his meter, pc and worksheet all at one time. No matter what he is doing he should always notice any meter movement if the meter needle moves. If he cannot do this he should use an Azimuth Meter and not put paper over its glass but should do his worksheet looking through the glass at his pen and the paper -- the original design purpose of the Azimuth Meter. Then even while writing he sees the meter needle move as it is in his line of vision. CONFUSIONS Any and all confusions as to what is a "reading item" or "reading question" should be fully cleaned up on any auditor as such omissions or confusions can be responsible for case hang-ups and needless repairs. NO READ Any comment that an item or question "did not read" should be at once suspected by a C/S and checked with this HCO B on the auditor. Actually non-Reads, a non-reading item or question means one that did not read when originated or cleared and also did not read when called. One can still call an item or question to get a read. That it now reads is fine. But if it has never read at all, the item will not run and such a list will produce no item on it. It is not forbidden to call an item or question to test it for read. But it is a useless action if the item or question read on origination by the pc or clearing it with him. IMPORTANT The data in this HCO B, if not known, can cost case failures. Thus it must be checked out on auditors. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 178  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=3/3/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  LIX HI-LO TA LIST HIGH TA ASSESSMENT  Type = 11 iDate=17/2/71 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0 Type = 11 iDate=22/2/71 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0 Type = 11 iDate=25/2/71 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Remimeo Class IX  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 3 MARCH 1971 (CANCELLED -- see HCO B 1 Jan 72RA Volume VIII -- 1) Remimeo Class IX LIX HI-LO TA LIST (Cancels earlier list HCO B 17 Feb 71 and HCO B 22 Feb 71 and HCO B 25 Feb 71 which were not released off Flag.) This assessment has been developed to detect the reason for high TA. There is nothing unusual about the processes necessary to handle these points. Interiorization or a flubbed Interiorization Intensive that must be run with WENT IN is the usual reason, but Run this time with exact R3R using each R3R command and getting it answered. HIGH TA ASSESSMENT 1. Do you have a Stuck Picture? _______ 2. Are you Trapped? _______ 3. Do you have Pictures in Restimulation? _______ 4. Do you have Masses in Restimulation? _______ 5. You went in _______ 6. Have you Committed Overts? _______ 7. Are you Not-ising Overts? _______ 8. Do you have Withholds? _______ 9. Are there Considerations not mentioned? _______ 10. Have you Committed Crimes? _______ 11. Have you been Self-Auditing? _______ 12. Was a Wrong Overrun found? _______ 13. Are you protesting? _______ 14. Are you urgently trying to leave? _______ 15. Have you separated out? _______ 16. Are you out and can't go in? _______ 17. Are there undisclosed problems? _______ 18. Are you taking or smoking drugs? _______ 19. Did you once take drugs? _______ 20. Are you out and can't get in? _______ 21. Is there a lie? _______ 22. Are you talking to others about your case? _______ 23. Are you listening to others talk about their cases? _______ 24. Have you been looking at or listening to tech materials you shouldn't? _______ 25. Do you have opinions you don't dare say? _______ 26. Are you here for undisclosed reasons? _______ 27. Are you not telling your Auditor your Cognitions? _______ 28. Are you withholding your actual case state? _______ 29. Are you unwilling to talk to the auditor? _______ 30. Does your auditor overwhelm you? _______ 31. Are you scared of what might happen in auditing? _______ 32. Are you somebody else? _______ 33. Is there a list Error? _______ 34. Are you waiting for something to happen? _______ 35. Do you think something else is wrong? _______ LRH:sb.rd Copyright $c 1971 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 179  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=5/3/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 25 THE FANTASTIC NEW HGC LINE   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 5 MARCH 1971 Remimeo C/S Series 25 THE FANTASTIC NEW HGC LINE (A marvelous new C/S Auditor line has just been piloted in for HGCs.) In the new C/S line the Auditor, in his Admin time at the end of the day, or when he has no preclears, does Folder Error Summaries or Progress and Advance Programs for his pcs and does the C/S form for the Tech C/S as well as adds the day's process and the length of the session and amount of Admin time on that folder to the inside front cover of the folder, with the process run and result. If his programs and C/Ses are acceptable to the Tech C/S, the Auditor gets full Well Done Auditing Hour credit on his stat. The Auditor logs his sessions for the day in the general HGC Auditor's log and his Admin time is also logged. This Admin time is subtracted from the bought hours of the pc where auditing is sold by the hour. Where Auditors are so engaged and the new folder routing line is in use, this C/S form is used: Full blank page. Pc's Name (Red) Date Auditor's Name (Red) Class of Auditor required next sess. (Session Grade) left blank Auditor's comment (Red) or think about the case if he wishes. The next C/S 1. ___________________________ Blue 2. ___________________________ Blue 3. ___________________________ Blue 4. ___________________________ Blue Auditor Signature (Red) The Auditor does not grade his own session. He leaves this blank. The correctly Admined folder is then given to Tech Services which routes it (usually with the Auditor's other folders for the day) to the C/S. The C/S looks it over (it is HIS final responsibility for the case being run right). The C/S looks to see if the Examiner form taken by the Examiner at session end F/Ned. If it did not he leaves the grade line blank as it is a No Grade session (see F/N 180 and well done hours) as the Auditor gets no hour credit for the session. If the C/S and other Admin is ok he writes OK with his initial in the session grade space. If none of it is okay he leaves it blank and does the C/S form or programs completely new. In this last case he enters a subtract figure in his log for the auditing time for the week against that Auditor's name. If the Exam form F/Ned, but the Admin is not okay and the session actions were not okay the C/S writes "Well Done by Exam" on his own new C/S in its proper place and ignores the form and subtracts the Admin time in his book to subtract the Admin from the Auditor's week's stat. If the session was not okay with no F/N at Exams yet the Admin and next C/S are ok, the Auditor loses the session time in the C/S but gets the Admin time credited to his week's stat. The C/S subtracts the session time in his book, not the Admin time. Of course, as we hope is usually the case, if the Auditor did the C/S, did a correct session, got an F/N at Exam and did the Admin and next C/S is correct, then the C/S marks "Very well done" in the blank space for session grade with his initial. After inspection, this would be the sole action of the C/S regarding that folder. By the C/S writing in the session grade (Very well done, well done, okay, flunk, to cramming) the Auditor is receiving acknowledgement for his work and is not just acking himself. THE NEW LINE The Ideal Folder-C/S line can shift the number of well done hours from a ceiling of 250-300 to 600-800 with one C/S. No matter how many Auditors an org has, older lines put a 250-300 top ceiling on the org's well done hours. When hours could go above 600 due to the available Auditors (20 or 30), a new parallel line has to be manned by a new C/S, new D of P and another Examiner and more Tech Services personnel. Despite how hard the C/S and anyone else in tech works, a line not so run will ceiling at about 250 hours, no matter how many Auditors are hired. A C/S using the old lines can C/S for about 5 working Auditors only with the line running any old way. And even so will work himself half to death. In trying to get pcs handled, Auditors will be added. The C/S will not be able to handle his job. The line, being faulty, gets pegged at about 250 hours no matter how hard the C/S and Admin people work. With the same C/S and Tech Services people, and a correct new line, 24 to 30 Auditors will be kept busy at their 5 hours a day (given auditing rooms) and the stat will be able to rise to 600 to 800. NEW SEQUENCE 1. Auditor picks up his pc folders and his pc schedule list at Tech Services at the start of his day from the LEAVING rack. 2. Tech Services (having a duplicate list) begins sending pcs to him (using Tech Pages). 3. The Auditor gives the session. 4. The Auditor leaves the folder in the Auditing room at session end and takes the pc to the Examiner. 5. The Examiner simply does the Exam form on a meter with no folder. He sends the Exam form (hand route) to Tech Services. 181 6. The Auditor returns at once to his auditing room and a Tech Page has a pc there waiting for him. 7. Having done all his pcs for the day, the Auditor carries his folders to the Auditor Admin Room. 8. Tech Services has placed the Exam forms in the Auditor Admin Room and sees they get into the Auditor's basket and the folder. 9. The Auditor does the complete Admin of the session. 10. The Auditor does any program needed for future sessions. 11. The Auditor C/Ses the folder for the next session. 12. The Auditor marks in a box (2 columns) on a sheet stapled to the inside front cover the process, the Exam result, the session time and the Admin time he has just put in. 13. The Auditor hands his completed folders in to Tech Services. 14. Tech Services gets the folders to the C/S using a Folder Page who comes on late and works the C/S's hours. 15. Fed the folders rapidly by the Folder Page who is standing in the C/S area, the C/S does his C/S work. If the Folder Page is fast, removing folders and putting the new one in, chasing up data and other bits for the C/S, the time of C/Sing even when done very carefully will be found to average 3 to 5 minutes a folder even when some require full programming (but not FESing). This makes a ceiling of about 100 folders (sessions) a day for the C/S, an output of 30 Auditors. Needless to say the C/S and the Auditors have to know their business and Qual Cramming is used extensively both for new material and for flubs both in auditing and C/Sing by Auditors. 16. The Folder Page gets the folders over to the D of P office preserving the piles per Auditor as much as possible. The C/S posts the data he wants Auditors to know or do on the AUDITORS' BOARD of the Auditors' Admin Room. He turns in his Cramming Orders into the D of P basket. This finishes his actions. Where there is a senior Review C/S there is a hot spur line from the C/S to the senior C/S and back to the C/S. This is not necessarily an instant line. It can be a 12 hour lag line. In orgs where a C/O or Exec Dir or Product Officer or Org Officer is also a very skilled C/S this hot line would probably be in. New tech in use, fantastic completions and utter dog cases nobody can make anything out of go on this senior C/S hot spur line. There are very few of these, only two or three a day in a very busy org. The senior C/S "does" these and sends them back to the C/S. They are then sent on as usual to the D of P. 17. The Director of Processing comes on duty very early. The C/Sed folders will all be there. The D of P has assignment master sheets that are kept up by the D of P. The D of P does the day's schedules, a list for each Auditor. The lists preferably have a few too many pcs on them. The D of P can tell what Class of Auditor is required for the next session because the Auditor has marked it in in the upper right-hand corner of the C/S for the next session. When the D of P has the lists done the folders are placed in the "leaving" rack of Tech Services and Tech Services, now up and about, is given the lists and gets to work on the scheduling board, moving the names about to agree with the lists. Tech Services does any room shifts or handlings at this time. 18. The D of P now goes to the Auditor Admin Room and begins to muster Auditors from her muster list as they come in and gets them over to Tech Services. 182 19. A Cramming personnel will be in there trying to get any crammings scheduled. 20. Tech Services hands out folders (which are in neat piles for each Auditor) and schedules to the Auditors as they turn up and handles any arguments or shifts in sequence. 21. Tech Pages are on phones or running to round up pcs and get them going to sessions, which work continues all day. 22. The D of P interviews any hung-up or curious pcs or as requested by the C/S or gets new Auditors or keeps up Admin. This goes on until the C/S comes in when the D of P is off. 23. The Auditor picking up his folders begins the cycle all over again at (1) above. ABOVE 600 When the well done hours go above 600 a week, A WHOLE NEW HGC is put in duplicating the first, with its own C/S, D of P, T/S, auditing rooms and Auditor Admin Room. It would be HGC Section Two or HGC2 with the original being HGC1. A special second Cramming would have to be provided in Qual for it. At first they would share new hours and build up independently. More HGCs are added to the Department at each multiple 600 wd hours. SENIORS The two chief seniors in the area are the C/S (for tech) and the D of P (for Auditors and bodies). It is the D of P who must see that Auditors exist and are on post. It is Tech Services who sees pcs are rounded up and audited. The D of T/S is actually in charge of pcs and all folder files and all board keep-up work. The D of P should have some tech training. The D of T/S need not have any. The C/S of course is the Tech Expert and should be an HSST. If there are no Auditors it is the D of P's neck. If there are no C/Ses it is the C/S's neck. If there are no folders it is the D of T/S's neck. And if there are no auditing rooms it is the D of T/S's neck. If signed-up scheduled pcs don't get to session it is the D of T/S's neck. If there are no NEW pcs it is the D of P's neck who should begin tq shoot Dissem Secs and Registrars and procure new pcs on a by-pass for the org. From this a table of seniors and duties can be made. CRAMMING You will notice no pcs are sent to Review on this new line. Review actions are done in Tech as a patch-up in Tech. The Qual Sec is responsible for overall tech quality BUT DOES IT BY CRAMMING C/Ses or Auditors. Thus Cramming is a busy street. Cramming must be good, check-outs excellent. If an Auditor doesn't grasp a C/S he has received he gets help from Cramming. 183 Auditors new to the HGC are given a fast hard grooving in in Cramming or a Qual Interne Course. (New Auditors never audit until grooved in.) Tech will be as good as the Cramming Officer can cram. This line is grooved in by the HAS and kept in by Qual. Or if there is no Qual, it is kept in by the HAS who will find no Qual very embarrassing. DUMMY RUN The line should be dummy run by folders, "pcs" and Auditors until they understand it. People are often totally unaware of lines and get very sloppy. Thus this line has to be drilled hard on old and new tech personnel. All must know this exact line. It is a good line. Fully in, it raises the well done hours stat from 250 per week maximum at total overload to an easy 600 to 800. Auditors must audit five hours a day, 25 minimum per week of well done hours for any bonus to be paid at all. In the SO they get no pay at all much less bonuses if short on their 25. Tech Services and an unenergetic D of P or a bad Dissem Sec and Registrar set-up can cause a no pc situation. And often do unless pushed. But counting FESes and Admin in on an Auditor's wd time helps slack periods to even out. And one Auditor can FES and program folders for others or from files if he is left adrift and short-timed by the D of P or D of T/S or until the Tech Division forces the Dissem Div and Distribution Div to really get on the ball and wear their hats on pc flow. PROCUREMENT The D of P has always had new pc procurement responsibility when all else failed or even when it didn't. Old folders, for example, are a marvelous source of new auditing repairs and intensives. An FES done on an old folder and a letter to "come in and get audited before you fall apart" is excellent pc procurement, usually neglected by Registrars. Any procurement by a D of P is legitimate. Auditors who have no pcs can write procurement letters and have for 20 years. SUMMARY This is a beautiful line. It has been piloted hard. It will serve as well as it is checked out, drilled in and used. This line is the key to affluence from pcs alone. (But if the org isn't training Auditors heavily, you'll soon have no Auditors to be on it and the org will not gain its high income low cost cushion from training.) This line is the answer to really getting auditing done in an area. LRH:nt.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright $c 1971 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 184  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=6/3/71 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 26 NEW USES FOR THE GREEN FORM   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 6 MARCH 1971 Issue I Remimeo C/S Series 26 NEW USES FOR THE GREEN FORM The Green Form comes into its own with a new method of use. A lot of cases have been cracked lately using the GF in a new way. Designed as the Qual tool in 1965 it came into disrepute by getting assessed item by item to an F/N. This made it F/N on a rud. Thus the whole battery of tricks in the GF never get used on a pc. There is another assessment Method. Method 5. It is "once through marking the length and BD of all reads". One can then C/S "Assess GF once through". Actually one usually says, "GF + 40 Method 5". This means the auditor (usually on a case that is messy or just as a routine part of a Progress Program) just rat-a-tat-tat assesses the lot, marks the reads' length and BDs. The C/S action that follows -- the "Handle" consists of putting a red half swirl around each that read and then doing the C/S for it. List outness is always handled first. Then ruds like ARC Brks, W/Hs and PTPs. Then more or less by the longest reads. It makes a long, long C/S in cases that are boggy. One uses engram running on it whenever he gets a chance as in "drugs". Hidden standards are listed on a "Who/what would have _______ (the symptom)?" and "O/W on the item found". A lot of old processes get a chance on these GF reads. It isn't all "2- way comm on _______ ". Foreign Language cases who do not have English ss a native tongue and people who don't understand a lot have to have the GF items cleared. One takes the reads while clearing the Question, of course. Designed as a Case Cracker, this new use of the Green Form restores it to a mighty weapon. Since I redeveloped ways to assess and began to really use this Green Form, I've seen several very rough ridgy cases fall apart. So it is a very cheerful re-discovery. And it is highly urged. LRH:mes.rd Copyright $c 1971 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 185  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=6/3/71 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 27 LONG C/Ses   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 6 MARCH 1971 Issue II Remimeo C/S Series 27 LONG C/Ses A long C/S is far more desirable than a short C/S in all but the most sickly and feeble cases. In doing a long C/S, the auditor can also end it off where an F/N goes 3/4 to a dial wide and looks like it will persist. The pc has a win. A long C/S also permits an auditor to adjust his own length of session. If the C/S isn't complete on that day, one simply adds (1) "Fly a rud" and (2) "Continue C/S of (yesterday)." By having a whole Progress Program (repair) laid out on a red sheet and clipped with its green Advance Pgm (grade chart) inside the front cover, over the session summary, the guidance for the case is right there. This gets checked off as done. The C/S could consist of half the program or even (in shorter programs) all of it. Handling One speeds a line by taking repeated handlings out of it. Less sessions mean less handling. Thus the session is more economical if long. Getting the pc and folder rounded up 5 times when it means the same number of hours to do it 2 times saves wear and tear. This is the benefit of very long C/Ses. Dianetic C/Ses Dianetic sessions often go 5 or even 8 hours. One tries to do all the flows of an item in one session. Length of Pgms When auditing the public, not staff, you long program. In a Progress (repair) Program you try to throw the whole bag of tricks at them. These are not only repairs, when you do a Progress Program. You throw in a lot of other bits like 2-way comms on BD items. You now have a Hi-Lo TA List to assess and an Expanded Green Form. 186 Advance Programs All Advance (gradesheet) Programs start lower than the pc was if the pc got in trouble where he was. Often a grade is obviously out below where he is graded. Let us say he is a bogged "Grade IV". Well, he couldn't be a Grade IV. So the Advance Program (green paper) that you do picks him up at Grade 0 or even Dianetics. A bogged "OT I" the other day began to win when (a) given a long long Progress Program, and (b) shoved back to Grade III on the Advance Program and brought on up all the way including OT I before going on to OT II! Thorough C/Ses Thus you can have long C/Ses only when you have long programs already done and pinned to the inside of the front cover, a pink one for Progress (non grade) and a green one for Advance (back up the grades). Don't try to save auditing time. Save instead repeated handlings. This does not go into "over-repair". A Progress Pgm contains all sorts of bits like 2-wc on "What do you feel you owe your family" (ss the pc is always getting off about his family in Ruds). The advance of a case is the amount of charge you get off it. Long C/Ses ease your Admin lines greatly. They also give less chance of having ruds go out between sessions. Short sessioning has its uses -- small children, sick people, psychos. But long sessions save time in the long run and get the job done. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:mes.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 187  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=7/3/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 28 USE OF QUADRUPLE DIANETICS   Remimeo HGC Auditors Dn & Scn Checksheets C/Ses  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 7 MARCH 1971 (REVISED -- see HCO B 7 Mar 71RA Volume VIII -- 284) Remimeo HGC Auditors Dn & Scn Checksheets C/S Series 28 C/Ses USE OF QUADRUPLE DIANETICS With the introduction of QUADRUPLE DIANETICS (HCO B 3 Mar 1971, "Quadruple Dianetics") the problem of how to C/S it arises. This rule is followed: IN ALL BUT HCO B 24 July 69 DIANETIC ASSISTS WHERE IT CAN BE USED AT ONCE, THE FOURTH FLOW -- 0 -- MUST BE RUN ON ALL ITEMS FORWARD FROM THE FIRST DIANETIC ITEM EVER RUN ON THE CASE. Where a case has already had Flows 2 and 3 run on Singles, one goes back and runs Flow 0 on those items. Where a case has only been run on single flow Dianetics (Flow 1) one goes back to the first Dianetic Item ever run of which record can be found and does F 1, F 2, F 3 and F 0 in that order. To C/S a case for Quad Dianetics it is best to first lay out a Scientology repair, making sure the case is flying, then list out the items already run on Single and Triple. Then get them run so that all four flows are complete on each item in sequence from first to last. This includes any LX items, former practice, drugs or any other engram running. These, like Dianetic items, are listed in their correct sequence of former running. Then the missing flows are run. A rehab step of the flows already run is not necessary. This rehab of a flow already run to EP is usually used only when there is question about its having gone to F/N Cog VGIs. In C/Sing for Quadruple one COMPLETES any flow of an item found that did not F/N. This is indicated on the Item list. Doing the List The item list is done by the auditor in his admin time for well done time credits. All former Dianetic items ever run are listed and what flows have been run on them and to what end phenomena. Example: Engram List 3 Sept 69 Sadness (exact wording that was used) F 1 4 Sept 69 A Bored Feeling F 1 Bogged 6 Sept 69 An Apathetic Outlook F 1 Bogged 6 Nov 69 LX Agonized F 1 F 2 F 3 188 7 Nov 69 Former Therapy F 1 F 2 F 3 F 2 Bogged 9 Nov 69 Earlier Practices F 1 Bogged 10 Nov 69 A Horrible Sadness F 1 Bogged 5 July 70 Int RD F 1 F 2 F 3 F 3 Bogged 6 July 71 An Awful Pressure F 1 Bogged Such a list is then handled from the earliest forward by (a) Completing the bogged flow and (b) Completing the missing flow. Int Ext RD This is handled in its proper sequence on the list if the TA is not high or very low. If the TA on the pc is currently high, Int is handled before any other action is done and all four flows are run on it. A drug chain also makes a high TA if in existence or unflat. Auditor Checkout BEFORE RUNNING ANY DIANETICS QUADRUPLE EVERY AUDITOR HDC, VI, VII, VIII AND C/Ses MUST BE CHECKED OUT THOROUGHLY ON THE QUAD DIANETICS CHECKLIST: HCO B 8 Mar 71 "Precision Dianetics" HCO B 4 Jan 71 "Exteriorization and High TA" HCO B 5 Jan 71 "Going Earlier in R3R and Exteriorization Intensives" HCO B 23 Jan 71 "Exteriorization" HCO B 1 Dec 70 "Dianetics -- Triple Flow Action" HCO B 17 July 69 "Dianetic Command Training Drills" HCO B 20 May 70 "TR 103, 104 Rundown" HCO B 3 Mar 71 "Quadruple Dianetics" HCO B 7 Mar 71 "Use of Quadruple Dianetics" HCO B 5 Mar 71 "Exteriorization and High TA" Quadruple Issue II HCO PL 17 Feb 71 Checksheet of Ext RD including Quad DN Any other HCO B of subsequent issue on this subject. THERE IS A PACK ON THIS SUBJECT AVAILABLE FROM FLAG. Flubs If any auditor has a poor record of getting Dianetic Results, of bogged flows, etc, he needs an HDC Retread. His drills and TRs are out or he is committing Gross Auditing Errors. Dianetics gives remarkable results only when flawlessly done. The commands must be precisely given and all commands 1-9 A-D are used. It is NEVER shorted "because the pc did it". 189 THUS ANY HDC TO AUDIT QUAD DIANETICS MUST (A) HAVE A RECORD OF GOOD FLUBLESS DIANETIC AUDITING or (B) MUST HAVE A RETREAD UNDER A COMPETENT SUPERVISOR and (C) MUST BE STARRATED (for true, not just checked) ON THE ABOVE CHECKSHEET OR THE FULL QUAD PACK. C/Sing Quad Dianetics, with the above, otherwise C/Ses the same as general DIANETICS. It should be realized Dianetics is its own field of C/Sing. This remains the same in Quad Dianetics. Promotion Quad Dianetics should be promoted only when you have Dianetic Auditors, the Auditors checked out and okayed to audit as above and when you CAN DELIVER. IVs or VIs should be available to do the Progress Pgms and steps. Upper Levels When the IVs VIs VIIs VIIIs or IXs are checked out as above, they should use Quad Dianetics to handle any and all Engram steps called for in general auditing. That they are upper level auditors does not make it less necessary to do the above. Results Quad Dianetics, including the rerun actions, produces some very startling new gains. Well done Dianetics always has produced fine results. Quad Dianetics almost doubles the gain. Remedies Any and all Dianetic Remedies and general technology remain in full use. They are not changed at all. Only the zero flow is added in each case. Good Luck. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:mes.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [This HCO B was revised by HCO B 7 March 1971 RA, Revised 6 April 1974, C/S Series 28RA, Use of Dianetics, which is in Volume VIII, page 284. It was also reissued with changes as C/S Series 28RA-1, Use of Quadruple Dianetics, on 13 January 1975 in Volume VIII, page 374.] 190  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=8/3/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 29 CASE ACTIONS, OFF LINE   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 8 MARCH 1971 Remimeo C/S Series 29 CASE ACTIONS, OFF LINE A C/S can be plagued by off line case actions of which he is not informed. The existence of these can wreck his carefully laid out programs and make a case appear incomprehensible. Thus it is up to a C/S to suspect and find these where a case isn't responding normally in auditing. 1. LIFE KNOCKING RUDS OUT FASTER THAN THEY CAN BE AUDITED IN. Schedule sessions closer together and give very long sessions so life hasn't a chance to interfere. Can go as far as requiring person via the D of P to stay in a hotel away from the area of enturbulation or not associate until case is audited up high enough. Shows up most drastically in Interiorization Intensives where no ruds can be run unless the RD is complete. Thus Int has to be done in one session, with the 2 wc Int-Ext the next day. 2. PC PHYSICALLY ILL BEFORE NEXT SESSION AND AUDITING OF A MAJOR ACTION BEING DONE ON A SICK PC WHO SHOULD HAVE ANOTHER C/S ENTIRELY. Happens when delayed or late new Exam reports don't get into folder before C/Sing it. Ginger up Exam routing. Happens when auditors are not alert to the pc's illness and audit anyway. Make auditors not audit and report at once sick pcs. Pcs hiding general illness may show up as no case gain. Answer is to get a full medical exam. 3. SELF-AUDITING. Detected by no lasting gain. Hi-Lo TA Assessment will show it up. Two way Comm on when they began to self audit (usually auditor scarcity or some introverting shock). 4. COFFEE SHOP AUDITING. Meterless fool around, often by students, stirring up cases. Forbid it in an area. 5. TOUCH AND CONTACT ASSISTS INTERRUPTING A GENERAL COURSE OF AUDITING, OFTEN TO NO F/N. Make all such assists be done on a worksheet and make it mandatory to take the pc to an examiner afterwards. W/S and Exam Rpt then appear in folder. 191 The C/S can then get in the other actions (Ruds, S & D, HCO B 24 July 69) on the injured pc. 6. STUDY RUNDOWNS. An illegal and offbeat line can occur when auditing out misunderstoods in study or "Management Word Rundown" or such occurs in the middle of a general auditing program. Require that C/S okay is required. Get such done at the START of courses and BEFORE a major auditing cycle is begun. Enforce this hard ss the other answer that will be taken will be to do it at the end of the cycle and wreck major auditing program results. 7. ILLEGAL PATCH-UPS. Sometimes all through an intensive there is another auditor unknown to the C/S who 2 wcs the pc or audits the pc who is complaining to him or her. Shows up in the Hi-Lo TA Assessment. Forbid it. 8. PEOPLE TALKING ABOUT THEIR CASES. Past life reality is often badly hurt by people who talk about being Napoleon, Caesar and God. This makes "past lives" an unreal subject by bad comparison. Restimulative material is sometimes used to "push someone's buttons". Bullbait that uses actual processes or implants should be stamped out hard. 9. ADVANCED COURSE MATERIAL INSECURITY. I have seen several cases wrecked by careless storage of Ad Course materials where lower levels could get at them. One notable case was a suppressive who got hold of Ad Course materials and chanted them at his wife to drive her insane. She recovered eventually. He didn't. When a C/S gets a whiff of upper level materials on a lower level pc worksheet he should make an ethics matter of it and get it traced. 10. ILLEGAL DRUG USE. A pc who suddenly relapses onto drugs or who has a long drug history can cause a case to look very very odd. The TA flies up. The case, running okay, suddenly ceases to run. Addicts can come off it if given TRs 0 to 9 and an HAS Course (modern). Drug chains are rehabbed and run out by Dianetics. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:mes.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 192  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 21 iDate=8/3/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  EXAMINER'S FORM   Remimeo Examiner's Hat Tech Services Hat (Mimeo on 16 Substance paper)  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 MARCH 1971 Remimeo Examiner's Hat (Replaces and Revises HCO PLs of Tech Services 9 May 69 and 26 Jan AD20, "Examiner's Form") Hat (Mimeo on 16 Substance paper) EXAMINER'S FORM (Important Note: This form is handled exactly as per HCO P/L of 26 Jan AD20 AND NO EXAMINER MAY EXAMINE UNLESS STARRATED ON THAT P/L, and HCO B 5 Mar 71 (C/S Series 25) AND AN E-METER COURSE. Students and pcs can be very upset if this post's duties are not done correctly and org pc and course results ruined.) After Session _________________________ Qual Div ______________________ (Place) Volunteered ___________________________ Date __________________________________ Medical _______________________________ Time __________________________________ Pc or Pre OT name _____________________________________________________________ Last Grade Attained ___________________________________________________________ Grade, Course or Action Being Attested ________________________________________ Pc's Statement (Write down exactly what pc says.) _____________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ _______________________________________________________________________________ TA Position and any BD ________________ Pc Indicators _________________________ State of Needle _______________________________________________________________ F/N Indicated to pc ___________________________________________________________ ______________________________________ Signature of Examiner ROUTE THIS FORM TO TECH SERVICES WHICH ROUTES IT INTO THE FOLDER. WHEN ILLNESS REPORTED MAKE THIS OUT WITH A CARBON UNDER IT AND ROUTE ORIG TO T/S AND FOLDER AND CARBON TO MO OR QUAL SEC. RUSH ROUTE ANY ROLLER COASTER LATER REPORT OR SICK RPT TO FOLDER TO PREVENT C/S ERRORS. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:mes.rd Founder Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [Two earlier issues of the Examiner's Form, HCO PLs 18 September 1968 and 30 September 1968, Issue II, were revised by HCO PL 9 May 1969 which is revised by this issue.] 193  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=13/3/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  LIX HI-LO TA LIST HIGH-LOW TA ASSESSMENT  Type = 11 iDate=17/2/71 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0 Type = 11 iDate=22/2/71 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0 Type = 11 iDate=25/2/71 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0 Type = 11 iDate=3/3/71 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Remimeo Class IX  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 13 MARCH 1971 (CANCELLED -- see HCO B 1 Jan 72RA Volume VIII -- 1) Remimeo Class IX LIX HI-LO TA LIST (Cancels earlier list HCO B 17 Feb 71, HCO B 22 Feb 71 and HCO B 25 Feb 71, which were not released off Flag, and HCO B 3 March 71) This assessment has been developed to detect the reason for high and low TA. There is nothing unusual about the processes necessary to handle these points. Interiorization or a flubbed Interiorization Intensive that must be run with WENT INTO is the usual reason, but run this time with exact R3R using each R3R command and getting it answered. ANY READING QUESTION MUST BE CARRIED TO F/N BY MAJOR ACTION OR 2 WC. TAKE LARGEST BD FIRST UNLESS EXT READS. HIGH-LOW TA ASSESSMENT 1. Do you have a Stuck Picture? _______ (Picture and Masses Remedy Dn) 2. Are you Trapped? _______ (Ext Remedy) 3. Do you have Pictures in Restimulation? _______ (Pictures and Masses Dn) 4. Do you have Masses in Restimulation? _______ (Pictures and Masses Dn) 5. You went in _______ (Means Ext R/D is out) 6. Have you Committed Overts? _______ (2 wc E/S) 7. Are you Not-ising Overts? _______ (2 wc E/S) 8. Do you have Withholds? _______ (Pull them E/S) 9. Are there Considerations not mentioned? _______ (2 wc E/S) 10. Have you Committed Crimes? _______ (2 wc E/S) 11. Have you been Self Auditing? _______ (2 wc to 1st instance E/S) 12. Was a Wrong Overrun found? _______ (Correct it) 13. Has there been an Overrun in Life? _______ (Locate and Indicate to F/N) 14. Has there been an Overrun in Auditing? _______ (Locate and Indicate to F/N) 15. Has a list been overlisted? _______ (Find and Correct to F/N) 16. Have reading items been left charged up? _______ (Spot them and clean them up by taking to F/N) 17. Have F/Ns not been indicated? _______ (Indicate it to F/N) 18. Have auditing questions not been understood? _______ (2 wc get them properly understood) 194 19. Did you say something must have read? _______ (2 wc E/S to F/N) 20. Were you still upset when somebody thought it was handled? _______ (Find and handle to F/N) 21. Are you protesting? _______ (2 wc E/S) 22. Are you urgently trying to leave? _______ (Something Ext R/D undone or unflat) 23. Have you separated out? _______ (Grade II or L10) 24. Are you out and can't go in? _______ (Ext R/D) 25. Are there undisclosed problems? _______ (2 wc E/S) 26. Are you taking or smoking drugs? _______ (Drug remedies) 27. Did you once take drugs? _______ (Drug remedies) 28. Are you out and can't get in? _______ (Ext R/D) 29. Is there a lie? _______ (2 wc E/S) 30. Are you talking to others about your case? _______ (2 wc E/S) 31. Are you listening to others talk about their cases? _______ (2 wc E/S) 32. Have you been looking at or listening to tech materials you shouldn't? _______ (2 wc E/S) 33. Do you have opinions you don't dare say? _______ (2 wc E/S to F/N) 34. Are you here for undisclosed reasons? _______ (2 wc E/S to F/N) 35. Are you not telling your Auditor your Cognitions? _______ (Find what and E/S to F/N) 36. Are you withholding your actual case state? _______ (2 wc E/S to F/N) 37. Are you unwilling to talk to the auditor? _______ (2 wc on what he can't say E/S to F/N) 38. Did your auditor overwhelm you? _______ (2 wc E/S to F/N) 39. Are you scared of what might happen in auditing? _______ (2 wc E/S to F/N) 40. Are you somebody else? _______ (2 wc E/S to F/N) 41. Is there a list error? _______ (Find and correct it to F/N) 42. Are you waiting for something to happen? _______ (2 wc E/S to F/N) 43. Do you think something else is wrong? _______ (2 wc E/S to F/N or handle to F/N) IF EXTERIORIZATION READS CORRECT IT FIRST. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:OJR:-.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 195  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=14/3/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=25/7/73 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  F/N EVERYTHING   Remimeo All Levels  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 14 MARCH 1971R CORRECTED & REISSUED 25 JULY 1973 (Only change being word "by" in para 4 changed to "but".) Remimeo All Levels F/N EVERYTHING Whenever an auditor gets a read on an item from Ruds or a prepared list (L1B, L3A, L4B, etc, etc) IT MUST BE CARRIED TO AN F/N. To fail to do so is to leave the pc with by-passed charge. When a pc has had several reads on various lists which were none of them carried to F/N, it can occur that he will become upset or depressed without any other apparent reason. As one has DONE the lists without F/Ning each item, one now has the mystery of what is wrong? The error is reading items from Ruds or prepared lists cleaned to no read but not carried to F/N. This action (amongst many such refinements) is what makes Flag auditing so smooth and indeed makes it Flag Auditing. When an auditor first tries this he may well think it is impossible. Yet it is simplicity itself. If you know bank structure you know it is necessary to find an earlier item if something does not release. What has been found as a read on a prepared list would F/N if it were the basic lock. So if it doesn't F/N, then there is an earlier (or an earlier or an earlier) lock which is preventing it from F/Ning. So the RULE: NEVER WALK OFF FROM A READING ITEM ON A RUDIMENT OR A PREPARED REPAIR LIST BEFORE YOU CARRY IT DOWN (EARLIER SIMILAR) TO AN F/N. Example: ARC Brk reads. Pc says what it is, Auditor does ARCU CDEI. If no F/N, Auditor asks for an earlier similar ARC Brk, gets it, ARCU CDEI, etc until he gets an F/N. Example: PTP reads. Carry it E/S (earlier similar) until a PTP F/Ns. Example: L4B: Has an item been denied you? Reads. Answered. No F/N. Is there an earlier similar denied item? Answered. F/N. Go on to next reading item on the list. Example: GF assessed once through for reads. The next C/S must take every item on it that read, by 2wc or other process, to an F/N. So there is a much more general rule: EVERY ITEM THAT READS MUST F/N. In Dianetics you get the F/N when you run E/S secondaries or engrams to an erasure, F/N, Cog, VGIs. In Rudiments, every out rud you get a read on is run E/S to F/N. On a prepared list you take each read to an F/N or E/S to F/N. On an LX list you run each flow chain to an F/N. On GF you get by whatever process an F/N. On Listing by the Laws of Listing and Nulling, your eventual item listed must F/N. 196 So another rule: EVERY MAJOR AND MINOR ACTION MUST BE CARRIED TO AN F/N. There are NO exceptions. Any exception leaves by-passed charge on the pc. Also, every F/N is indicated at the conclusion of the action when cog is obtained. You take too soon an F/N (first twitch) you cut the cognition and leave by-passed charge (a withheld cognition). I could take any folder and simply write out the ruds and prepared list reading items and then audit the pc and carry each one to F/N and correct every list so disclosed and wind up with a very shining, cool calm pc. So "Have reading items been left charged?" would be a key question on a case. Using lists or ruds on high or low TAs that are not meant for high or low TAs will get you reading items that won't F/N. So, another rule: NEVER TRY TO FLY RUDS OR DO L1B ON A HIGH OR LOW TA. One can talk the TA down (see HCO B on Talking the TA Down). Or one can assess L4B. About the only prepared lists one can assess are the new Hi-Lo TA HCO B 13 Mar 71 and possibly a GF+40 once through for biggest read. The biggest read will have a blowdown on it and can possibly be brought to F/N. If this occurs then one also handles all other items that read. The most frequent errors in all this are: Not taking a read earlier similar but just checking it and leaving it as "clean". Not using suppress and false on items. And of course leaving a pc thinking things are still charged by failing to indicate the F/N. Indicating an F/N before Cog. Not going back through the folder to handle ruds and items that read but were called "clean" or were simply abandoned. A pc audited under tension of poor TRs has a hard time and does not F/N sometimes, inviting overrun. The rules then to happy pcs are: GOOD TRs. F/N EVERYTHING FOUND ON RUDS AND LISTS. AUDIT WITH TA IN NORMAL RANGE OR REPAIR IT SO IT IS IN NORMAL RANGE. LRH:mes.nt.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright $c 1971, 1973 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 197  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 21 iDate=16/3/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=29/1/75 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  WHAT IS A COURSE?   Remimeo Course Super Course Course Super Checksheets LRH Comm to Enforce  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 MARCH 1971R REVISED 29 JANUARY 1975 Revision in this type style Remimeo Course Super Course Course Super Checksheets LRH Comm to Enforce WHAT IS A COURSE? In Scientology a course consists of a checksheet with all the actions and material listed on it and all the materials on the checksheet available in the same order. "Checksheet Material" means the policy letters, bulletins, tapes, mimeo issues, any reference book or any books mentioned. "Materials" also include clay, furniture, tape players, bulletin boards, routing forms, supplies of pink sheets, roll book, student files, file cabinets and any other items that will be needed. If you look this over carefully, it does not say "materials on order" or "except for those we haven't got" or "in different order". It means what it says exactly. If a student is to have auditing or word clearing rundowns or must do auditing those are under ACTIONS and appear on the checksheet. A course must have a Supervisor. He may or may not be a graduate and experienced practitioner of the course he is supervising but HE MUST BE A TRAINED COURSE SUPERVISOR. He is not expected to teach. He is expected to get the students there, rolls called, checkouts properly done, misunderstoods handled by finding what the student doesn't dig and getting the student to dig it. The Supervisor who tells students answers is a waste of time and a course destroyer as he enters out-data into the scene even if trained and actually especially if trained in the subject. The Supervisor is NOT an "instructor", that's why he's called a "Supervisor". A Supervisor's skill is in spotting dope-off, glee and other manifestations of misunderstoods, and getting it cleaned up, not in knowing the data so he can tell the student. A Supervisor should have an idea of what questions he will be asked and know where to direct the student for the answer. Student blows follow misunderstoods. A Supervisor who is on the ball never has blows as he caught them before they happened by observing the student's misunderstanding before the student does and getting it tracked down by the student. It is the Supervisor's job to get the student through the checksheet fully and swiftly with minimum lost time. The successful Supervisor is tough. He is not a kindly old fumbler. He sets high checksheet targets for each student for the day and forces them to be met or else. The Supervisor is spending Supervisor Minutes. He has just so many to spend. He is spending Student Hours. He has just so many of these to spend so he gets them spent wisely and saves any waste of them. 198 A Supervisor in a course of any size has a Course Administrator who has very exact duties in keeping up Course Admin and handing out and getting back materials and not losing any to damage or carelessness. If Paragraphs One to Three above are violated it is the Course Administrator who is at fault. He must have checksheets and the matching material in adequate quantity to serve the Course. If he doesn't he has telexes flying and mimeo sweating. The Course Admin is in charge of routing lines and proper send-off and return of students to Cramming or Auditing or Ethics. The final and essential part of a course is students. If a course conforms with this P/L exactly with no quibbles, is tough, precisely time scheduled and run hard, it will be a full expanding course and very successful. If it varies from this P/L it will stack up bodies in the shop, get blows and incompetent graduates. The final valuable product of any course is graduates who can apply successfully the material they studied and be successful in the subject. This answers the question What is a Course? If any of these points are out it is NOT a Scientology Course and it will not be successful. Thus, the order "Put a Course there!" means this P/L in full force. So here's the order, WHEN OFFERING TRAINING PUT A COURSE THERE. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd.jh Copyright $c 1971, 1975 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 199  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=15/12/68 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  L4B FOR ASSESSMENT OF ALL LISTING ERRORS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 15 DECEMBER 1968 (REVISED -- see HCO B 15 Dec 68R Volume VIII -- 138) Remimeo (Amends HCO Bulletin of 9 January 1968, List L4A) (ITEM 6 CORRECTED 12 FEBRUARY 1969) (Amended 8 August 1970) (Amended 18 March 1971) L4B FOR ASSESSMENT OF ALL LISTING ERRORS PC'S NAME _____________________________________ DATE __________________________ AUDITOR _______________________________________ 1. DID YOU FAIL TO ANSWER THE LISTING QUESTION? (If it reads, find out what question, clear the question noting whether it reads, if so, list it, find the item and give it to the pc.) 2. WAS THE LIST UNNECESSARY? (If it reads, indicate BPC and indicate that it was an unnecessary action.) 3. WAS THE ACTION DONE UNDER PROTEST? (If it reads, handle by itsa earlier similar itsa.) 4. IS A LIST INCOMPLETE? (If reads, find out what list and complete it, give the pc his item.) 5. HAS A LIST BEEN LISTED TOO LONG? (If so, find what list and get the item off from it by nulling with Suppress, the nulling question being: "On _______ has anything been suppressed?", for each item on the overlong list. Give the pc his item.) 6. HAVE WE TAKEN THE WRONG ITEM OFF A LIST? (If this reads, put in Suppress and Invalidated on the list and null as in 5 above and find the right item and give to the pc.) 7. HAS A RIGHT ITEM BEEN DENIED YOU? (If this reads, find out what it was and clean it up with Suppress and Invalidate and give it to the pc.) 8. HAS AN ITEM BEEN PUSHED OFF ON YOU YOU DIDN'T WANT? (If so, find it and get in Suppress and Invalidate on it and tell pc it wasn't his item and continue the original action to find the correct item.) 9. HAD AN ITEM NOT BEEN GIVEN YOU? (If reads, handle as in 7.) 10. HAVE YOU INVALIDATED A CORRECT ITEM FOUND? (If so, rehab the item and find out why the pc invalidated it or if somebody else did it, clean it up and give it to pc again.) 11. HAVE YOU THOUGHT OF ITEMS THAT YOU DID NOT PUT ON THE LIST? (If so, add them to the correct list. Renull the whole list and give the pc the item.) 12. HAVE YOU BEEN LISTING TO YOURSELF OUT OF SESSION? (If so, find out what question and try to write a list from recall and get an item and give it to the pc.) 200 13. HAVE YOU BEEN GIVEN SOMEBODY ELSE'S ITEM? (If so, indicate to the pc this was not his item. Don't TRY to find whose it was.) 14. HAS YOUR ITEM BEEN GIVEN TO SOMEONE ELSE? (If so, find if possible what item it was and give it to the pc. Don't try to identify the "somebody else".) 15. HAS A RELEASE POINT BEEN BY-PASSED ON LISTING? (If so, indicate the overrun to the pc, rehab back.) 16. HAS A RELEASE POINT BEEN BY-PASSED ON THE QUESTION ONLY? (If so, indicate the overrun to the pc and rehab back.) 17. HAVE YOU GONE EXTERIOR WHILE LISTING? (If so, rehab. If Ext Rundown not given, note for C/S.) 18. HAS IT BEEN AN OVERT TO PUT AN ITEM ON A LIST? (If so, find out what item and why.) 19. HAVE YOU WITHHELD AN ITEM FROM A LIST? (If so, get it and add it to the list if that list available. If not put item in the report.) 20. HAS A WITHHOLD BEEN MISSED? (If so, get it, if discreditable ask "Who nearly found out?") 21. HAS AN ITEM BEEN BY-PASSED? (Locate which one.) 22. WAS A LISTING QUESTION MEANINGLESS? (If so, find out which one and indicate to the pc.) 23. HAS AN ITEM BEEN ABANDONED? (If so, locate it and get it back for the pc and give it to him.) 24. HAS AN ITEM BEEN PROTESTED? (If so, locate it and get the protest button in on it.) 25. HAS AN ITEM BEEN ASSERTED? (If so, locate it and get in the assert button on it.) 26. HAS AN ITEM BEEN SUGGESTED TO YOU BY ANOTHER? (If so, get it named and the protest and refusal off.) 27. HAS AN ITEM BEEN VOLUNTEERED BY YOU AND NOT ACCEPTED? (If so, get off the charge and give it to the pc, or if he then changes his mind on it, go on with the listing operation.) 28. HAS THE ITEM ALREADY BEEN GIVEN? (If so, get it back and give it again.) 29. HAS AN ITEM BEEN FOUND PREVIOUSLY? (If so, find what it was again and give it to pc once more.) 30. HAS AN ITEM NOT BEEN UNDERSTOOD? (If so, work it over with buttons until pc understands it or accepts or rejects it and go on with listing.) 31. WAS AN ITEM DIFFERENT WHEN SAID BY THE AUDITOR? (If so, find out what the item was and give it to the pc correctly.) 32. WAS NULLING CARRIED ON PAST THE FOUND ITEM? 201 (If so, go back to it and get in Suppress and Protest.) 33. HAS AN ITEM BEEN FORCED ON YOU? (If so, get off the reject and suppress and get the listing action completed to the right item if possible.) 34. HAS AN ITEM BEEN EVALUATED? (If so, get off the disagreement and protest.) 35. HAD EARLIER LISTING BEEN RESTIMULATED? (If so, locate when and indicate the by-passed charge.) 36. HAS AN EARLIER WRONG ITEM BEEN RESTIMULATED? (If so, find when and indicate the by-passed charge.) 37. HAS AN EARLIER ARC BREAK BEEN RESTIMULATED? (If so, locate and indicate the fact by itsa earlier similar itsa.) 38. DO YOU HAVE AN ARC BREAK BECAUSE OF BEING MADE TO DO THIS? (If so, indicate it to the pc, check the question if reads. Get earlier similar itsa.) 39. HAS THE LIST CORRECTION BEEN OVERRUN? (If so, rehab.) 40. IS THERE SOME OTHER KIND OF BY-PASSED CHARGE? (If so, find what and indicate it to pc.) 41. WAS THERE NOTHING WRONG IN THE FIRST PLACE? (If so, indicate it to pc.) 42. HAS THE UPSET BEEN HANDLED? (If so, indicate it to the pc.) 43. HAS A LIST PROCESS BEEN OVERRUN? (If so, find which one and rehab.) L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:ldm.rw.dz.rr.nt.rd Copyright $c 1968, 1969, 1970, 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 202  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=19/3/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  LIST-1-C L1C  Type = 11 iDate=8/8/70 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 19 MARCH 1971 Remimeo LIST-1-C L1C (Cancels earlier L1 Lists such as HCO B 8 Aug 70) Used by Auditors in session when an upset occurs, or as ordered by C/S. Handles ARC Broken, Sad, hopeless or nattery pcs. Questions can be prefaced with "Recently" "In this life" "On the Whole Track" or used without. DO NOT USE ON HIGH TA TO BRING IT DOWN. USE HI-LO TA LIST. TAKE ALL READING ITEMS OR VOLUNTEERED ANSWERS Earlier Similar to F/N as they occur. 1. Has there been an error in listing? (If this reads change to L4B at once.) 2. Has a withhold been missed? 3. Has some emotion been rejected? 4. Has some affinity been rejected? 5. Has a reality been refused? 6. Has a communication been cut short? 7. Has a communication been ignored? 8. Has an earlier rejection of emotion been restimulated? 9. Has an earlier rejection of affinity been restimulated? 10. Has an earlier refusal of reality been restimulated? 11. Has an earlier ignored communication been restimulated? 12. Has something been misunderstood? 13. Has someone been misunderstood? 14. Has an earlier misunderstanding been restimulated? 15. Has some data been confusing? 16. Has there been a command you haven't understood? 17. Has there been some word you haven't known the meaning of? 18. Has there been some situation you haven't grasped? 19. Has there been a problem? 20. Has a wrong reason for an upset been given? 203 21. Has a similar incident occurred before? 22. Has something been done other than what was said? 23. Has a goal been disappointed? 24. Has some help been rejected? 25. Has a decision been made? 26. Has an engram been restimulated? 27. Has an earlier incident been restimulated? 28. Has there been a sudden shift of attention? 29. Has something startled you? 30. Has a perception been prevented? 31. Has a willingness not been acknowledged? 32. Has there been no auditing? 33. Did you go Exterior? 34. Have actions been interrupted? 35. Have actions continued too long? 36. Has data been invalidated? 37. Has someone evaluated? 38. Has something been O/Run? 39. Has an action been unnecessary? L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:mes.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [For more data on taking "Volunteered Answers Earlier Similar to F/N" see HCO B 3 July 1971, Auditing by Lists Revised, page 316.] 204  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=19/3/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 30 C/Sing AUDITOR-C/Ses   Remimeo C/S Checksheet All Auditors' Hats  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 19 MARCH 1971 Remimeo C/S Checksheet All Auditors' Hats C/S Series 30 C/Sing AUDITOR-C/Ses When auditors do their own C/Sing, the Org C/S has the additional duty of making certain their C/Ses are correct as well as their sessions. Therefore the Org C/S (which post is now even more vital) has the duty of 1. Seeing that all auditor flubs are handled in a cramming action on the flubbed action. 2. Seeing that all auditor-as-a-C/S errors are handled in a cramming action on the C/S Series. Normally a C/S handles his post on the Fantastic New HGC Line, HCO B 5 Mar 71, C/S Series 25, on a fast flow basis. But he is looking for (a) "Dog cases" -- pcs not running well (b) Auditor errors (c) Auditor Program errors (d) Auditor C/S errors. Those that are F/Ning VGIs at Examiner he lets go through fast verifying the exam report and the next C/S. The moment he sees a contrary exam report (F/N with natter or BIs, high TA or low TA with any statement or no statement) he has to decide (a) Dog Case? (b) Auditor Error? (c) Program Error? (d) Auditor C/S Error? In any of the above the Org C/S takes over and handles what he finds. He must also require a cramming action on any (b) auditor error (c) program error or (d) auditor C/S error. The Org C/S then does it right himself. In any event it is the Org C/S who is fully responsible for all the cases. That the Org C/S finds a program or C/S wrong does not then cause the auditor-as-a-C/S to cease to C/S. Quite the contrary. Even if every program or C/S he writes is wrong and has to be rewritten he still takes all the actions of the auditor-as-a-C/S. 205 DOG CASES Category (a) is the case who just isn't running well. The wrong answer to a dog case is to go on auditing and wasting hours hopefully. The RIGHT answer is to STUDY the case carefully. The Folder Error Summary, the Folder session summary, the sessions, all have to be studied. The standard C/S action of going back to when the pc was running well and coming forward for the error is very much in use. Such a case is the result of a FLUB always. Example: High TA case on Power run on and on with TA in the sky. A careful FES and study of folders revealed that 2 years before, Power had been completed! Every current action was a brutal overrun! Yet the same C/S and ten separate auditors failed to see it! Indicating it and 2wc on the earlier Power handled the O/R. Example: Case RD not running well at all, TA going high. A careful study of the folder session summary at length discovered that the pc had not F/Ned on 2 way comm Int-Ext. 2wc on this point discovered a total mess of command clearing on the Int RD. This opened the door. Pc thereafter ran beautifully. Example: Pc a total nattery mess every session. Careful study found a tiny remark on the white form about going to a psychiatrist. 2wc on it and the antagonism toward auditing and the withhold of having once gone crazy vanished. Case ran well. Careful study is the clue. The Auditor as a C/S may not put in the time needed to really sort the case out. A current FES of recent auditing can also be ordered. This often reveals a lot of oddball goofs which when handled make the case run well. The Org C/S is supposed to be the old master on solving these dog cases by careful study. Heavy laurels to the auditor-as-a-C/S who spots the knot that is tangling the case up. AUDITOR ERRORS The errors of auditors can be so various one only looks to see if the actions of the auditor are standard when the Org C/S has to intervene. Then the outnesses show up. Example: Pc's TA shooting up at session end. Examine the previous C/S. Calls for L1B. Examine session. Auditor is found to be ITSAING ARC Breaks, no ARCU CDEI, no earlier similar. Action ordered, pick up the BD ARC Brk and do ARCU CDEI and carry it E/S to F/N. Action ordered. Auditor to Cramming to do Pattern of Bank, why earlier? and how to fly ruds. Always find and handle auditor goofs by Cramming. You'll never have an HGC unless you do. PROGRAM ERRORS When an auditor-as-a-C/S program is poor, the Org C/S redoes it, sends the Auditor to Cramming on the relevant parts of the C/S Series or tech materials. 206 C/S ERRORS When an auditor-as-a-C/S is found to have written a bad C/S that got by but didn't work or when the next C/S is wrong, the Org C/S sends the auditor- as-a-C/S to Cramming to do the relevant part of the C/S Series or the tech that applies. CRAMMING An org that has no sharp, hot Cramming Section in the Qual Div -- well God help it. That org's tech will always be shaky if not outright criminal. Students need a Cramming or they never really learn not to goof. Where there's no insistence they do not learn. HGC Auditors need a Cramming. They go stale. New HCO Bs aren't understood unless energetically checked out. The C/S in the Tech Div is at total risk where he is not backed up by Cramming. The new HCO B 5 Mar 71, C/S Series 25, the new line, demands a Cramming as no auditor is likely to learn to C/S. You can't risk fast flow with no Cramming to fall back on. And an org's tech will never improve unless it has a Cramming for HGC auditors and course students. Qual has to have a library of HCO Bs and course packs and books to really stay on the ball. Then its Cramming is hot, on the point, specializing mainly in finding what the auditor has neglected or misunderstood and getting it done. Cramming and use of it is the key to a fully satisfied field and an expanding org. The big plus points of the new HGC line are huge increases in delivery volume, very cocky never-blow auditors who get wins, an enthusiastic field, and last but not least, newly trained and competent C/Ses who guard tech by knowing a correct C/S! The new line increases speed. At the same time it requires greater technical safeguards. The new HGC line won't work unless you have a competent Qual Cramming and an Org C/S who knows his business and detects and pitchforks all flubs in auditing and C/Sing into the fast hands of a hot no-nonsense Cramming Officer. The new line of HCO B 5 Mar 71 is a great success. It greatly increases delivery quality as well as volume if this HCO B is stressed in putting the new line into action. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:mes.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 207  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=27/3/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  DIANETIC ERASURE   Remimeo Dianetic Checksheet  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex Remimeo HCO BULLETIN OF 27 MARCH 1971 Dianetic Checksheet DIANETIC ERASURE There are several corny stunts that can occur in Dianetics, any of which will add up to no F/N. 1. Trying to run an item that didn't read on being given or when being called. As the chain is not charged it will be hard if not impossible to run. BD items are of course the very best and almost always erase very easily. 2. Starting a new session with a new item with the TA way way up. To play it safe in Dianetic auditing (it can be handled in Scientology) the Dianetic auditor who starts a session and a new action at the same time with the TA high is very foolish. It may not be high on what the auditor is now newly trying to run. The correct action is not to start the session. Just end off with no auditing done. When the TA has settled down on another day (3 days to 10 days later) begin your new action. The pc is ill or is having trouble in life. If you were running a chain in the last session and continue it in the next, disregard the high TA. A way to get around this is get some new items from the high TA pc and take one that blows down well. and you can probably bring it off. Safest is don't audit a high TA pc unless to repair an unflat chain (or to run Exteriorization RD). This rule is variable. But you should know it is risky to audit a new item taken from an earlier list when the pc comes into session with a high TA as it may not be high on what you are about to run and so you may get no F/N. The only remedy is to get new items and choose a BD one (or to turn the pc over to a Scientology auditor to assess a Hi-Lo TA list and handle). 3. Running a narrative item can lead to no F/N. (A Narrative Item describes only one possible incident, i.e. "dropping an ironing board on my foot" = no chain = possible no F/N.) 4. Running a pc who has exteriorized in auditing on something other than an Exteriorization RD will produce a high TA and no F/N in the session. After Ext RD has been run anything can be run. 5. Probably the WORST blunder is failing to ask for ABCD again when the pc says "It's erased" but the TA is still high. This is really a corny error. TA 4.9. Pc says, "It's erased! All blank now," and the auditor fails to ask ABCD once more. There is a moment when the pc's NOT-IS of the picture squeezes it into invisibility. The mass of it is still there. It takes just one or two more passes to get the BD and F/N. It's up to the auditor not to let the pc go without that additional ABCD. Then the BD and F/N happen with Cog and VGIs. This error is more common than one would think. 6. Failure to ask for the Earlier Beginning will also cause a long grind (ABCD over and over) and no F/N. 7. Of course, not asking for an Earlier Incident mentioning the same item will also cause a grind and no F/N. When the item isn't also mentioned in the command the pc can jump chains. And if the Earlier Beginning is not asked for at all of course there will be no F/N. 8. Auditing a pc under protest will cause the TA to stay up and no F/N. The skilled Dianetic Auditor knows these things cold and does not make these errors. Thus he gets his end of session F/N regularly and gets F/N at the Examiner as well when the case has had a few sessions. LRH:mes.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder 208  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=31/3/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 31 PROGRAMMING AND MISPROGRAMMING   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 31 MARCH 1971 Remimeo C/S Series 31 PROGRAMMING AND MISPROGRAMMING There are three important areas of technical application: 1. Auditing Cases. 2. Case Supervising Cases. 3. Programming Cases. Auditing generally should be gotten into an org on the routine basis of: 1. Get Auditing Volume UP. 2. Get Auditing Quality UP. 3. Get C/Sing Volume UP. 4. Get C/Sing Quality UP. 5. Get Programming Volume UP. 6. Get Programming Quality UP. To do it in any other sequence is to organize before producing or to inhibit production. Auditing quality is raised by getting in Cramming and getting Cramming done. C/S quality is raised by C/S study of cases and the Qual Sec Cramming the C/S. Programming quality is raised by getting FESes done so that the action does not block production and Cramming or Programming and then studying the case to make the Programming more real and effective. MISPROGRAMMING 1. Programming a case without data is risky. Dropping out the FES step, not getting White Forms done, etc, short-cutting on data in general can cost tremendous amounts of lost auditing. 2. Doing a vague general hopeful program of Repair (Progress) trusting something will come up is ineffective. With data on the person's life even on a pc never before audited, one can hit the key points even if only with 2-way comm on them. Cases that have been audited and are boggy are so for a reason. Programming without finding that reason can be very ineffective and result in few wins. 3. Running a new major program into an incomplete major program can be as deadly as failing to flatten a process before starting another process only more so. 4. Failing to end off a program when its End Phenomena is achieved is another gross error. 5. Being too ignorant of the basic bank and the tech theory (as different than processes) is another barrier to programming. 6. Not Programming at all. The above six are the principal gross errors in programming. LRH:mes.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright $c 1971 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 209  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=4/4/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 32 USE OF QUAD DIANETICS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 4 APRIL 1971 (REVISED -- see HCO B 4 Apr 71RA Volume VIII -- 274) Remimeo C/S Series 32 USE OF QUAD DIANETICS With the introduction of Quadruple Dianetics it is mandatory important urgent that one does not audit four flow items until one has brought all earlier Dianetic Items into four flows. TRIPLE This also applies to Triple Dianetics. On a case where only Flow One (Single) has been run, you don't suddenly run a Triple (F1, F2, F3) such as on the LX Class VIII Lists until one has run the earliest Dn item ever run (or that can be found) on Dn Triple and then on forward on Triple up to the LX. QUAD However, one would now not bother to run only Triples forward. He would locate the earliest Single or Triple (if no Single Flow) item and run it Quadruple by now running the missing flows. EXT RD In doing an EXTERIORIZATION RUNDOWN one mustn't suddenly introduce the 4th flow (F Zero). If the case has only had Triples in Dianetics one mustn't suddenly introduce a Flow Zero on EXT. The case should be done on Triple Flow EXT. THEN all earlier Dn Items in sequence run are (a) Listed from W/S or Folder Summaries. (b) Brought up to current by running in all the missing flows of Quad. (c) The EXT RD fourth flow is audited in when one gets to it. REASON Auditing additional flows while earlier items remain Single or Triple restimulates the missing flows and stacks them up as mass. They can make a pc uncomfortable until run. All the missing flows (that were not run) are still potential mass. This mass restimulates like something too late on the chain when a flow not run on earlier items is run on later items. Auditing itself is a sort of time track. The earliest session blows the later sessions. FULL FLOW TABLE Before running Quad Dianetics one makes a table of earlier items run. Like this: FULL FLOW TABLE Flow Date Item Previously Run Must Run 2/3/62 Guf Shoulder F 1 F 2, 3, 0 3/3/67 Gow in Foot F 1 F 2, 3, 0 30/4/67 Chow in Chump F 1 F 2, 3, 0 29/9/68 LX Anger F 1, 2, 3 F 0 LX Peeved F 1, 2, 3 F 0 4/10/69 Feeling Numb F 1, 2, 3 F 0 5/9/70 EXT RD F 1, 2, 3 F 0 9/10/70 Feeling of Goof F 1, 2, 3 F 0 10/10/71 Dn Assist on Head F 1 F 2, 3, 0 210 FLOWS F 1 is FLOW ONE, something happening to self. F 2 is FLOW TWO, doing something to another. F 3 is FLOW THREE, others doing things to others. F 0 is FLOW ZERO, self doing something to self. R3R COMMANDS Standard R3R Commands are used on Quad Dianetics. They are the subject of another HCO B. The Zero Command however is very easy being "Locate an incident of (loss or emotion) (pain and unconsciousness) when you caused yourself to have a(an) (item)" with the other commands of R3R as usual. NARRATIVE The question will come up, do we Triple or Quad Narrative items or Multiple somatic items. The test is, did the flows already run F/N when they were originally run. If they did, include them. If they didn't run exclude them. This does not mean you omit everything that didn't run. REPAIR While auditing this FULL FLOW DIANETICS you will find various chains that did not F/N when originally run. These are included and should be concluded to F/N. This means one has to find out if they by-passed the F/N, went too early, jumped the chain, etc. Usually an L3A assessed on that faulty action will give the answer. It is easy to make these old flubbed chains F/N unless you work at it too hard. Usually the reason they didn't is visible on the old worksheet. The auditor forgot to ask for Earlier Beginning or by-passed the F/N or jumped the chain or tried to run it twice forgetting he'd run it before. Corny errors. RESULT The result of doing a FULL FLOW DIANETIC ACTION on a case is quite spectacular. The shadowy remains of somatics blow, mass blows and the pc comes up shining. OFFERING FFD Offering the public Full Flow Dianetics must include the cost of C/S work since it is sometimes lengthy. It is best to sell the action at a flat price that's more than adequate to cover the auditing ss well ss the hours of FESing and FF table making as the time can be quite long. The auditing can be remarkably brief. The greatest amount of time is usually spent on the C/Sing and table making. When offering the package it should be called Quadruple Dianetics -- 4 times more powerful than previous auditing. A C/S must liaise with the Dissem Sec and Treasury Sec on selling it or he'll find the org is losing money doing the C/Sing and tables. A nice big fat flat price, not by hours, is best. OT WARNING When doing Quadruple Dianetics on Clears and OTs (and a very few others) it may be found that many chains are now missing or are just copies of the original. Don't be disturbed. Pc says they're gone now they're gone. Just F/N the fact and carry on with the next flow or item. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:mes.rd Founder Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [See also HCO B 4 Apr. 71-1R, Addition of 13 Jan. 75, C/S Series 32RA-1R, Use of Quad Dianetics, in Volume VIII, page 377.] 211  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=5/4/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 33 TRIPLE AND QUAD RERUNS   Remimeo All Auditors C/Ses Class VIII  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 5 APRIL 1971 (REVISED -- see HCO B 5 Apr 71 RA Volume VIII -- 286) Remimeo All Auditors C/S Series 33 C/Ses Class VIII TRIPLE AND QUAD RERUNS LAW: WHEN ONE OR MORE OF THE FOUR FLOWS OF AN ITEM OR GRADE ARE LEFT UNRUN, WHEN USED IN LATER PROCESSES THE EARLIER UNRUN ONES RESTIMULATE AND MAKE MASS. This tells you that high TAs, heavy pressures and even illness can come from by-passed flows. BY-PASSED FLOWS Example: Dianetic Singles have been run on 7 items. Now the auditor begins to run new items Triple without running Triple on the already run items. The result will be 7 unrun Flow 2s and seven unrun Flow 3s. These will restimulate and form mass and by-passed charge. Example: Now let us say all 7 previous items have been run Triple. And the auditor now runs a new item Quadruple. This leaves 7 unrun Zero chains. These can restimulate and form mass and by-passed charge. Example: Now let us say that Dianetics was all run Single and Grades were run Triple. This will restimulate the Dn chains F2 and F3. Example: Let us say that Dianetics and Scientology Grades were all run Triple. An Exteriorization Rundown is now run Quad. This will throw all Dianetic and Scientology unrun Flow Zeros into restimulation and give by- passed charge. ANY LATER GRADE RUN WITH MORE FLOWS THAN USED IN EARLIER ACTIONS CAN THROW THE EARLIER UNFLAT FLOWS INTO RESTIM, PILE UP MASS GIVING HIGH TA AND BPC GIVING ARC BREAKS. REPAIR The more the condition is repaired by L1C, L4B, etc, etc, the worse the Mass gets. SOURCE OF HIGH TA Thus High TAs have three principal sources: 1. Overruns 2. Auditing Past Exterior 3. Earlier Unrun flows restimulated by those flows used in later actions. There are other minor ones such as Drug Background, illness, etc as per Hi-Lo TA Assessment. REHABS One must NOT recklessly or continuously rehab a past major action. This causes overrun. The thetan is placed at the end of the incidents not yet in restimulation or run and the bank gets more solid. MASSY THETANS The whole trick of this universe is contained in thetans copying or picturing incidents and then getting stuck in the later portion of them. "Incidents" is the keynote. A Thetan is incident hungry. This is what traps him. For some reason he has to be at the earliest end of incidents to erase them. The later he is in incidents and the later he is on the track the more solid he is. 212 This also applies to the "auditing time track". By omitting things like flows on the auditing time track, the thetan thus becomes massy. The whole theory of the Exteriorization Remedy is based on having gone out (later) after he went in (earlier). So Exteriorizing can stick him. (People buy the Ext RD to Exteriorize but the remedy is only done to permit further auditing. They Ext of course when the bank is handled.) When flows of items are by-passed and then later restimulated by auditing them, mass occurs. GETTING IN ALL FLOWS When doing additional flows on earlier items or processes one must also check or rehab those flows marked as run to F/N in worksheets. This again will leave unflat flows and BPC unless it is done. And if it is overdone it will raise the TA by overrun. So if one had a case that had Single Dianetics and was later run on Triple for new items (but the Singles not done into Triple) one would have to RUN FIRST the missing unrun flow or flows and then check the first Single F1 for flatness, then check other previously run flows. The rule is run the previously unrun one or ones first to get charge off, then verify or run the ones listed as run already. Then one would do the same for the next item. Run the previously unrun flow or flows and then verify or run those listed as already run to be sure they F/N. All items, in chronological sequence, and all processes, would have to be run Quad. IT WOULD BE A WASTE OF TIME NOW TO RUN IN ONLY TRIPLES. Whether you have the Quad commands or not they are easy to figure out as you are only missing the Zero Flow, self to self. So all C/Ses and Auditing actions are "Rehab or Run F1, F2, F3, F0" when getting in all flows on things run to date. HIGH TA When you are sure an EXT RD has been done correctly and its 2 wc went F/N and the TA later goes high, you check the EXT RD. That is the most usual reason. This simple action is amazingly subject to flubs. If the TA goes high later you can do a Hi-Lo TA Assessment and handle. If the TA is still high or low, you had better check the state of flows. Were more flows run on later actions than were run on earlier actions? If so, your pc has felt massy, sometimes even ill. The right action is to get in all flows from the beginning. And do it Quad. Bring all his auditing up to Quad. (If his folder is not available, he has kind of had it. I know of no way, at this writing, to recover lost Dn items but will have to work something out.) NOT IN TROUBLE If the pc is not in trouble, his best bet is to get on up the grades to Expanded OT III. IN TROUBLE If he is massy and is having trouble the best bet is to 213 1. Be totally sure of his Int RD. 2. Check O/Rs particularly of a major grade twice or by-passed F/Ns, locate and indicate them. 3. FES, list the items and grades and do a Full Flow action from the beginning of his auditing, raising them all to Quadruple. RUNNING ZERO FLOWS The Zero Flow in Dianetics is a bit strange. It can be done by full R3R BUT it often depends on the decision the pc made and may F/N very suddenly. It is easily overrun and can be very fast. A pc can be gotten into trouble on Zero Flows if the auditor is slow and is not alert to his meter and misses the F/N and gives R3R commands after the flow has blown. REHAB OR RUN The auditor getting in Zero Flows can also ARC Brk the pc by failing to verify if the previously run flows are flat. All the auditor wants is to see them F/N on the command. If they don't he runs them. Sometimes when he has "run them" again he finds they are being overrun or run twice and has to rehab them by finding this out. The pc sometimes doesn't know until he actually starts to run them. Then he finds they are already run. The clue to this is a climbing TA. If the TA goes up, get off that flow and rehab it. Example: Pc at first thinks "Pain in shoulder" F2 was never run. Starts to run it. TA goes up. Auditor must pull him off of it by finding out if it is being run twice and rehab it to F/N. The moral in all these reruns is don't firefight, keep an L1C List and an L3A List handy and use them. RESULTS The results of straightening up the Int-Ext RD, rehabbing O/Rs and putting in ALL FLOWS on a pc are fantastic. Getting an All Flows Rundown done correctly gives one all the latent gain the pc has been begging for. So send to Cramming all C/Ses and auditors who flub. Program it Right. C/S it right. Audit it right. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:mes.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [This HCO B was revised by HCO B 5 April 1971 RA, Revised 8 April 1974, C/S Series 33RA, Triple Reruns, which is in Volume VIII, page 286. It was also reissued with changes as C/S Series 33RA-1, Triple and Quad Reruns, on 13 January 1975, Volume VIII, page 380.] 214  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=5/4/71 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=1 rDate=21/10/74 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  SUMMARY OF HOW TO WRITE AN AUDITOR'S REPORT AND WORKSHEETS FOR HQS CO-AUDIT  Type = 12 iDate=5/4/71 Issue=1 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Remimeo HQS Course  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 5 APRIL 1971R Issue II Remimeo REVISED 21 OCTOBER 1974 HQS Course CANCELS BTB 5 APRIL 1971 Issue I SAME TITLE SUMMARY OF HOW TO WRITE AN AUDITOR'S REPORT AND WORKSHEETS FOR HQS CO-AUDIT AUDITOR'S REPORT An Auditor's Report should contain: Date Name of Auditor Name of Pc Condition of Pc at session start Time session started What process was run -- LISTING THE EXACT COMMAND Whether any difficulties or upsets occurred. Was Supervisor called? Whether process is complete or not F/N, cognition and position of TA Time session ended Condition of Pc at session end Pc gains or comments Length of session. WORKSHEETS A worksheet is supposed to be the complete running record of the session from beginning to end. The Auditor should not be skipping from one page to another but should just be writing page after page after page as the session goes along. The Auditor writes the wording of the process being run and then the number of each question from the process as he asks it. The Auditor also writes in the Pc's answers and any originations and whether the Pc did the command or not. A worksheet is always foolscap, 8 x 13 inches, written on both sides and each page is numbered. Pc's name is written on each separate sheet. A worksheet may be in 2 columns depending on how big the writing of the Auditor is. When the session is completed, the worksheets are put in proper sequence and stapled with the Auditor's Report Form on top from beginning to end of session. Time notations should be made at regular intervals throughout the session. When running various processes in a session, mark each one clearly, noting time it was started and ended. Auditor's Report Forms and worksheets are never re-copied. The Auditor should always read over his worksheets before turning in the folder to the Supervisor, and, if any words or letters are missing or cannot be read, they should be written in with a different colored pen. 215 It is a serious offence to give any session or assist (including locational assists) without making an Auditor's Report -- or to copy the original Report after the session and submit a copy instead of the real Report. Assist Reports that are only contact, locational, or touch assists, may be written after the session and handed in to the Supervisor. ALL REPORTS OF ALL SESSIONS GO INTO THE PC'S OWN FOLDER. Otherwise past auditing cannot be checked and the case cannot be Case Supervised. If these rules are followed, it will make the Supervisor's job much easier and the Auditor's Reports more valuable. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 216  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=6/4/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 34 NON F/N CASES   Remimeo Class VIII All C/Ses All Auditors  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 6 APRIL 1971 Remimeo Class VIII All C/Ses All Auditors C/S Series 34 NON F/N CASES When cases do not bring an F/N VGIs to the Examiner, it is the signal to study the whole case anew and find the bug or bugs that keep it from running and get them handled. Recently I took over a whole series of these non F/N VGI at Examiner cases and very very carefully studied each one. IN EVERY EXAMINER NON F/N CASE I FOUND FLAGRANT OUT TECH IN (A) THE PROGRAMMING (B) THE C/SING AND (C) THE AUDITING. All three outnesses existed. These cases were taken as all the Non F/N Exam reports on a line containing hundreds of folders and over 600 w.d. hours a week. So you can see that these errors had been missed by expert C/Ses and Auditors. The errors were missed because HOPE was being used instead of study. There was a hope that just routine C/Ses and auditing would work it out eventually. The fact of non F/N at Examiner was not given sufficient importance. The fact is that many who F/Ned at the Examiner had small flaws in them yet still got by. The Exam Non F/N indicates FLAGRANT OUT TECH in the Programming and the C/Sing and the auditing. That's what it takes. After a bug is found and corrected the case still may not F/N at the Examiner for a while. But after that while is passed the failure to give the Examiner an F/N means another bug and more study. One case I found had had a major grade done twice two years apart. This was pointed out and rehabbed. But after 2 or 3 sessions the TA remained high. A restudy now found Recall Flow 2 of the Exteriorization Rundown had been run months ago to F/N and then continued for dozens of commands with the TA rising to 4.5. This was then repaired. The case then began to F/N at the Examiner. It now runs like an ordinary case. There is always a bug, not necessarily current, often very old, in these Exam Non F/N Cases. There are sometimes two or three bugs. The answer is NOT go on C/Sing and hope. The answer IS, study and find the bug. Cases run on triples after a long list of singles is a type of bug. Cases exteriorizing and then getting no Ext RD is another bug. Cases given false reads or already run w/hs, cases who don't tell their cogs, cases who were on drugs but drugs were never run, cases that Rockslammed but no crime 217 found, any of the GF 40 or GF reading items, cases with lists out, cases that are always sad or tired ... well these types of cases are the usual bugged cases. But even they sometimes F/N if only to roller coaster. The general rule of going back to where the case was running well and coming forward still holds. But an audit past Exteriorization can be before that and only eventually catch up. General repair is harmful when a big bug exists. Every case I examined had a big bug. Flagrant god-awful overruns, messed up Exteriorization Rundown, three major programs begun, each incomplete, engram after engram botched and run to high TA then walked off from. The errors were real! They had been sitting there for some time unnoticed. Session after session mounting up into piles of wasted auditing. Sick pcs are another indicator. Pc F/Ns at Exam, then reports sick. Look behind it you find some wild program, C/S and auditing error. So the answer is to STUDY THE CASE. Get a total FES done if one has never been done. Get a current FES done or do it yourself. Then examine the programs and the FESes and Folder Summaries and suddenly you'll find it. Fortunately there aren't many things that can really foul a case up. 1. Overruns concealed within work sheets. Major grades twice. 2. Auditing Past Exterior or flubbed Ext RDs. 3. Earlier unrun flows restimulated by later runs on those flows. 4. GF + 40 Items. 5. Never handled out lists. 6. Undetected drugs or drugs never handled by Dianetics. 7. False reads called (as in w/hs that "won't blow"). 8. Hidden standards. 9. Long Duration ARC Brks. 10. Impractical or inapplicable programs. 11. Major actions started never completed. 12. Overrepair. There can be combinations of these. So there aren't many. It's really knowing what is right so well that the wrong shows up like skywriting. Sometimes the errors are silly. A bogged Dianetic case had gotten tons of VI repair. The C/S, an VIII, had never realized Dianetic C/Sing is its own brand of C/Sing. He didn't shift gears to Dianetic C/Sing when C/Sing Dianetics sessions. The auditor way back had not known that when the pc originates "It's erased" and the TA remains 218 high, his correct action is one more A B C D. This C/S had then tried Class VI remedies instead of telling the auditor "Flatten or rehab the last chain". When the chains left unflat were rehabbed all was suddenly well. Another case was interrupted for a year on a major action and when returned to auditing wss begun on a long, long repair program. Inches of folder later the interrupted program was found and resumed and the case did great. All that "hopeful" repair wss lost work. Ten minutes of case study would have saved twenty hours of useless repair. The stable datum is CASES MODERATELY WELL PROGRAMMED, C/SED AND AUDITED RUN WELL. So cases that don't run well (unchanging Exam natter comment, Non F/N) have a BIG error in Programming, C/Sing and Auditing. Look well and you will find it. And if that isn't it, there was another to be found as well. If you can't find the folder or data in it you should take every imaginable measure to acquire more data. D of P Interviews, 2wc sessions, telexes to his last org and telegrams to his auditors. But get data from somewhere somehow. Soon, when hours pick up and skill, all auditing will be sold by package not by hours. So learn economy of hours! An auditor or C/S who really knows his theory and has a good grasp of practical application knows the right way. From that he can easily see how things are wrong. An ounce of case study is worth ten pounds of wasted sessions. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 219  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=11/4/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  L3B DIANETICS AND EXT RD REPAIR LIST   IMPORTANT Remimeo Dn Checksheets Ext Checksheets Class IV Class VI Class VII Class VIII Class IX  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 11 APRIL 1971 (REVISED -- see HCOB 11 Apr 71RA Volume VIII -- 265) Remimeo Dn Checksheets Ext Checksheets Class IV IMPORTANT Class VI Class VII Class VIII Class IX L3B DIANETICS AND EXT RD REPAIR LIST This list includes the most frequent Dianetic errors. Use up to Question 28 as the usual use. Then if the situation does not solve, use the rest of the list. A high or low TA and a bogged case can result from failures to erase a chain of incidents. THIS LIST as it can have different or several errors. REMEMBER THAT YOUR PC MAY NOT BE SUFFICIENTLY TRAINED TO UNDERSTAND ALL THESE QUESTIONS: IF ONE READS AND HE SAYS HE DOESN'T UNDERSTAND IT, CLEAR IT AND REASSESS (don't explain it and take it as it read on a misunderstood not on a fact). RUNNING PCS ON DIANETICS WITHOUT A FULL AND COMPLETE DN C/S 1 INDOCTRINATION IS A FOOLISH ACTION. TAKE ANY READ FOUND TO F/N BY INDICATION OR FULL REPAIR OF IT. 1. The Item or symptom being run had no charge on it. _______ Indicate it was a false read, spot when it was run, where it was run and get an F/N. 2. The same incident or pictures were run before. _______ Indicate that an overrun has occurred. If no F/N spot when, spot where and get an F/N. 3. A session was started on a new item while an old one was not erased. _______ TA would have been high on an old item or the Interiorization Rundown and the auditor went on anyway with a new item. Find what the old item was and repair it with a new assessment on the earlier chain. Indicate fact to the pc. 4. The item being run described just one incident. _______ (Narrative Item.) Find the somatics, emotions, attitudes of the incident and run them as chains as per Standard Dianetics. 5. The incident had an earlier beginning. _______ Move the pc to the earlier beginning and proceed as per Standard Dianetics R3R. 6. There were earlier incidents stirred up and not erased. _______ Find what chain or item and run it to completion by R3R. This condition sometimes leaves pc with the ARC Brk effect of by-passed charge and is a basic example of by-passed charge. 7. Stirred up earlier unrun incidents. _______ (Same as 6.) 8. When running one item went into another instead and ran a different set of pictures. _______ Jumped chain. 220 9. When you said it was erased it still had a mass. _______ Auditor does ABCD again on the item one or two more times to get BD F/N. If TA goes up ask for earlier beginning or earlier similar on same incident to F/N. 10. You were protesting. _______ Find out what was being protested and handle it. 11. You were still taking drugs or medicine that had not worn off. _______ 12. You had a misunderstood on the commands. _______ Clear them up. 13. You had a misunderstood on what you were supposed to be doing. _______ Clear it up, get it done right. 14. A wrong item was given. _______ This could also be a listing error. If not sure what it is, shift to L4B. Otherwise find it and indicate it as a wrong item and that all other actions connected with it were wrong. You can also date the session in which it occurred. And you can also find earlier similar wrong items. 15. Has an earlier Dianetic upset been restimulated? _______ Find the earlier one and straighten it out. Also it can go back 2 or 3 more earlier mix-ups. Straighten out as you go back. Then always check for "any earlier Dianetic upset" if you get no F/N. 16. There was an Incorrect date. _______ Correct it. 17. There was an Incorrect duration. _______ Correct it. 18. There was a false date. _______ Find the real date despite the false date in the incident. 19. There was a false duration. _______ Find the real duration despite the false duration in the incident. 20. Is there a stuck picture? _______ Do 1-19 again on the picture and handle. 21. Is there a persistent mass? _______ (Handle as in 24.) 22. Was this or an earlier action unnecessary? _______ 23. Was there nothing wrong in the first place? _______ 24. Did you have trouble with a pressure item or with pressure on an item? _______ Date it exactly by meter and find out where it occurred in the universe. If done exactly right, it will blow up and vanish and F/N. If this doesn't work, do this list 1 down to 24 on it and correct it to F/N. 25. Did you move out of your head earlier in auditing? _______ Do Ext RD. 26. Was your Exteriorization Rundown messed up? _______ Check folder on each flow and on the 2wc next day to be sure each flow was run to erasure and the 2wc to F/N. Remember that an auditor report can be a false report, and if you can't find the error in the folder, then do 1 to 24 on each flow. DO NOT AUDIT A PC FURTHER UNTIL THE EXT RD IS TOTALLY CORRECTED. IF YOU DO THE TA WILL RISE, WON'T COME DOWN AND PC WILL BE UPSET OR ILL. IN CHOOSING WHICH OF THESE READING ITEMS TO HANDLE, ALWAYS HANDLE EXT RD ITEMS FIRST THEN HANDLE THE REST. 221 DO NOT CONTINUE AUDITING A PC WHOSE EXT RD WAS MESSED UP AND NOT CORRECTED. ANY ERROR REMAINING ON AN EXT RD IS DEADLY. 27. Were you being asked things you couldn't answer? _______ 28. Did the auditor refuse to accept what you were saying? _______ Get this and earlier similar instances until you get an F/N VGIs. FROM HERE ON ASSESS FURTHER ONLY IF PC TA OR UPSET REMAIN UNHANDLED. IF ANY OF THE FOLLOWING READ, INDICATE IT, GET AN F/N OR GET AN EARLIER SIMILAR UNTIL IT F/Ns. 29. Has an Item read under protest? _______ 30. Was there no interest in running item? _______ 31. Was there no charge on item in the first place? _______ 32. Has an item been misworded? _______ 33. Were you more interested in running another item? _______ 34. Was the item suppressed? _______ 35. Was the item invalidated? _______ 36. Was more than you could see demanded? _______ 37. Were 2 or more engrams found on the same date? _______ 38. Did you skid into another incident? _______ 39. Did you move to another chain? _______ 40. Did you change the item while running it? _______ 41. Were you running an item different from that assessed? _______ 42. Was an Implant restimulated? _______ 43. Were earlier errors on engrams restimulated? _______ 44. Was important data by-passed? _______ 45. Was an incident skipped? _______ 46. Did 2 or more incidents get confused? _______ 47. Has a withhold been missed? _______ 48. Has an incident been left too heavily charged? _______ 49. Has a chain been abandoned? _______ 50. Has an incident been abandoned? _______ 51. Were you prevented from running an incident? _______ 52. Were processes changed on you? _______ 53. Has basic on a chain been by-passed? _______ 54. Has an erasure been denied you? _______ 55. After it was erased did you have to put it back to erase it? _______ 56. Were you running copies of the original after it had gone? _______ 57. Have you gone past erasure into another chain? _______ 58. Have several different chains been pulled in? _______ 222 59. Has a cognition been chopped? _______ 60. Has an F/N been indicated too soon? _______ 61. Has the somatic gone but picture still there? _______ 62. Should a basic be run through one more time? _______ 63. Have you been held up by the auditor? _______ 64. Were you distracted in session? _______ +65. Did you go exterior in an incident? _______ 66. Was an incident overrun? _______ +67. Did you go exterior in session? _______ *68. Have you not wanted to go earlier than this life? _______ 69. Has it been all black? _______ 70. Was it all invisible? _______ 71. Was the incident really a false or implanted occurrence? _______ *72. Have you had constantly changing pictures? _______ 73. Have you never had any pictures? _______ 74. Are you having to put it there to run it? _______ (Get Earlier Similar times to F/N VGIs.) 75. Are incidents being overrun? _______ 76. Has some Major auditing action been done twice? _______ 77. Has there been an unnecessary action? _______ 78. Was there nothing wrong in the first place? _______ 79. Was the real reason missed? _______ 80. Was something else wrong? _______ (Do a Green Form.) NOTE: + If questions 65 or 67 read and the pc has not had Interiorization Rundown and the associated 2 way comm the auditor ends off and sends folder to C/S so it can be C/Sed for Ext RD. * If questions 68 or 72 read, after indicating BPC, the auditor would end off and return folder to C/S. WARNING: Do not use any Prepcheck-type buttons during engram running or add overts to this list as they will "mush" engrams. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:mes.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [This HCO B was revised on 28 January 1974 and became HCO B 11 April 71R, L3RC. It is in Volume VIII on page 245. L3RC was revised on 8 March 74 and became HCO B 11 April 71RA, L3RD, which is in Volume VIII, page 265.] 223  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=12/4/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 35 EXTERIORIZATION ERRORS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 12 APRIL 1971 (REVISED -- see HCO B 16 Dec 71RA Volume VI -- 456) Remimeo C/S Series 35 EXTERIORIZATION ERRORS (Reference HCO B 11 Apr 71, "L3B". Reference HCO B 27 Mar 71, "Dianetic Erasure".) Almost all the Errors in an Exteriorization Rundown are Dianetic errors. Most are very ordinary, even corny. IT IS VITAL TO CORRECT AN EXT RD ERROR AS A FIRST ACTION. There is one Ext RD error that is not a purely Dianetic error and that is the error doing anything else at all before an Ext RD is done properly or an Ext RD error is fully corrected. When a pc is exteriorized by auditing and is then audited further without being given an Exteriorization Rundown, his TA will go high or low and he may be very upset. Heavy masses may come in and he may also get ill. Ext RD errors also may go back to earlier Dianetic errors. A number of unflat incidents invite the overrun of these if they also occur on a Dianetic Chain. To clean up a balled-up Ext RD chain or incident one may have to find and clean up the Dianetic error it is sitting on during the clean-up of the Ext RD error. Using the new List L3B on every flow of the Ext RD up to Question 26 of L3B will in extreme cases (where all else fails) locate the trouble even where the auditing report is false or incorrect. Auditors who can't run ordinary R3R with great success should not be let near an Exteriorization RD as their lack of smoothness in handling Dianetics will wreck the Ext RD. DIANETIC AUDITORS An excellent Dianetic Auditor can easily repair a messed-up Interiorization Rundown after a folder study and by use of L3B. A Dianetic Auditor with an excellent Dianetic record of wins can be given an Ext RD to do or to correct IF HE IS STARRATED ON THE EXT PACK AND THE TWO-WAY COMM PACK. If a Dianetic Auditor does an Ext RD, the recall steps may be omitted. REPAIR Wherever you see a TA high and a pc in trouble your first suspicions should be: 1. Audited past Ext in Auditing without an Ext RD being done. 2. Ext RD botched. 3. A previously messed-up Dianetic action has gotten fouled up with the Ext RD. 4. The Ext Command was improperly cleared (such as "means go in and out again" "means trapped" "meant leaving" etc). 5. Firefights and worries over the high or low TA have ensued after an Ext ball-up has occurred. 6. Some major action like Grades or items or Power has been run twice. 7. A C/S has hopefully kept on getting the pc audited without detecting the real reason as a flubbed Ext RD. PERCENTAGES The percent of misrun Ext RDs is high. The liability of leaving them unrepaired is high. Reasons for high TA are averaging out close to 100% as an unrun or a flubbed and unrepaired Ext RD. 224 EXT IN SESSION When a pc Exteriorizes in session it is the End Phenomena for that process or action. One gently ends off in any case. If the pc is now given or if he has had a completely okay Ext RD he can be audited further. Otherwise no. If even years after an Ext RD the pc has a high TA or a low TA then Ext trouble is at once suspected and the original Ext RD and any repair of it is suspect and must be handled. L3B has been redesigned to straighten out Ext RDs or ANY Dianetic errors. There is no real trick to either running a correct Ext RD or repairing a flubbed one. The whole clue is whether or not the auditor can audit plain ordinary garden variety R3R. So when ANY auditor audits a pc past Exterior he should be checked out fully on the Ext RD checksheet so he won't continue to commit the error. And when ANYONE REGARDLESS OF CLASS is going to run an Ext RD he must (a) Be an expert Dianetic Auditor. (b) Be Starrated on all the Ext RD pack. And when any C/S is confronted with high TAs or low TAs and doesn't handle at once by getting an Ext RD properly run or properly repaired he must be re-checked on the Dianetics Pack and the Ext RD pack. DN C/S 1 A very careful Dianetic C/S 1 must be done on a previously unindoctrinated pc before he is run on an Ext RD. Otherwise it's all too new. A C/S 1 isn't auditing. The pc who can't do what the auditor says or can't correct an erroneous action is lost. A fully safe pc would be one who when he goes Ext in Auditing is made to do an HDC at once before he even gets any ruds put in and not audited again until he is an HDC. He'd be a pc who was relatively safe. A pc who does what an inexpert auditor says without question can really get fouled up! Uneducated pcs require really flawless topnotch auditors. The auditor who can audit an uneducated pc is a jewel. He really has to know his business. Because the pc does whatever he says. And if he says wrongly, then there goes the session. Ever notice pc corrections in a worksheet? "I think you by-passed an F/N." "This feels overrun." "I had Grade I last year." Such auditors are not fully enough trained to handle wholly green pcs! SIMPLICITY Honest fellows, it's as easy to run an Ext RD as it is to run "an ear pain". It isn't even mysterious or tough. IT IS ONLY VERY IMPORTANT TO DETECT WHEN IT NEEDS TO BE DONE OR REPAIRED. There are no mysteries. Some auditors have got me feeling like I'm trying to teach them to chew soft bread! L. RON HUBBARD LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 225  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=21/4/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  QUADRUPLE DIANETICS DANGERS OF   Remimeo All Auditors C/Ses Class VIII Dn Checksheet Int Ext Checksht  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 21 APRIL 1971 (REVISED -- see HCO B 21 Apr 71 RB -- see footnote) Remimeo All Auditors C/Ses Class VIII Dn Checksheet Int Ext Checksht QUADRUPLE DIANETICS DANGERS OF (Applies also to INT-EXT Rundown) (Ref HCO B 4 Apr 71, C/S Series 32 and HCO B 5 Apr 71, C/S Series 33) In observing Quad Dianetics in the hands of Scientology Auditors not specially briefed or who had additives and figure-figure on how to move a case already run on singles and triples into Full Flow, INVARIABLY THEY OVERRAN. This makes getting Quad Dianetics in on a case dangerous unless the auditor has the hang of it. The flagrant (and I do mean flagrant) errors found consisted of (a) not being able to run precise Standard Dianetics in the first place; (b) re- running already erased chains, "to find if they were flat"; (c) Out TRs to a wild extent; (d) refusing utterly to accept pc's data; (e) faulty metering; (f) complete ignorance of the Auditor's Code, notably committing the crime of Invalidating the pc. REQUIREMENTS Anyone essaying to run Quad Dianetics MUST BE CRAMMED on his R3R, the use of L3B, all data on Quad Dianetics (as per references above and including HCO B 27 Mar 71, "Dianetic Erasure"), his basic TRs, his metering and the Auditor's Code, and this HCO B. TRs TR Zero exists so an auditor is not ducking the session but can sit there relaxed, doing his job. TR One must be done so the pc can hear and understand the auditor (without blowing the pc's head off either). TR Two must be done so that the pc gets acknowledged. This can be so corrupted that the auditor doesn't ack at all but gives the pc meter reads! Instead of acks! Or keeps saying, "I didn't understand you" etc. TR Three basically existed so that the auditor would continue to give the pc commands and not squirrel off or pack up with total silence. TR Four exists so that the pc's origins are accepted and not Qed and Aed with or invalidated. And, surprise, surprise, TRs are for use in the session itself, not just a drill. They are how one runs a session. Metering can miss every F/N or give "F/Ns" with high or low TA. And one never feeds meter data to the pc: "That read", "that didn't read", "that blew down" just must not exist in session patter. "Thank you. That F/Ned" is as far as an auditor goes. And that's the end of the cycle and says so. Floating needles can be overlooked by an auditor. In Quad Dianetics this fault is fatal. Auditor's Code must be in on all points and particularly Invalidation. Pc says, "That's so and so." An auditor who says, "I'm sorry. You are wrong," or any other 226 invalidation is going to wreck a pc's case. A full knowledge of the Auditor's Code and actually applying it saves endless troubles. It is an auditing TOOL, not just a nice idea. REHABBING CHAINS One rehabs a Dianetic Chain that, according to a previous worksheet, erased, by saying, "According to session records (flow direction) (item) erased." That's all. One does not say, "Did the chain giving others a headache erase?" One does not run it again to find out. One does not run a single command "to see if it F/Ns again". One can say, "Do you agree that the chain giving another a headache erased?" But the more you ask the pc to look for an erased chain the more messed up things will get. It isn't there. But the auditor by his action can imply it should be there or might be there. A totally wrong approach would be "Look around your bank and see if what isn't there anymore isn't there." Dianetics is NOT Scientology. A Dianetic Chain is not a release. If you try to use Scientology rehab tech on a Dianetic Chain, you have had it. It isn't a "release" (which is a key-out). A Dianetic Chain is an erasure. You can't rehab erasures with "How many times?", etc. The test of this is the doing. If you try to use Scn rehab on Dianetic Chains, the PC MIGHT TRY TO FIND SOMETHING. This causes him to key in other unrun or similar items. It is a dangerous action at best to try to handle old erased chains. The best you can do is to tell the pc what the old W/S said. If no W/S exists leave the already erased flows alone! FLUBBED CHAINS Many times, a Folder Error Summary will give a flubbed chain and then fail to note it was repaired in the next session! A C/S and auditor would have been pretty irresponsible to just go on auditing past flubbed chains. The only safe way to handle some previous flubbed chain is to (a) Verify in the folder if it was repaired. (b) If still unrepaired assess the first 28 Questions of L3B on it and handle according to the L3B. L3B Using the new L3B (HCO B 11 Apr 71) is a Dianetic action. A Scientology Auditor erroneously can try to use it as a 2 way comm type of list. If a chain needed one more ABCD, then 2 way comm on it with no ABCD is not going to complete it. L3B has its own directions. Questions not marked with directions are used to indicate the fact. This can amount to 2 way comm as the pc chews it over. But L3B where marked is handled by Dianetics actions. Look over the list and its directions for each question and you will see that some are given directions that are NOT 2wc. Example: "Earlier beginning" reads. You can't just say "the incident had an earlier beginning" and you can't say, "Tell me about the earlier beginning." The pc will go up the wall. There'll be no F/N. You have to use R3R and get him to the earlier beginning and then run it and if it still doesn't erase, get him to an Earlier Similar and erase that. L3B is a Dianetics List. It is not a Scientology List that is cleared each question to F/N by 2 way comm. OVERRUN Overruns are demonstrated by a rising TA. If as you seek to get in Full Flow Dianetics the pc's TA begins to average higher, overrun is occurring. 227 Example: While doing FFD pc's TA has been riding at 2.2 and F/Ns. After a new FFD action it begins to ride at 2.5 and F/Ns. Something is being overrun. Find it and indicate it. And cease to stir the bank up so much! The fault is going over items already run. Already flat zero flows are not uncommon. The zero flattened on the original triple. Thus getting in that Zero flow again is an overrun. In doing a Full Flow Table you often find that the same or similar have been run in the past. Sometimes you find that a previous attempt to run the item a second or third time has resulted in an ARC Break, the reason for which was never detected. The right action is to note the session date it was first run and just tell the pc, "Feeling Surprised was run three times. On (first date it was erased) it was erased. When later run it was an overrun." This tends to blow the later charge laid in by trying to run the same item again. It sounds so strange that erased chains can be overrun. But it is true. What happens is that pcs try to cooperate and put something there. FIREFIGHTS The action of a quarrel between an auditor and a pc is called a firefight. Restimulating earlier unrun engrams or overrunning chains upsets a pc. The best action, ss soon as a pc is disturbed, is to do an L3B fast and handle what reads the way it should be handled according to the L3B. The wrong way is to argue or try to go on. The pc does NOT know what it is. He just feels awful. He tries to guess. He will ARC Brk or get sad if the auditor continues. The correct action is an L3B. L1C is not of great use in a Dianetic ARC Brk. L3B is. If the pc remains ARC Broken, try L3B again, particularly the whole L3B not just 1-28. A Scientology session would be handled with some other list (L1C, L4B, etc). A Dianetic session including and especially FFD, is handled with L3B. You NEVER prepcheck while doing Dianetics. This mushes up the engrams. INTERIORIZATION ALL these cautions apply as well to an Interiorization-Exteriorization Rundown, when restim occurs one uses an L3B quickly. Int-Ext RD is essentially a Dianetic, not a Scientology action. SAFE ACTIONS A fully genned-in auditor, well crammed, well drilled, well skilled, can be trusted with Dianetics, Dianetic Quads and an Int-Ext RD. Auditors not so handled can get pcs into serious trouble with these things. A safe course is to use Quad only on new never audited before pcs. Those begun on triples, use then only triple flows. Another safe way is to use FFD only on OT IIIs or OT IVs and done only by fully qualified FFD auditors who are also OT III. The safest course is to require special drilling and cramming on auditors who are already known for their results by actual success story stats and call FFD and Int-Ext RD a skilled specialty. C/S RESPONSIBILITY Any trouble a C/S is running into comes from the factors of TRs, metering, Code and incomplete or false auditor's reports. 228 If when I am C/Sing I ever find an auditor has omitted key session actions or has falsified a report, I order that auditor not to Cramming but a full retrain HDC right on up. A C/S does not see these points. He can get the pc asked what the auditor is doing or did. He can get sessions monitored. This helps him fill this gap in his data. It's what isn't in the auditor's report that is often the trouble. Auditors omit what they said, omit the firefight, omit session alter-is in their worksheets. All this sticks the C/S's neck out for the axe of failure. So particularly in FFD, Int-Ext and other such actions, a C/S has to act to obtain confidence in the auditor's TRs, Metering, Code Use and accurate Worksheets. RISK In FFD, Int-Ext RD and Power, experience has proven that if the auditor is not top grade, if the C/S is not alert, we put a pc at risk. The USUAL is what keeps the pc safe. A thorough study of his case, looking for obvious bugs (such as Int-Ext RD done twice, the case a druggie but Drug engrams never run, Int done but its 2wc flubbed, FFD grossly overrun, to name a few serious ones), sending auditors to Cramming for the slightest flub, insisting on standard TRs USED IN SESSION, good metering, use of the Code, accurate and complete worksheets, use of standard tech, all guarantee the safety and progress of the pc. INTRODUCING FFD FFD (like the Int-Ext RD) requires flawless C/Sing and auditing or the case goes wrong. When these actions were introduced they showed up any flaws in case studying, TRs, Metering, Code and worksheets. There are two ways to handle. (a) Cancel FFD and Int-Ext as actions. Obviously that is going backwards and is impossible. (b) Begin and continue a serious, effective campaign in the org to (1) Train auditors better (2) Cram expertly on every flub (3) Raise quality of TRs and metering. As you can see, my approach is to improve quality of training, cramming and delivery. Please help me out in getting this in. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [C/S Series 36 was cancelled on 15 July 1971 by C/S 36R. 36R was later reissued verbatim on 6 June 1974, except that the cancellation of C/S 36 was changed to a revision of C/S 36. 36R is on page 324. The original issue of C/S 36 was then revised on 8 April 1974 and issued as C/S 36RA. As a non-LRH 36RA, since cancelled, had earlier been issued on 14 May 1972, the 8 April 74 revision was reissued verbatim on 21 September 1974 changing only the numbering from 36RA to 36RB. This issue is in Volume VIII on page 289. On 13 January 1975 C/S Series 36RB was reissued as C/S 36RB-1. 36RB-1 was revised on 22 February 1975 and issued as C/S 36RB-1R, and can be found in Volume VIII on page 383. See also HCO B 12 January 1975, Quads Reinstated, Volume VIII, page 373.] 229  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=26/4/71 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  TRs AND COGNITIONS   Remimeo Dn Checksheet Scn Grades Checksheet Qual Cramming HGC Auditors  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 26 APRIL 1971 Remimeo Issue I Dn Checksheet Scn Grades Checksheet Qual Cramming HGC Auditors TRs AND COGNITIONS In the presence of rough TRs cognitions do not occur. Cognitions are the milestones of case gain. Rough TRs, rough metering, Out Code and a distractive auditor then make no case gain. When an auditor has smooth, usual TRs, does his metering expertly and without attracting the pc's attention, when he follows the Auditor's Code (particularly regarding Evaluation and Invalidation) and when he is interested, not interesting as an auditor, the pc cognites and makes case gains. Further, according to the axioms, a bank straightens out by AS-ISING its content. If the pc's attention is distracted to the auditor and meter his attention is not on his bank so AS-ISING cannot occur. The definition of In Session is INTERESTED IN OWN CASE AND WILLING TO TALK TO THE AUDITOR. When this definition describes the session in progress, then of course the pc will be able to AS-IS and will cognite. By The Original Thesis, the auditor plus the pc is greater than the pc's bank. When the auditor plus the bank are both overwhelming the pc then the bank seems greater than the pc. It is this situation which gives a pc a low Tone Arm. An auditor who can't be heard, doesn't ack, doesn't give the pc the next command, fails to handle origins, simply has OUT-TRs. The auditor who is trying to be interesting to the pc, who over-acks, who laughs loudly, is putting the pc's attention onto himself. So the pc's attention, not being on his bank, doesn't as-is or cognite. The auditor whose metering by-passes F/Ns or calls F/Ns at wrong points, or who tells the pc "That reads" "That blew down" etc, or who any other way uses the meter distractingly (the pc knows when he is being under- or over-run and knows when he is being mismetered), is of course violating the definition of IN SESSION. The pc's attention goes to the meter, not his bank, so he doesn't AS-IS or cognite. Auditor Invalidation and Evaluation is just plain villainy. It interferes with pc cognitions. Other Code breaks are similarly distractive. A PERFECT SESSION If you understand the exact definition of IN SESSION, if you understand the pc's necessity to have his attention on his bank so as to AS-IS it and work out what is really going on in a session that brings about a cognition (as-ising aberration with a realization about life), you will then be able to spot all the things in TRs, metering and the Code that would prevent case gain. Once you see that out-TRs, mismetering and Code breaks would PREVENT the IN SESSION definition you will see what would impede a pc from AS-ISing and Cogniting. 230 When you have this figured out you will then be able to see clearly what are IN-TRs, CORRECT METERING and CORRECT CODE APPLICATION. There can be an infinity of wrongnesses. There are only a few rightnesses. Recognition of right TRs, right Metering and right Code use depend only on: (a) Understanding the principles in this HCO B, and (b) Their practice so as to establish habit. This mastered, one's pcs will get cognitions and case gain and swear by "their auditor"! L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:mes.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 231  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=27/4/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  EDUCATION, DEFINITION OF   Remimeo Course Super Course  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 27 APRIL 1971 Remimeo Course Super Course EDUCATION, DEFINITION OF This definition of education was devised in the Mid-fifties as the first entrance to the subject. EDUCATION IS THE CONVEYANCE OF IDEAS, PATTERNS AND CREATIONS FROM ONE PERSON TO ANOTHER FOR KNOWING RETENTION AND CONSCIOUS USE BY THE SECOND PERSON. By patterns was meant designs, forms and sequences of motion. Knowledge can be conceived to be ideas, patterns and creations and can include any concept or understanding. It would then be seen to be vital that the Educator be as well a Communicator and that his cycle of communication be as nearly perfect as possible. The formula of Communication is: CAUSE, DISTANCE, EFFECT WITH INTENTION AND ATTENTION AND A DUPLICATION AT EFFECT OF WHAT EMANATES FROM CAUSE. (The best published discussions of Communication are found in Dianetics '55!.) As UNDERSTANDING plays its role in Education, one has to know the components of understanding. These are AFFINITY, REALITY and COMMUNICATION. These three elements together make up understanding and so play their role in EDUCATION. (Basic Data on A, R and C may be found in Notes on the Lectures and Dianetics '55!) If the Educator is deficient in his Communication cycle (as exemplified and practiced in the Training Drills of the HAS Course -- TRs 0-1-2-3-4) the result will be "blown students" which is to say students who leave and do not finish the course. As their own comm and originations are not handled, they "ARC Break" (become upset) and so leave. Anyone teaching a course whether in kindergarten, college or Scientology should have as a minimum the following: Mini Course Supervisor's Course (much more preferably the full Course Supervisor's Course). HAS Course with TRs. A starrate command of Notes on the Lectures. The 7 Study Tapes and A starrate command of Dianetics '55!. Only then could he hope to put the basic definition of education into actual effect and obtain educated students who can use the information and patterns being taught. LRH:mes.jh L. RON HUBBARD Copyright $c 1971 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 232  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=28/4/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  OKAYS TO AUDIT IN HGCs   Remimeo All Orgs Franchises  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 28 APRIL 1971 Remimeo All Orgs Franchises OKAYS TO AUDIT IN HGCs (Effective 60 days from Receipt in every HGC) It is Mandatory that HGC auditors follow the "okay to audit" system. It is in addition to the required courses and any class, org or field experience. Tech quality in orgs and auditor morale (which depends on wins) depend upon flubless auditing. A Cramming must exist in any org which sells auditing. The Qual Auditor Cramming Section issues the okay to audit after rigorously following this essentially interne program. Franchises may adopt this system. An "okay to audit" must be signed by the Cramming Officer and attested to in C & A by the auditor. No former experience counts. Courses, while required, do not give an HGC okay to audit. Auditors hired after a course must go through this entire procedure. Okays to audit, issued in a qualified org, are valid on going to a different org if duly certified and presented but may be lost by a poor demonstration on pcs, at which time the okay to audit steps must be undertaken again. An HGC okay to audit is a high recommendation for a field auditor. There is no compromise with auditing quality. HGC REQUIREMENT Before any auditor, HDC or above, is okayed to audit anything on Flag or in an AO or Org, in addition to course training or other auditing, the following minimum requirement must be done in Cramming and attested to at C & A as having been thoroughly done in the Qual Interneship (Cramming), with Liability for False Attest and a possible action on org executives who fail to enforce its vigorous and thorough application. 1. HCO B 26 April 71, Issue I, in Clay on each part to total certainty. 2. TRs 0 to 4 with no short-cut on 0 and the rest in line with the above HCO B. 3. Metering, its basic drills, its positioning so it can be read while looking at report and pc and clarification of what is a read. 4. The Auditor's Code including clay demo of "Invalidation" and "Evaluation" meanings. Demonstration of how each line in Code can violate HCO B 26 April 71, Issue I, and how keeping each one in promotes HCO B 26 April 71, Issue I. 5. TRs 101 to 104 resulting in precision giving and getting execution of each command. 6. How to assess a list such as L3B Method 3 and handle. The above gives a certified HDC or above provisional okay to audit Assists, Dianetics Singles and Triples. 7. A flubless record on Dianetic auditing in an HGC. 8. All Quad HCO Bs. This gives a provisional okay to audit or repair Quad. 233 9. A flubless record repairing or doing Quad. 10. Dating drills, precise. 11. How to fly each rud to F/N. 12. How to fly each reading item on a list Method 3. 13. How to assess a list Method 5, one time through, marking reads and any BDs. 14. How to do a GF+40 Method 5 and handle. 15. Laws of Listing and Nulling Verbatim and for use and how to get a BD F/N item on any list. 16. C/S Series complete. 17. How to trouble-shoot cases from studies of FSes and FESes. 18. Neat perfect session admin. 19. Necessity to have an F/N before starting a major action. 20. How to rehab by count. The above is required in addition to Academy or SHSBC certificate for a temporary okay to audit on any level up to Class IV or Class VI including zero, one, two, three and four. 21. Experience in an HGC with a flubless record on Level 0 to IV auditing. 22. Exteriorization checksheet and pack. The above gives an auditor a temporary okay to audit Exteriorization Rundowns. 23. A flubless record auditing Exteriorization Rundowns in an HGC. 24. Class VII Interneship in an SH with all relevant Power materials. The above gives a temporary okay to audit Power in an SH HGC. 25. Experience showing a flubless ability to audit Power and Power Repair. 26. Class VIII Course in an AO. The above gives an auditor an okay to audit Class VIII. 27. HGC Auditor's Checksheet. 28. Experience in an HGC flublessly applying Class VIII. 29. Class IX Course in an AO. The above gives one a temporary okay to C/S. A temporary okay to audit becomes a permanent okay to audit when flubless results are being uniformly obtained. That one has had one of the courses is credited at the level called for above but does not permit waiving any other requirement from the bottom on up. Course graduation does not give an HGC okay to audit. Student co-auditing does not give an HGC okay to audit. It is expected that auditing practice has existed on the course and that the student may have audited in the field. By following this HGC okay to audit program and a liberal use of Cramming for HGC auditors and keeping abreast of current issues in Cramming, auditors will obtain many wins and greatly increased morale and HGC tech quality will be improved. LRH:mes.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright $c 1971 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 234  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=30/4/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  AUDITING COMM CYCLE   Remimeo HDC Checksht Cse Sup Checksht Class 0 Checksht Cramming  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 30 APRIL 1971 Remimeo HDC Checksht Cse Sup Checksht Class 0 Checksht Cramming AUDITING COMM CYCLE (Reference HCO B 26 Apr 71, "TRs AND COGNITIONS") The following AUDITING comm cycle is taken from SHSBC tapes. An auditor runs the session. He gives the pc the session action without pulling the pc's attention heavily on the auditor. He does not leave the pc inactive or floundering without anything to do. He does not leave the pc to make a session out of it. The auditor makes the session. He doesn't wait for the pc to run down like a clock or just sit there while the TA soars after an F/N. The auditor runs the session. He knows what to do for everything that can happen. And this is the Auditing Comm cycle that is always in use. 1. Is the pc ready to receive the command? (appearance, presence) 2. Auditor gives command/question to pc (cause, distance, effect). 3. Pc looks to bank for answer (Itsa maker line). 4. Pc receives answer from bank. 5. Pc gives answer to auditor (cause, distance, effect). 6. Auditor acknowledges pc. 7. Auditor sees that pc received ack (attention). 8. New cycle beginning with (1). Attention ------------------------------------------> Aud. Pc __________________________________________> Command -----> Aud. <------------------------------------------ Pc Bank <----- Ack ------------------------------------------> Aud. Pc - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - > Attention LRH:mes.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright $c 1971 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 235  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=13/5/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  STUDENT GRASP OF MATERIALS   Remimeo Course Supervisor Checksheet Students  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 13 MAY 1971 Remimeo Course Supervisor Checksheet Students STUDENT GRASP OF MATERIALS When students are new to Tech study (or have been badly trained elsewhere) they lay a trap for the unwary supervisor who, if he falls for it, will thereafter turn out dud auditors. In the beginning a new student will often ask lots of technical questions. He hasn't read the material well, he doesn't know its scope, he is going through a maze of preconceptions and is often looking only for an answer to his own case or agreement with fixed ideas. He often makes up for all this with a "I don't understand it. Would you please explain _______ ". The Course Super who hasn't caught on is sometimes foolish enough to "explain it". In that moment he may lay in an out-tech evaluation. He has also shifted source. The student now doesn't have to study the materials as it's all being "explained". Result. Flub-Auditors who go out and butcher pcs and blow. The top classic on this was a student who "couldn't understand the HCO B on TR 0!" After he'd done it, he found it was perfectly ok. "Ron's HCO B is not contradictory and does not need to be rewritten," was the real quote. The Course Super is there to get the student's confront up on the materials not to lessen it by "explaining". When I am teaching a group of students I often catch some screwball out- tech datum going around. I run such down vigorously. What I find is that the student is so unable to confront HCOBs or data that some other student's comment or the examiner or someone has messed it up with an "explanation" that was out-tech. On Flag we get in students from all around. They have had courses. In the first few days we have asked for any questions. When these come up, we handle by handling the study ability of the student. Students will ask questions that are answered right on the page in front of them. It is no effort to make them guilty or wrong. It is an effort to correct their ability to confront, duplicate, absorb and use the data they are studying. When there are errors in that student's ability he will not use what he is given. He will not become an auditor. The only reason we can do this is: THERE IS NO DATA OF IMPORTANCE ABOUT THE MIND THAT IS NOT FULLY COVERED IN THE MATERIALS OF DIANETICS AND SCIENTOLOGY. That is a very definite statement isn't it. Well, 21 years and millions of cases have shown it to be true. 236 The important data the student is seeking at his course level is IN the materials. The only way he will fail is by not confronting, duplicating, absorbing and using the materials before him exactly like it says. The Supervisor who doesn't furnish the materials and then doesn't spend his time getting the student through those materials will of course fail his students totally. If he begins to "explain" data he will mess it up and not make auditors. In the current world scene education is generally an interpretation and students are childhood trained to get marks, not learn. The Supervisor has to overcome this handicap of teaching people priorly "trained" in this age. Beware the trap. "This HCO B seems contradictory _______ " "Would you please explain _______ " The right action is to find the word he didn't understand. The error is usually his own vocabulary inadequacy. Get more and simpler dictionaries. Don't start explaining. The materials are adequate. If confronted, duplicated, and absorbed, they will be used. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:sb.bh Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 237  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=23/5/71 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=1 rDate=4/12/74 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Basic Auditing Series 1R THE MAGIC OF THE COMMUNICATION CYCLE From the LRH Tape 6 February 1964, "Comm Cycle in Auditing"   Remimeo Auditors Supervisors Students Tech & Qual  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 23 MAY 1971R Issue I Remimeo REVISED 4 DECEMBER 1974 Auditors Supervisors (Revision in this type style) Students Tech & Qual Basic Auditing Series 1R THE MAGIC OF THE COMMUNICATION CYCLE From the LRH Tape 6 February 1964, "Comm Cycle in Auditing" If you look over communication you will find that the magic of communication is about the only thing that makes auditing work. The Thetan in this universe has begun to consider himself mest and has begun to consider himself mass and the being that considers himself mass of course responds to the laws of electronics and the laws of Newton. He is actually incapable of generating very much or as-ising very much. An individual considers himself mesty or massy and therefore he has to have a second terminal. A second terminal is required to discharge the energy. Here we have two poles. We have an auditor and a pc and as long as the auditor audits and the pc replies we get an exchange of energy from the pc's point of view. Many auditors think they are being a second terminal to the degree that they pick up the somatics and illnesses of the pc. Actually there is no backflow of any kind that hits the auditor but if he is so convinced that he is mest he will turn on somatics in echo of the pc. Actually nothing hits the auditor, it has to be mocked up or envisioned by him. You have set up in essence a two pole system and that will bring about an as-ising of mass. It isn't burning the mass, it is as-ising the mass and that's why there is nothing hitting the auditor. Now that is the essence of the situation. The magic involved in auditing is contained in the communication cycle of auditing. You see now you are handling the SMOOTH INTERCHANGE BETWEEN THESE TWO POLES. When you look over the difficulties of auditing realize that you are handling simply the difficulties of the communication cycle and when you yourself as the auditor do not permit A SMOOTH FLOW BETWEEN YOU AS A TERMINAL AND THE PC AS A TERMINAL, AND THE PC AS A TERMINAL BACK TO YOU, you get a no as-ising of mass. So you don't get TA action. Part of the trick of course is what has to be as-ised and how do you go about it, but that we call technique -- (what button has to be pressed). We find, oddly enough, if the auditor is actually capable of making the pc willing to talk to him, he wouldn't have to hit a button to get tone arm action. (He cannot make the pc get tone arm action basically because a communication cycle doesn't exist.) The person who is insisting continuously upon a new technique is neglecting the basic tool of his auditing which is the communication cycle of auditing. 238 When the communication cycle does not exist in an auditing session we get this horrible compounding of a felony of trying to get a technique to work but the technique cannot be administered because there is no communication cycle to administer it. Basic auditing is called basic auditing because it goes PRIOR to the technique. A communication cycle must exist before the technique can exist. The fundamental entrance to the case is not on a level of the technique but is on a level of the communication cycle. Communication is simply a familiarization process based on reach and withdraw. When you speak to a pc you are reaching. When you cease to speak you are withdrawing. When he hears you, he's at that moment a bit withdrawn but then he reaches toward you with the answer. You'll see him go into a withdraw while he thinks it all over. Then he reaches the reason. Now he will reach the auditor with the reason and he will say that was it. You have made an exchange from the pc to the auditor and will see it reflect on the meter because that exchange now is giving an as-ising of energy. IN THE ABSENCE OF THAT COMMUNICATION YOU DO NOT GET METER ACTION. So THE FUNDAMENTAL OF AUDITING IS THE COMMUNICATION CYCLE. That's the fundamental of auditing and that is really the great discovery of Dianetics and Scientology. It's such a simple discovery but you realize that nobody knew anything about it. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 239  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=23/5/71 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=1 rDate=6/12/74 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Basic Auditing Series 2R THE TWO PARTS OF AUDITING From the LRH Tape 2 July 1964, "O/W Modernised and Reviewed"   Remimeo Auditors Supervisors Students Tech & Qual  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex Remimeo HCO BULLETIN OF 23 MAY 1971R Auditors Issue II Supervisors REVISED 6 DECEMBER 1974 Students Tech & Qual Basic Auditing Series 2R THE TWO PARTS OF AUDITING From the LRH Tape 2 July 1964, "O/W Modernised and Reviewed" In order to do something for somebody you have to have a communication line to that person. Communication lines depend upon reality and communication and affinity and where an individual is too demanding the affinity tends to break down slightly. Processing goes in two stages. 1. To get into communication with that which you are trying to process. 2. Do something for him. There is many a pc who will go around raving about his auditor, whose auditor has not done anything for the pc. All that has happened is that a tremendous communication line has been established with the pc and this is so novel and so strange to the pc that he then considers that something miraculous has occurred. Something miraculous has occurred but in this particular instance the auditor has totally neglected why he formed that communication line in the first place. He formed it in the first place to do something for the pc. He very often mistakes the fact that he has formed a communication line, and the reaction on the pc for his having formed one, with having done something for the pc. There are two stages. 1. Form a communication line. 2. Do something for the pc. Those are the two distinct stages. It is something like (1) Walking up to the bus, and (2) Driving off. If you don't drive off you never go anyplace. It is a very tricky and no small thing to be able to communicate to a human being who has never been communicated to before. This is quite remarkable, and is such a remarkable feat that it appears to be an end-all of Scientology to some. But you see that's just walking up to the bus. Now you have got to go someplace. Any upset that the individual has is so poised, it is so delicately balanced, that it is difficult to maintain. It is not difficult to get well. It is very hard to remain batty. A fellow has to work at it. If your communication line is very good and very smooth and if your auditing discipline is perfect so you don't upset this communication line and if you just made a foray of no more importance than saying something like -- What are you doing that's sensible and why is it sensible? -- and kept your communication line up all the while and kept your affinity up with the pc all the while, did it with perfect discipline, you would see more aberration fall to pieces per square inch than you ever thought could exist. Now that's what I mean when I say do something for the pc. 240 You must audit well, get perfect discipline and get your communication cycle in. Don't ARC Break the pc, let your cycles of action complete. All of that is simply an entrance. You see, the discipline of Scientology makes it possible to do this, and one of the reasons why other fields of the mind never got anyplace and could never get near anybody was because they couldn't communicate to anybody. So that discipline is important. That is the ladder that goes up to the door and if you can't get to the door you can't do anything. The perfect discipline of which we speak, the perfect communication cycle, the perfect auditor presence, perfect meter reading -- all of these things are just to get you in a state where you can do something for somebody. So when you're real slow picking up the discipline, real slow picking up keeping in the communication cycle, when you're pokey on the subject you are still 9 miles from the ball. You're not even attending yet. What you want to be able to do is audit perfectly. By that we mean keep in a communication cycle, be able to approach the pc, be able to talk to the pc, and be able to maintain the ARC. Get the pc to give you answers to your questions. Be able to read a meter and get the reactions. All of those things have to be awfully good because it's very difficult to get a communication line in to somebody anyway. They all have to be present and they all have to be perfect. If they are all present and they are all perfect, then we can start to process somebody. THEN we can start to process somebody. I'm giving you an entrance point here of, if all your cycles were perfect, if you were able to sit there and confront the pc and meter that pc and keep your auditing report and do all these multiple various things, and keep a pleasant smile on your face and not chop his communication, well then there is something you do with these things. It takes a process now. We used to have it all backwards. We used to try and teach people what they could do for somebody. But they could never get in communication with him to do it, so therefore you had failures in processing. The most elementary procedure would be -- "What do you think is sensible?" -- or anything of that sort. The pc says, "Well, I think horses sleep in beds. That's sensible." The auditor says, "Alright. Now why is that sensible?" The pc says, "Well... ah.... Hey!... That's not sensible. That's nuts!" You actually wouldn't have to do anything more than that. He's cognited. You've flattened it. It's so easy to do, but you keep looking for some magic. Well, your magic is in getting into communication with the person. The rest is very easy to do, all you have to do is remain in communication with the person while you are doing this, and realize that these huge aberrations he's got are poised with the most fantastically delicate balance on little pinheads. All you have to do is to phooph and these things crash. Now if you're not in communication with this person he doesn't cognite. He takes it as an accusative action. He tries to justify thinking that way. He tries to make himself look good to you and tries to put on a public front of some kind or another. He tries to hold up his status. Anytime I see a bunch of pcs around who want to jump happily to something else because sane people run on that and crazy people run on something else, and they never have to be run on the crazy one, I right away know their auditors are not in communication with them and that auditing discipline itself has broken down because the pc is trying to justify himself and trying to uphold his own status. So he must be defending himself against the auditor. 241 The auditor couldn't possibly be in communication with him. So we are right back to the fundamental of why didn't the auditor get into comm with the pc in the first place. You get into communication with the pc in the first place by doing proper Scientology discipline. That is not any trick. It goes off 1, 2, 3, 4. You sit down and you start the session and you start handling the pc and his problems and that sort of thing and you DO IT BY COMPLETING YOUR COMMUNICATION CYCLES AND NOT CUTTING HIS COMMUNICATION -- THE VERY THINGS YOU ARE TAUGHT IN THE TRs, and you find you are in communication with the person. Now you've got to do something for the person. Unless, having gotten into communication, you do something for the person, you lose your communication line because the R-Factor of why you're in communication with the pc breaks down. He doesn't think you're so good, and you go out of communication with him. That having happened, the person will be in a sort of status defensive and wonder why he is being processed. On the other hand, if you have done something for the pc and he has had his cognition, and you try and go on and get more TA action out of the fact that "all horses sleep in beds" -- you don't get there as you've already flattened the process. You can over-audit and you can under-audit. If you don't notice that one answer come your way, that indicates you have done something for the pc and if you keep him working on that same thing, your TA action will disappear, your pc will get resentful and you'll lose your communication line. He's already had the cognition you see. You are now restimulating the pc. You have gotten your key-out destimulation factor -- it has occurred right before your eyes. You have done something for the pc. One more mention of the subject and you've had it. There are a lot of things you could do with the pc, without doing anything for him. You can turn on some very very handsome somatics on a pc at one time or another without turning them off either. You've got to do something for the pc, not to him. Now you can be doing something (A), and the pc is doing (B), and you go on doing (A), while the pc is doing (B) then somewhere on down the line you wind up in a hell of a mess and you wonder what happened. Well the pc never did what you said so you didn't do anything for the pc. There was in actual fact no barrier to your willingness to do something for the pc but there must have been a tremendous barrier to your understanding of what was going on. That you could ask (A), while the pc answered (B), in itself showed the auditor observation was very poor so therefore the auditor wasn't in communication with the pc. So again the communication factor was out and once more we weren't doing anything for the pc. It requires of the auditor discipline to keep in his communication line. He has got to stay in communication with his pc. Those cycles have got to be perfect. He can't be distracting the pc's attention onto the TA, e.g. "I'm not getting any TA action now." That's not staying in communication with the pc -- has nothing to do with it. You're distracting the pc from his own zones and areas. Don't put the pc's attention out of session. Keep him going and keep that communication line in. And the next requirement is to do something productive for the pc using the communication line. LRH:nt.jh Copyright $c 1971, 1974 L. Ron Hubbard by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 242  L. Ron Hubbard Founder   Type = 11 iDate=23/5/71 Volnum=0 Issue=3 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Basic Auditing Series 3 THE THREE IMPORTANT COMMUNICATION LINES  Type = 12 iDate=23/5/71 Issue=3 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Remimeo Auditors Supervisors Students Tech & Qual  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 23 MAY 1971 Issue III Reissued 1 December 1974 Remimeo Auditors CANCELS Supervisors BTB OF 23 MAY 1971 Students Issue III Tech & Qual SAME TITLE Basic Auditing Series 3 THE THREE IMPORTANT COMMUNICATION LINES From the LRH Tape 15 Oct 63, "Essentials of Auditing" When you are sitting in an auditing session what are the 3 important communication lines and what is their order of importance? 1. The first is the Pc's line to his bank. The Itsa Maker line. 2. The second is the Pc's line to the Auditor. The Itsa line. 3. The third is the Auditor's line to the Pc. The What's-it line. Now the definition, "Willing to talk to the Auditor", is very easy to interpret as "Talking to the Auditor". So the Auditor cuts the line the Pc has to the bank in order to get the Pc to talk, because "It's the Itsa line that blows the charge," he says. So the Auditor cuts the Pc's communication line with his bank in order to bring about an Itsa line -- and then he wonders why he gets no TA action and why the Pc ARC Breaks. This cut communication line is not perceivable to the naked eye. It's hidden because it's from the Pc -- a Thetan unseen by the Auditor -- to the Pc's bank -- unseen by the Auditor. The Auditor is simply there to use the What's-it line in order to get the Pc to confront his bank. The charge blows off it to the degree that it's confronted and this is represented by the Itsa line. The Itsa line is a report on what has been as-ised, that gives it its flow. The sequence of use of these lines in an auditing cycle is 3, 1, and then 2. Where the Auditor neglects this hidden line from the Pc to the Pc's bank, where he doesn't understand that hidden line and can't integrate it or do anything with it he is going to fail. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.ts.rd Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 243  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=23/5/71 Volnum=0 Issue=4 Rev=1 rDate=4/12/74 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Basic Auditing Series 4R COMMUNICATION CYCLES WITHIN THE AUDITING CYCLE   Remimeo Auditors Supervisors Students Tech & Qual  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex Remimeo HCO BULLETIN OF 23 MAY 1971R Auditors Issue IV Supervisors REVISED 4 DECEMBER 1974 Students Tech & Qual Basic Auditing Series 4R COMMUNICATION CYCLES WITHIN THE AUDITING CYCLE (Taken from the LRH Tape, "Comm Cycles in Auditing", 25 July 1963) The difficulty that an Auditor gets into is normally found in his own auditing cycle. There are basically two communication cycles between the Auditor and the Pc that make up the auditing cycle. They are cause, distance, effect with the Auditor at cause and the Pc at effect, and cause, distance, effect with the Pc at cause and the Auditor at effect. Cause ---------------- Distance -----------------> Effect Auditor Pc Effect <--------------- Distance ------------------ Cause These are completely distinct one from the other. The only thing that connects them and makes an auditing cycle, is the fact that the Auditor, on his communication cycle, has calculatingly restimulated something in the Pc which is then discharged by the Pc's communication cycle. What the Auditor has said has caused a restimulation and then the Pc needs to answer the question to get rid of the restimulation. If the Pc does not answer the question he doesn't get rid of the restimulation. That is the game that is being played in an auditing cycle and that is the entirety of the game. (Some auditing breaks down because the Auditor is unwilling to restimulate the Pc.) There is a little extra communication cycle on here. The Auditor says, "Thank you" and you have this as the acknowledgement cycle. C ------------------ Command -----------------> E Auditor E <----------------- Answer ------------------ C Pc C -------------- Acknowledgement --------------> E Now there are some little inner cycles that can throw you off and make you think that there are some other things to the auditing cycle. There is another little shadow cycle: it is the observation of "Has the Pc received the auditing command?" This is such a tiny "cause" that nearly all Auditors who are having any trouble finding out what's going on with the Pc are missing this one. "Does he receive it?" Actually there is another cause in here and you're missing that one when you're not perceiving the Pc. 244 You can tell by looking at the Pc that he didn't hear or understand what you'd said or that he was doing something peculiar with the command he was receiving. Whatever that message is in response, it rides on this line. Did Pc receive, e <----------------- understand and ------------------- c answer command? Auditor C ---------------------- Command ---------------------> E Pc E <--------------------- Answer ---------------------- C C ------------------ Acknowledgement -----------------> E An Auditor who isn't watching a Pc at all never notices a Pc who isn't receiving or understanding the auditing command. Then all of a sudden somewhere along the line there is an ARC Break and then we do assessments and we patch up the session and all kinds of things go wrong. Well, they actually needn't ever have gone wrong in the first place if this line had been in. What is the Pc doing completely aside from answering? Well, what he is doing is this other little sub-cause, distance, effect line. Another of these tiny lines is the cause, distance, effect line of -- "Is the Pc ready to receive an auditing command?" This is the Pc causing and it rides up the line across distance, is received at the Auditor and the Auditor perceives that the Pc is doing something else. It is an important one and you find that Auditors goof that one very often; the Pc's attention is still on a prior action. Now here's another one -- "Has the Pc received the acknowledgement?" Sometimes you violate this one. You have been acknowledging but you've never seen that he didn't receive the acknowledgement. That perception has another little tiny one in it that actually comes on this line; it is -- "Has the Pc answered everything?" The Auditor is watching the Pc and the Auditor sees that the Pc has not said all that the Pc is going to say. You sometimes get into trouble with Pcs that way. Everything at "cause" hasn't moved on down the line to effect and you haven't perceived all of the "effect" and you go into the acknowledgement one before this line has completed itself. That's chopping the Pc's communication. You didn't let the communication cycle flow to its complete end. The acknowledgement takes place and of course it can't go through as it's an inflowing line and it jams right there on the Pc's incomplete outflowing answer line. Is the Pc ready e <-------------- for the command? ------------------- c Did Pc receive, e <-------------- understand and --------------------- c answer the command? Auditor C ------------------ Command ------------------------> E Pc E <----------------- Answer ------------------------- C C --------------- Acknowledgement -------------------> E Did Pc complete the e <-------------- answer and receive ----------------- c acknowledgement? 245 So if you want to break it all down, there are six communication cycles which make up one auditing cycle. Six, not more than six unless you start running into trouble. If you violate one of these six communication lines you of course are going to get into trouble which causes a mish-mash of one kind or another. There is another communication cycle inside the auditing cycle and that is at the point of the Pc. It's a little additional one and it's between the Pc and himself. This is him talking to him. You're listening to the inside of his skull when you're examining it. It actually can be multiple as it depends upon the complications of the mind. This happens to be the least important of all the actions except when it isn't being done. And of course it's the hardest to detect when it isn't being done. Pc says: "Yes." Now what has the Pc said yes to? And sometimes you are insufficiently curious. And that in essence is this internal perception of line. It includes this cause, distance, effect backflash here -- "is the Pc answering the command I gave him?" So with this, there are seven communication cycles involved in an auditing cycle. It is a multiple cycle. A communication cycle consists of just cause, distance, effect with intention, attention, duplication and understanding. How many of these are there in one auditing cycle? You'd have to answer that with how many principal ones there are because some auditing cycles contain a few more. If a Pc indicates that he didn't get the command (cause, distance, effect), the Auditor would give a repeat of it (cause, distance, effect) and that would add 2 more communication cycles to the auditing cycle, so you've got 9 -- because there was a flub. So anything unusual that happens in a session adds to the number of communication cycles in the auditing cycle, but they are still all part of the auditing cycle. Repetitive commands as an auditing cycle, is doing the same cycle over and over again. Now there is a completely different cycle inside the same pattern. The Pc is going to originate and it's got nothing to do with the auditing cycle. The only thing they have in common is that they both use communication cycles. But this is brand new. The Pc says something that is not germane to what the Auditor is saying or doing and you actually have to be alert for this happening at any time and the way to prepare for it is just to realize that it can happen at any time and just go into the drill that handles it. Don't get it confused with the drill that you have as an auditing cycle. Consider it its own drill. You shift gears into this drill when the pc does something unexpected. And, by the way, this handles such a thing as the Pc originates by throwing down the cans. That's still an origin. It has nothing to do with the auditing cycle. Maybe the auditing cycle went to pieces and this origination cycle came in. Well, the auditing cycle can't complete because this origin cycle is now here. That doesn't mean that this origin has precedence or dominance but it can start and take place and have to be finished off before the auditing cycle can resume. So this is an interruptive cycle and it is cause, distance, effect. The Pc causes something. The Auditor now has to originate as the Auditor has to understand what the Pc is talking about -- and then acknowledge. And to the degree that it is hard to understand, you have the cause, distance, effect of the Auditor trying to clarify this thing; and every time he asks a question, he's got a new communication cycle. You can't put a machine action at that point because the thing has to be understood. And this must be done in such a way that the Pc isn't merely repeating his same origination or the Pc will go frantic. He'll go frantic because he can't get off that line -- he's stuck in time and it really upsets him. So the Auditor has to be able to understand what the devil the Pc is talking about. And there's really no substitute for simply trying to understand it. There is a little line where the Pc indicates he is going to say something. This is a line (cause, distance, effect) that comes before the origination takes place so you don't 246 run into a jam and you don't give the auditing command. The effect at the Auditor's point is to shut up and let him. There can be another little line (cause, distance, effect) where the Auditor indicates he is listening. Then there is the origination, the Auditor's acknowledgement of it and then there is the perception of the fact that the Pc received the acknowledgement. That's your origination cycle. An Auditor should draw all these communication cycles out on a scrap of paper. Just take a look at all these things; mock up a session and all of a sudden it will become very straight how these things are and you won't have a couple of them jammed up. What's mainly wrong with your auditing cycle is that you have confused a couple of communication cycles to such a degree that you don't differentiate that they exist. That's why you sometimes chop a Pc who is trying to answer the question. You know whether the Pc has answered the question or not. How did you know? Even if it's telepathy it's cause, distance, effect. It doesn't matter how that communication took place, you know whether he's answered the command by a communication cycle. I don't care how you sense this. If you are nervy on the subject of handling the basic tool of auditing and if that's giving you trouble (and if you get into trouble by suddenly breaking it down and analyzing it) then it should be broken down and analyzed at a time when you're auditing something nice and simple. I've given you a general pattern for an auditing cycle; maybe in working it over you can find a couple of extra communication cycles in the thing. But they are all there and if you made someone go through each one painstakingly, you would find out where his auditing cycle is jammed up. It isn't necessarily jammed up on his ability to say "Thank you". It may very well be jammed up in another quarter. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.jh Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 247  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=23/5/71 Volnum=0 Issue=5 Rev=1 rDate=29/11/74 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Basic Auditing Series 5R THE COMMUNICATION CYCLE IN AUDITING   Remimeo Auditors Supervisors Tech & Qual Students  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 23 MAY 1971R Remimeo Issue V Auditors REVISED 29 NOVEMBER 1974 Supervisors (Revision in this type style) Tech & Qual Students Basic Auditing Series 5R THE COMMUNICATION CYCLE IN AUDITING From the LRH tape 6 Feb 64, "Comm Cycle in Auditing" The ease with which you can handle a communication cycle depends on your ability to observe what the pc is doing. We have to add to the simplicity of the communication cycle OBNOSIS (observation of the obvious). Your inspection of what you are doing should have ended with your training. Thereafter it should be taken up exclusively with the observation of what the pc is doing or is not doing. Your handling of a communication cycle ought to be so instinctive and so good that you're never worried about what you do now. The time for you to get all this fixed up is in training. If you know your communication cycle is good you haven't any longer got to be upset about whether you're doing it right or not. You know yours is good, so you don't worry about it any more. In actual auditing, the communication cycle that you watch is the pc's. Your business is the communication cycle and responses of the pc. This is what makes the auditor who can crack any case and when absent you have an auditor who couldn't crack an egg if he stepped on it. This is the difference, it's whether or not this auditor can observe the communication cycle of the pc and repair its various lapses. It's so simple. It simply consists of asking a question that the pc can answer, and then observing that the pc answers it, and when the pc has answered it, observing that the pc has completed the answer to it and is through answering it. Then give him the acknowledgement. Then give him something else to do. You can ask the same question or you can ask another question. Asking the pc a question he can answer involves clearing the auditing command. You also ask it of the pc so that the pc can hear it and knows what he's being asked. When the pc answers the question be bright enough to know that the pc is answering that question and not some other question. You have to develop a sensitivity -- when did the pc finish answering what you've asked. You can tell when the pc has finished. It's a piece of knowingness. He looks like he's finished and he feels like he's finished. It's part sense; it's part his vocal intonation; but it's an instinct that you develop. You know he's finished. 248 Then knowing he's finished answering you tell him he's finished with an acknowledgement, OK, Good, etc. It's like pointing out the by-passed charge to the pc. Like -- "You have now found and located the by-passed charge in answer to the question and you have said it." That's the magic of acknowledgement. If you don't have that sensitivity for when the pc is finished answering -- he answers, gets nothing from you, you sit there and look at him, his social machinery goes into action, he gets onto self auditing and you get no TA action. The degree of stop you put on your acknowledgement is also your good sense because you can acknowledge a pc so hard that you finish the session right there. It's all very well to do this sort of thing in training and it's forgivable, but NOT in an auditing session. Get your own communication cycle sufficiently well repaired that you don't have to worry about it after training. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd.jh Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 249  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=23/5/71 Volnum=0 Issue=6 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Basic Auditing Series 6 AUDITOR FAILURE TO UNDERSTAND   Remimeo Auditors Supervisors Students Tech & Qual  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 23 MAY 1971 Issue VI Remimeo Auditors Supervisors Students HCOB of 17 Oct 1962, Reissued verbatim as Tech & Qual Basic Auditing Series 6 AUDITOR FAILURE TO UNDERSTAND If a pc says something and the auditor fails to understand what the pc said or meant, the correct response is: "I did not (hear you) (understand what was said) (get that last)." To do anything else is not only bad form, it can amount to a heavy ARC Break. INVALIDATION To say "You did not speak loud enough _______ " or any other use of "you" is an invalidation. The pc is also thrown out of session by having responsibility hung on him or her. The Auditor is responsible for the session. Therefore the auditor has to assume responsibility for all comm breakdowns in it. EVALUATION Far more serious than Invalidation above, is the accidental evaluation which may occur when the auditor repeats what the pc said. NEVER repeat anything a pc says after him, no matter why. Repeating not only does not show the pc you heard but makes him feel you're a circuit. The highest advance of 19th Century Psychology was a machine to drive people crazy. All it did was repeat after the person everything the person said. Children also do this to annoy. But that isn't the main reason you do not repeat what the pc said after the pc. If you say it wrong the pc is thrown into heavy protest. The pc must correct the wrongness and hangs up right there. It may take an hour to dig the pc out of it. Further, don't gesture to find out. To say, pointing, "You mean this item, then," is not only an evaluation but a nearly hypnotic command, and the pc feels he must reject very strongly. Don't tell the pc what the pc said and don't gesture to find what the pc meant. Just get the pc to say it again or get the pc to point it out again. That's the correct action. 250 DRIVING IN ANCHOR POINTS Also, do not shove things at a pc or throw things to a pc. Don't gesture toward a pc. It drives in anchor points and makes the pc reject the auditor. ROCK SLAMMER The reason a person who Rock Slams on Scientology or auditors or the like can't audit well is that they are wary of a pc and feel they must repeat after the pc, correct the pc or gesture toward the pc. But Rock Slammer or not, any new auditor may fall into these bad habits and they should be broken fast. SUMMARY A very high percentage of ARC Breaks occur because of a failure to understand the pc. Don't prove you didn't with gestures or erroneous repeats. Just audit, please. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1962, 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 251  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=23/5/71 Volnum=0 Issue=7 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Basic Auditing Series 7 PREMATURE ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS   Remimeo Auditors Supervisors Students Tech & Qual  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 23 MAY 1971 Issue VII Remimeo Auditors Supervisors HCOB of 7 Apr AD15, Reissued verbatim as Students Tech & Qual Basic Auditing Series 7 PREMATURE ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Here's a new discovery. Imagine my making one on the Comm Formula after all these years. Do people ever explain to you long after you have understood? Do people get cross with you when they are trying to tell you something? If so, you are suffering from Premature Acknowledgement. Like body odor and bad breath, it is not conducive to social happiness. But you don't use Lifebuoy soap or Listerine to cure it, you use a proper comm formula. When you "coax" a person to talk after he has begun with a nod or a low "yes" you ack, make him forget, then make him believe you haven't got it and then make him tell you at GREAT length. He feels bad and doesn't cognite and may ARC Break. Try it out. Have somebody tell you about something and then encourage before he has completely told you all. THAT'S why pcs Itsa on and on and on and on with no gain. The auditor prematurely acknowledged. THAT'S why pcs get cross "for no reason". The auditor has prematurely and unwittingly acknowledged. THAT'S why one feels dull when talking to certain people. They prematurely acknowledge. That's why one thinks another is stupid -- that person prematurely acknowledges. The quickest way to become a social pariah (dog) is to prematurely acknowledge. One can do it in many ways. The quickest way to start the longest conversation is to prematurely acknowledge for the person believes he has not been understood and so begins to explain at greater and greater length. So this was the hidden ARC Break maker, the cognition wrecker, the stupidifier, the Itsa prolonger in sessions. And why some people believe others are stupid or don't understand. Any habit of agreeable noises and nods can be mistaken for acknowledgement, ends cycle on the speaker, causes him to forget, feel dull, believe the listener is stupid, get cross, get exhausted explaining and ARC Break. The missed withhold is inadvertent. One didn't get a chance to say what one was going to say because one was stopped by premature acknowledgement. Result, missed w/h in the speaker, with all its consequences. This can be counted on to make you feel frightened of being "agreeable with noises or gestures" for a bit and then you'll get it straight. What a piece of tech to remain incompletely explained. Fair scares one it does. And in the Comm Formula too! LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1965, 1971 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 252  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=5/2/66 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Basic Auditing Series 8 "LETTING THE PC ITSA" THE PROPERLY TRAINED AUDITOR   Remimeo Auditors Supervisors Students Tech & Qual  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 5 FEBRUARY 1966 Remimeo Auditors Issue II Supervisors Students Tech & Qual Reissued 23 May 71 verbatim as Basic Auditing Series 8 "LETTING THE PC ITSA" THE PROPERLY TRAINED AUDITOR The most painful thing I ever hope to see is an auditor "letting a pc Itsa". I have seen auditors let a pc talk and talk and talk and talk and run down and talk and run down and talk again until one wondered where if anywhere that auditor had been trained. In the first place such an auditor could not know the meaning of the word ITSA. The word means "It is a ....... " Now how an auditor letting a pc talk believes he is getting a pc to spot what IT is is quite beyond me. This pc has been talking all his life. He isn't well. Analysts had people talk for five years and they seldom got well. So how is it supposed to happen today that a pc, let talk enough, will get well. It won't. The auditor does not know the very basics of auditing skills. That's all. These are the TRs. An auditor who can't do his TRs can't audit. Period. Instead he says he is "letting the pc Itsa". If by this he means he is letting the pc drive all over the road and in both ditches, then this isn't auditing. In auditing an auditor guides. He gives the pc something to answer. When the pc answers the pc has said "IT IS A ....... " and that's Itsa. If the pc answers and the auditor acknowledges too soon the pc tends to go into an anxiety -- he has been chopped. So he talks more than he wanted. If the pc answers and the auditor does not acknowledge, then the pc talks on and on, hoping for an acknowledgement that doesn't come, "runs dry", tries again, etc. So premature or late-or-never acks result in the same thing -- the pc running on and on and on. And they call it "letting the pc Itsa". Bah! If a pc talks too much in session he either is getting cut off too fast by the auditor or hasn't got an auditor at all. It isn't 253 "Itsa". It's lousy TRs. (The one single exception is the pc who had years in analysis but even he begins to get better with proper TRs used on him.) The proper cure is to drill the auditor until the auditor realizes: 1. The auditor asks the questions. 2. The pc says what is the answer, "It's a ....... " 3. The auditor acks when the pc has said it to the pc's satisfaction and 4. The auditor acks when the pc has finished saying "It's a ....... And that's Itsa. Scientology auditing is a precision skill, not a gag blop goo slup guck blah. 1. The auditor wants to know ....... 2. The pc says it is ....... 1. 2. 1. 2. 1. 2. etc. TECH SAVVY Now an auditor who doesn't know his technology about the mind and his processes of course never knows what to ask. So he or she simply sits like a lump of sacking hoping the pc will say something that makes the pc feel better. A sure sign that an auditor doesn't know an engram from a cow about processes is seeing a pc "Itsa" on and on and on. In Scientology we do know what the mind is, what a being is, what goes wrong in the mind and how to correct it. We aren't psychoanalysts or psychiatrists or Harley Street witch doctors. We do know. The data about beings and life is there in Scientology to be learned. It isn't "our idea" of how things are, or "our opinion of" ....... Scientology is a precision subject. It has axioms. Like geometry. Two equilateral triangles aren't similar because Euclid said so. They're similar because they are. If you don't believe it, look at them. There isn't a single datum in Scientology that can't be proven as precisely as teacups are teacups and not saucepans. Now if we get a person fresh out of the study of "the mystical metaphysics of Cuffbah" he's going to have trouble. His pcs are going to "Itsa" their heads off and never get well or better or anything. Because that person doesn't know Scientology but thinks it's all imprecise opinion. The news about Scientology is that it put the study of the mind into the precise exact sciences. If one doesn't know that, one's pcs "Itsa" by the hour for one doesn't know what he is handling that he is calling "a pc". By my definition, an auditor is a real auditor when his or her pcs DON'T overtalk or undertalk but answer the auditing question and happily now and then originate. So how to tell an auditor, how to determine if you have trained one at last, is DO HIS PCS ANSWER UP OR DO THEY TALK ON AND ON. 254 If I had an auditor in an HGC whose pcs yapped and yapped and ran dry and yapped while the auditor just sat there like a Chinese pilot frozen on the controls, I would do the following to that "auditor": 1. Remedy A, Book of Case Remedies. 2. Remedy B, Book of Case Remedies. 3. Disagreements with Scientology, technology and orgs and Scientology personalities all found and traced to basic and blown. 4. A grind study assignment of the Scientology Axioms until the "auditor" could DO THEM IN CLAY. 5. A memorization of the Logics, Qs (Prelogics) and Axioms of Dianetics and Scientology. 6. TRs 0 to 4 until they ran out of his or her ears. 7. TRs 5 to 9. 8. Op Pro by Dup until FLAT. 9. A hard long study of the Meter. 10. The ARC triangle and other scales. 11. The Processes of Level 0. 12. Some wins. And I'd have an auditor. I'd have one that could make a Grade Zero Release every time. And it's lack of the above that causes an "auditor" to say "I let the pc Itsa" with the pc talking on and on and on. Scientology is the breakthrough that made the indefinite subject of Philosophy into a precision tool. And pcs get well and go Release when it is applied. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.jh Copyright $c 1966, 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [The original issue said "Level 0" above the title.] 255  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=23/5/71 Volnum=0 Issue=10 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  COMM CYCLE ADDITIVES   Remimeo Auditors Supervisors Students Tech & Qual  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 23 MAY 1971 Remimeo Issue X Auditors Supervisors Students HCO P/L of 1 July 1965 Issue II Tech & Qual Reissued verbatim as Basic Auditing Series 9 COMM CYCLE ADDITIVES There are no additives permitted on the Auditing Comm Cycle. Example: Getting the pc to state the problem after the pc has said what the problem is. Example: Asking a pc if that is the answer. Example: Telling pc "it didn't react" on the meter. Example: Querying the answer. This is the WORST kind of auditing. Processes run best MUZZLED. By muzzled is meant using ONLY TR 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4 by the text. A pc's results will go to HELL on an additive comm cycle. There are a hundred thousand tricks that could be added to the Auditing Comm Cycle. EVERY ONE of them is a GOOF. The ONLY time you ever ask for a repeat is when you couldn't hear it. Since 1950, I've known that all auditors talk too much in a session. The maximum talk is the standard model session and the TR 0 to 4 Auditing Comm Cycle ONLY. It is a serious matter to get a pc to "clarify his answer". It is in fact an Ethics matter and if done habitually is a Suppressive Act, for it will wipe out all gains. There are mannerism additives also. Example: Waiting for the pc to look at you before you give the next command. (Pcs who won't look at you are ARC Broken. You don't then twist this to mean the pc has to look at you before you give the next command.) Example: A lifted eyebrow at an answer. Example: A questioning sort of ack. The Whole Message is GOOD AUDITING OCCURS WHEN THE COMM CYCLE ALONE IS USED AND IS MUZZLED. Additives on the Auditing Comm Cycle are ANY ACTION, STATEMENT, QUESTION OR EXPRESSION GIVEN IN ADDITION TO TRs 0-4. They are Gross Auditing Errors. And should be regarded as such. Auditors who add to the Auditing Comm Cycle never make Releases. So, that's Suppressive. Don't do it! LRH:nt.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright $c 1965, 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 256  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=23/5/71 Volnum=0 Issue=8 Rev=1 rDate=4/12/74 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Basic Auditing Series 10R RECOGNITION OF RIGHTNESS OF THE BEING   Remimeo Auditors Students Tech & Qual  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 23 MAY 1971R Issue VIII REVISED 4 DECEMBER 1974 Remimeo Auditors Students Tech & Qual Basic Auditing Series 10R RECOGNITION OF RIGHTNESS OF THE BEING Taken from the LRH Tape "Good Indicators", 7 January 1964 An auditor's tendency is to look for wrongnesses. He is always trying to find something wrong with the pc. That's the nature of Scientology; we assume that there is something wrong with somebody otherwise he wouldn't be here and be dead in his head, and he would be capable of doing a great deal more than he is doing at the particular moment. An individual is basically and routinely good, capable of many actions and considerable power. In the state of a Free Thetan or Native State he is a far more powerful individual than when he's been complicated up. It's the idea of the additive data to the Thetan. Try to give somebody something he doesn't want and you are going to overthrow his power of choice. His power of choice is the only thing that he had to begin with, which gave him power, capability and anything else and that power of choice has been consistently and continuously overthrown by giving him things he didn't want and taking away from him things he didn't want to get rid of back and forth. You get the individual pretty overwhelmed and he goes down in power. What happened to him actually is he solved something that didn't need solving. There was something he couldn't confront so he solved it and he fixed the solution. Anytime you fix these solutions, for ever and ever you put the individual down grade. An individual becomes aberrated by additives. His experiences in this universe are usually calculated to degrade and depower him. Now all you have to do is pick up all of these criss-crosses and you return him to power. Man is an added-to being and everything that has been added to him has decreased his ability to cope. When you add something to the Being he gets worse. We are in the business of deleting wrongnesses from the individual. Even the Freudian Analyst realized that some additive had been added that should be deleted. So the idea of deleting something to bring about a recovery is not new with us. Because we are in the business of deleting wrongnesses from the individual we seldom look at rightnesses and that's what's wrong with most auditors. They are so anxious to find the wrongness -- and quite properly -- and they never really look at the rightness. If they don't look at the rightnesses that are present, then they aren't appreciating the degrees of truth that are present that can be promoted into more truth. In other words they are starting at a level of no truth present all the time so of course they never make any forward progress. 257 You must realize that there must be truth present and that this truth must be recognized and that this is hand-in-glove a part of auditing -- the recognition of the fact that truth is present. If you only look for wrongnesses and only recognize wrongnesses then you will never be able to pull anything up a gradient because you won't think you have any rightnesses to work with. It just all looks wrong to you. You have to be able to look at the wrongnesses in order to right them but we also have to be able to look at the rightnesses in order to increase them. We are only trying to find wrongnesses in order to increase rightnesses, and that's very important. If you have no rightnesses present in a session you will never be able to make any progress of any kind. Progress is built on a gradient scale of rightnesses by which you delete wrongnesses and they drop and fall away. Therefore, Processing is an action by which wrongnesses can be deleted from the case to the degree that rightnesses are present in the session. You cannot take a case that doesn't have any rightness present and delete a wrongness. So you have to realize that there are rightnesses present and then you increase those rightnesses. That makes it possible for you to pick up the wrongnesses and that's what auditing consists of. Auditing is a contest of maintaining rightnesses so that we can delete wrongnesses. If you keep on deleting wrongnesses, all the while maintaining and increasing the rightnesses you eventually wind up with a very right being. You are trying to get a right being, therefore if you don't continually encourage right beingness you never wind up with a right being. You must learn to observe an auditing session. You want your pc to wind up in a right state -- in a more native, more capable, less overwhelmed, higher power of choice sort of state. You want him to wind up with more rightnesses. Therefore, if you audit so that you do not encourage and increase rightnesses then you won't wind up with a right pc. The degree of rightness you have present must exceed the wrongness you are going to pick up. It's a proportional action. If you've got as much wrongness in a session as you've got rightness you're not riding on any cushion. It makes a very difficult job of auditing. If you want to pick up this little wrongness, you have to have rightnesses present which are big enough to engulf it. That makes easy auditing. If the rightnesses in the session are very minor and the problem is a tiny one, there isn't enough rightness in the session to handle the problem and the pc cannot erase it. THE PC'S ABILITY TO AS-IS OR ERASE IN A SESSION IS DIRECTLY PROPORTIONAL TO THE NUMBER OF GOOD INDICATORS PRESENT IN THE SESSION. And his inability to cope in a session rises proportionally to the number of bad indicators present in a session. Any process has its own series of bad indicators. And the bad indicator moves in when the good indicator moves out. So you have to have a primary knowledge of good indicators. Don't look for bad indicators on and on and on; you'll drive the pc around the bend and suppress the good indicators. What you want to do is know your good indicators for the level you are running so well that when one of them disappears out of the session, your ears go up and you instantly look for the bad indicator. Don't look for the bad indicator until you see the vanishment of the good indicator. Otherwise you're continually prowling around looking for wrongnesses in a session and you keep a pc very upset and you get no auditing done of any kind whatsoever. 258 Remember this next time you see a pc start to bog and drag and flounder one way or the other. You've got to get the pc's good indicators back in before you can get the pc to handle what you want him to handle. What influences the attitude of the pc is an ARC Break (that of course is influenced earlier by the auditor's behavior), or the pc has an overt on the auditor or the pc has a missed withhold. An auditor who never gets in and finds out what is wrong in the session -- the reasonable auditor -- messes up pcs like mad. If all the good indicators are present the auditor knows he is doing a good job of auditing. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971, I974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=23/5/71 Volnum=0 Issue=9 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Basic Auditing Series 11 METERING   Remimeo Auditors Supervisors Students Tech and Qual Staff Checksheets of all courses teaching metering  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 23 MAY 1971 Issue IX Remimeo Auditors Supervisors Students Basic Auditing Series 11 Tech and Qual Staff Checksheets of all courses teaching metering METERING One does NOT tell the pc anything about the meter or its reads ever, except to indicate an F/N. Steering a pc with "That -- That -- That" on something reading is allowable. But that isn't putting attention on the meter but on his bank. Definition of "In Session" is "Pc interested in own case and willing to talk to the auditor". Saying "That reads", "That didn't read", "That blew down" is illegal. It is no substitute for TR 2. It violates the In Session definition by putting pc's attention on the meter and can make him very unwilling to talk to the auditor! L. RON HUBBARD LRH:act.rd Founder Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 259  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=26/5/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 38 TRS COURSE AND AUDITING MIXING MAJOR ACTIONS   Remimeo Basic Cse Super Hat D of P C/S Hats Tech Sec Qual Sec Dn Cse Ch/sheet  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 26 MAY 1971 Remimeo Basic Cse Super Hat D of P C/S Series 38 C/S Hats Tech Sec Qual Sec Dn Cse Ch/sheet TRS COURSE AND AUDITING MIXING MAJOR ACTIONS With the use of TRs The Hard Way on basic courses, auditors and students, a rule must be laid down: A PERSON ON A TR COURSE OR IN PROGRESS ON A TR CYCLE MAY NOT ALSO BE AUDITED. And a second rule: HGC ADMIN AND THE D OF P MUST BE INFORMED OF ENROLLMENTS ON TR COURSES OR TRS IN CRAMMING AND MUST SO MARK A PC'S FOLDER WITH DATE. And a third rule: IN AN ADVANCED ORG THE ADV CSE ADMIN MUST ALSO BE INFORMED OF STUDENTS ENROLLING ON A TR COURSE. And a fourth rule: A SIGN MUST BE PLACED IN QUAL AND IN A TR CLASSROOM "WHILE WORKING ON TRS AND UNTIL THEY ARE PASSED, DO NOT ACCEPT AUDITING." IN AN AO OR SH THIS READS "WHILE WORKING ON TRS AND UNTIL THEY ARE PASSED, DO NOT ACCEPT AUDITING OR DO SOLO." The reason for these rules lies in the major C/S rules: DO NOT BEGIN NEW PROGRAMS TO END OLD. DO NOT START A NEW ACTION BEFORE COMPLETING THE EXISTING ONE. And the auditor rule: OBTAIN AN F/N BEFORE STARTING THE NEXT C/S ACTION. IF UNABLE TO DO SO, NEVER BEGIN THE NEXT C/S ACTION BUT END SESSION AND RETURN THE FOLDER TO THE C/S. The surest way in the world to bog a case is to: 1. Begin a new process without obtaining an F/N on the one just run. 2. Begin a major action without completing the old one. 260 3. Begin a major action without setting up a case with ruds and F/Ns. 4. Begin a new program without completing the old one. 5. Start several programs without finishing any. 6. Enter a new major action into a case already in progress on another incomplete major action. I have seen a case on as many as five major actions with none complete. And when I see this the first thing I take up is the first unflat incomplete program and get it finished, then the next, then the next. The case comes out all smooth. Example: Case is on but not complete on Dianetic auditing. Switched to grades. Incomplete on grades, gets a Prog Pgm. Incomplete on a Prog Pgm, shifted to Power. The only apparent exception is a repair. A case can be repaired if bogged PROVIDING THE ORIGINAL ACTION IS REHABBED IF O/R OR COMPLETED TO EP. A Progress Pgm may reach EP before the written up program is completed. Thus a Process Completion is defined as the END PHENOMENA of the process. A Program is complete when the END PHENOMENA of the Program is attained. TRs Any course or program containing TRs 0-4, 6-9 or Admin TRs is a major program in itself. It produces case gain -- if run right -- and has an End Phenomenon. Further, by actual experience when a person is on a real (not a patty- cake and weak) TR Course and is also being audited at the same time, the C/S and Auditor if they don't know the person is also on TRs can be utterly baffled and worried as the case does not run right. "What did I do?" "What C/S was wrong?" "Look, his TA is high." "Now it's low." "Last session he _______ ." And the C/S and auditor engage in efforts to handle the odd case behavior. But the person, unknown to them, was also on a real TR Course and his case was changing! INTERJECTED PGMS You can also run into this same oddity with a mystic who does "bathe the body in light" every night or a wife whose husband audits her between HGC sessions or a self-auditor. The principle is the same. The C/S and auditor are going down Wellbeing Street and hidden trucks keep dashing out of alleys and running into the pc. LIFE The reason auditing should be done in intensive packages, not 1 hour a week or a session a month lies in the fact that LIFE can run a new action in on a pc. It's a great way to waste auditing to let a pc have a session once a week. You can't even keep his ruds in if he lives in any confusions. So nothing is done for the case, all the auditing goes to handle the life interjections! CROSS PROGRAMMING A case runs on cycles of actions. This is true in the auditing comm cycle. It is true in a process cycle. It is true in a program cycle. New things being crossed into old incomplete things make a sort of ARC Break situation like a cut comm cycle. 261 One could do everything with a process or a program OR A COURSE that you find on an L1C. It would not be very wise. No case gain can be created by lack of a comm cycle in an auditor, lack of an action cycle in processes or messing up a program cycle. If you don't believe it, run an L1C on a pc with "Processes" and "Programs" and "Courses" as a prefix. You'd be amazed. Further the fellow who doesn't reach the EP of a Course is likely never to use that material or be faulty with the subject. Usual study courses like admin or tech give case gain. One can carry on with auditing parallel to them. But still expect a case to change a bit by study and baffle a C/S once in a while. But a real TR Course produces changes up and down and up that are not possible to also audit around. So they don't mix. VISUAL IDEA To get a visual idea of this: Optimum: Start Change End |----------------- | -----------------| TR Course Start Change End |----------------- | -----------------| Pgm 1: Start Change End |----------------- | -----------------| Pgm 2: Ghastly: TR Cse Start \ \ Change \ / \/ Start \ Change Pgm 1 |_______\__________\_ Change / / Pgm 2 Start Where's the End? Why, here, of course: [GRAPHICS INSERTED] Got it? LRH:nt.sb.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright $c 1971 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 262  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=31/5/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 39 BEST ADVANCE PROGRAM   Remimeo AOs AOSHs Class IX Course C/Ses  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 31 MAY 1971 (REVISED -- see HCO B 31 May 71R Volume VII -- 419) Remimeo AOs AOSHs Class IX Course C/S Series 39 C/Ses BEST ADVANCE PROGRAM (As often done on Flag) 1. Dianetics to an EP 2. Scientology ARC Straight Wire 3. Triple Grades 4. Power 5. R6EW 6. Clear 7. OT I 8. OT II 9. OT III 10. LDN OT III and Handle 11. OT VII 12. OT III Expanded 13. L10 14. Dianetics to full EP 15. Expanded Grades to full EP each grade 16. OT IV 17. OT V 18. OT VI 19. OT VII Rehab 20. Any new OT Levels Do not interpret this to be the only Advance Program. The L10 step of course can not be done until L10 is available in your area and is simply omitted until that time. The data on running of Quadruple Dn is contained in the HCOBs on the subject: HCOB 7 March 1971 -- C/S Series 28 Use of Quadruple Dianetics HCOB 4 April 1971 -- C/S Series 32 Use of Quad Dianetics HCOB 5 April 1971 -- C/S Series 33 Triple & Quad Reruns HCOB 21 April 1971 -- C/S Series 36 Quadruple Dianetics Dangers of. LRH:sb.rd Copyright $c 1971 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [LDN is a list used for Pcs on OT III or above.] 263  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=2/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=0 rDate=30/12/72 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Study Series 2 CONFRONTING   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 2 JUNE 1971 Issue I (Corrected and Reissued 30 December 72. Remimeo Corrections in this type style.) Study Series 2 CONFRONTING The first requisite of any subject is the ability to confront the various components (things) (parts) (divisions) of the subject itself. All misunderstoods, confusions, omissions, alterations of a subject begin with failures or unwillingness to confront. The difference between a good pilot and a bad pilot depends of course on consistent study and practice, but underlying this, determining whether the person will study and practice, is the ability to confront the components of study and airplanes. A "quick study", by which is meant a student who learns rapidly or a person who grasps a subject quickly, has a high ability to confront that subject. In a dramatic profession, the wild animal trainer who could confront wild animals remained alive. The one who couldn't confront was too slow of perception to live long. In a more common line of work, the fast typist could confront study and typing in the first place and the slow typist couldn't and can't. The confusions about "talent" and "native ability" and such are resolved to no small extent when one recognizes the role played by the ability to confront. Basically, if one can just be there with it, he can then achieve the skill of communicating with whatever "it" is and handling it. Thus, before communicating with the components of a subject can properly begin, one must be able to be there comfortably with the components of the subject. All power depends upon the ability to hold a location. To communicate one must be able to hold to a location. This is even true in the physical universe. You can't move a chair unless you can hold a position yourself near the chair. If you don't believe it, try it. Thus the ability to communicate with precedes the ability to handle. But before one can communicate with something one must be able to be in a location near it. The age-old puzzle of how some scholars can get "A" on a subject they have studied and then not be able to apply even a scrap of the data is resolved by this fact of confronting. They can confront the book, the class and the thought. But they haven't attained the ability to confront the physical objects of the subject. At least such "glib" students can confront the book, the paper, the thought. They are partway there. Now all they need to do is confront as well the physical things to which the subject is applied and they would be able to apply what they know. 264 Some people are not so lucky as to be "glib" students. They have to work up to "being there" with the book, paper, classroom and teacher. Thus "confronting" is actually the ability to be there comfortably and perceive. Amazing reactions occur when conscious effort is made to do this. Dullness, perception trouble, fogginess, sleep and even pains, emotions and convulsions can occur when one knowingly sets out to BE THERE AND COMFORTABLY PERCEIVE with the various parts of a subject. These reactions discharge and vanish as one perseveres (continues) and at last, sometimes soon, sometimes after a long while, one can be there and perceive the component. As one is able to confront one part he then finds it easier to confront other components. People have mental tricks they use to get around actual confronting -- to be disinterested, to realize it's not important, to be sort of half dead, etc - - but these discharge (run out) as well eventually and at last they can just be there and comfortably perceive. Eye blinks, swallows, twitches, aches, pains, are all systems of interrupting confronting and are the symptoms of discomfort. There are many of these. If they are present then one is not just being there and perceiving. Confronting on a via (using a relay point) is another method of ducking out of it. The worst off cannot even tolerate the idea of being there and perceiving anything. They run away, even go into emotional fits rather than be there and perceive. Such people's lives are a system of interruptions and vias, all substitutes for confronting. They are not very successful. For success in life depends not on running away from it but by being there and perceiving it and then being able to communicate with it and handle it. TERMS "A gradient scale" means a gradual increasing condition of, or a little more of, little by little. A "skipped gradient" means taking on a higher degree or amount before a lesser degree of it has been handled. One has to go back and handle the missed degree or thing or else one will have just losses on a subject thereafter. "Flattening" something means to do it until it no longer produces a reaction. "Overrunning" something means accumulating protests and upsets about it until it is just a mass of stops. Anyone can do anything forever unless he begins to stop it. "Invalidation" means a refuting or degrading or discrediting or denying something someone else considers to be a fact. GRADIENTS Some of the things one would have to be able to be there and perceive in order to study, placed on a graduated scale of increasing difficulty are: Beginning at all. The classroom or work space. Paper. 265 Books. Writing materials. Sounds. A Student. The Supervisor. The area of the study subject's physical components. The motionless equipment of the subject. The moving equipment of the subject. Masses connected with the subject. The subject as a whole. The next stages would have to be confronting while moving. This requires a consecutive being there and perceiving even though one is occupying different locations. The next stages would be confronting selectively while moving despite other things seeking to distract. This Bulletin is not an effort to set out the numerous confronting drills. It is intended to set out the various axioms or laws necessary to an understanding of the subject of confronting itself. From these brief notes all the axioms can be derived. The fundamental and basic simplicities of confronting itself is the first thing that must be grasped. All complexity surrounding any subject or action is derived (comes from) a greater or lesser inability to confront. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:sb.nt.rd Copyright $c 1971, 1972 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 266  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=2/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 37 CANCELLED C/S Series 37 Addition CANCELLED OVERRUN -- DON'T USE   URGENT Remimeo Class VIIIs Class VIII Checksheet  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 2 JUNE 1971 Issue II Remimeo Class VIIIs Class VIII Checksheet URGENT C/S Series 37 CANCELLED C/S Series 37 Addition CANCELLED OVERRUN -- DON'T USE (C/S Series 37R, HCOB 3 June 71 is the valid one) C/S Series 37 of 19 May 1971, "High TAs Are Overruns Plus Int RD Handling" and C/S Series 37 Addition, "TA Rising While Listing O/R List", are both CANCELLED and should be removed from any files, packs and destroyed. Auditors are having enough failures with it to make it unsafe. And I have made a breakthrough which outdates it anyway. I am always the 1st to tell you of any error. Leave this in your file. C/S SERIES 37 IS REPLACED BY C/S SERIES 37R HCOB 3 JUNE 1971. HIGH AND LOW TAs. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 267  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=3/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 37R HIGH AND LOW TA BREAKTHROUGH  Type = 11 iDate=19/5/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0 Type = 11 iDate=21/5/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  MUST BE CHECKED OUT *RATE AND IN CLAY BEFORE USE! Remimeo VIII Checksheet All VIIIs Class IX Class X Dept 10s All C/Ses  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 3 JUNE 1971 Remimeo VIII Checksheet All VIIIs Class IX Class X C/S Series 37R Dept 10s All C/Ses REVISED (C/S Series 37, HCOB 19 May 71 and C/S Series 37 Addition, HCOB 21 May 71, have been cancelled and are not for use. They are replaced by this HCOB, C/S Series 37R.) MUST BE CHECKED OUT *RATE AND IN CLAY BEFORE USE! HIGH AND LOW TA BREAKTHROUGH High and Low TAs have been a long-time puzzle and stumbling block to Auditors. The usual definition of OVERRUN is "gone on too long" or "happened too often". This causes high TAs to occur. In examining a few failures on using "overrun", I have found that underlying this there is a more basic principle. When a thetan believes something is "overrun" or "has gone on too long" or "was done too often" he is expressing only a symptom of another mechanism. The truth is A THETAN CAN DO ANYTHING FOREVER. To Audit "overruns" is auditing toward an untruth. Thus if carried on as a process it is really an out of ARC Process. That which makes a thetan believe something can be overrun is the EFFORT TO STOP or THE EFFORT TO STOP HIM. The effort to stop something, when generalized, becomes a "stop everything" and IS the entrance point of insanity. This has been known since 1967. But I did not earlier connect it with the OVERRUN phenomenon. When a thetan has a long chain of efforts to stop or a chain of efforts to stop him (mixed up with protest, of course, and shame, blame and regret and other human emotion and reaction) he accumulates ridges. These make mass. This mass makes the high TA. In truth it is not possible to kill a thetan, so therefore any effort to stop a thetan would only have partial success. So the chain is also full of INCOMPLETES. An incomplete cycle of action causes ARC Breaks. Thus an OVERRUN is full of MASS and ARC Breaks! As you possibly recall from the material of about 1955 the one process you must not run on a pc is "Look out of here and find something you can go out of ARC with." This sends him into a dwindling spiral. 268 The common denominators of a bank are OUT OF ARC and STOP! Thus if too long a list of "What has been Overrun" is required to obtain the first BD F/N item the listing action may very well restimulate much more bank than can easily be handled on some pcs. As these are also the pcs with very high TA, if one lists for overrun and runs much too long a list to get his first BD F/N item, the pc can be heavily restimulated. Listing errors or upsets can make this, then, too uncomfortable a proceeding for a pc and should NOT now be done. And if it doesn't work on some pcs in the hands of some auditors, it must therefore be cancelled. Any recommendation on VIII Course to do it is cancelled. The theory is correct as given on the VIII Course. There, a few items were intended. But now some very long lists have come up on some pcs which made the pc uncomfortable and were hard for the auditor to handle. Thus the BD F/N item overrun list must not be done. CONTINUE is then the Reverse Action to overrun. Continue equals Survival. The REVERSE to overrun therefore can be run as a process, to wit, "What would you be permitted to continue?" or "What could be Continued?" This however would not be very successful. Thus the listing action is recommended as the process to use. LISTS SEVEN Lists can be done on Overrun itself by using the in-ARC Approach. Assess A. Self to another _______ B. Another to self _______ C. Others to others _______ D. Others to self _______ E. Self to self _______ F. Another to others _______ G. Others to another _______ Ordinarily the biggest read or any read has located a flow that will run and will be most real to the pc. But this is not true in handling overruns. The most stopped or rising read is where he's really hung. To get a TA down list the most stopped read or the rise of the read or the item that raised the TA when called. This is ONLY true of Overruns. The list questions for the above are: If A stopped: "What could you continue to do to another?" If B stopped: "What could another continue to do to you?" If C stopped: "What could others continue to do to others?" If D stopped: "What could others continue to do to you?" If E stopped: "What could you continue to do to yourself?" 269 If F stopped, list "What could another continue to do to others?" If G stopped, list "What could others continue to do to another?" The "Most stopped read" would be one that really froze the needle or caused it to rise or caused the TA to RISE such as 3.5 to 3.6. The lists would be listed to a BD F/N item, Cog, VGIs. Actually the list could be listed forever. But the pc will get an item he likes and that F/Ns. He is then given his item. One does NOT null such lists unless one has really goofed. ALL the lists A, B, C, D, E, F and G can be listed. To get a TA DOWN you list the flow that sends the TA UP. Then reassess for the next that sends the TA up, etc. LOW TA The same exact thing causes LOW TAs. The flow could be said to have overwhelmed the pc. Exactly how you read the list for Low TA will be given in another HCOB after further tests are made. In theory it would go lower on assessment. Please note that OUT TRs on the part of auditors is the most frequent cause of low TAs. TR 1 that drives the pc out through the back of his head can cause a low (below 2.0) TA on a lot of pcs. END PHENOMENA The End Phenomena, the "EP" of a TA HANDLING RUNDOWN would be all lists assessed or listed to F/N and the pc's needle doing a persistent continual F/N for days. This means an F/N, wide, that nothing can kill. DEPT 10 The Department of Special Cases should have auditors who can do this rundown by the book and with perfect results. It is really a Dept 10 technique. FLOWS NOTE There are about seven flow directions that can be used or listed. (1) Self to another, (2) Another to self, (3) Others to others, (4) Self to others, (5) Others to self, (6) Another to others, (7) Others to another. "Flow" is an electronic flow in a direction. In Phoenix, Arizona, in 1952 an "Oscilloscope" (has a face like a radar, shows wave patterns and directions) was once hooked up to an E-Meter movement and showed that a mental flow will flow just so long in one direction. By reversing the repetitive commands when the left-right directional flow slowed, the flow turned around and flowed right-left then slowed, etc. So actual electrical flow occurs in response to the directional command (like "self to another"). Also it jams up when run too long on an average human because his mind has "overruns" in it already. "Ridges" and masses come about from a conflict of flows opposing or being pulled back as in withholds. High TAs are caused by two or more flows opposing thus making a mass or ridge. Low TAs are caused by overwhelm by flows. The thetan thinks of them as overruns and so quits on a subject or wishes he could. 270 This is why the TA behaves as it does on life and certain subjects. There is no real reason why a flow can't go on forever in one direction unless a thetan tries to stop it. Then it ridges and makes mass which then reads on a TA. AUDITOR QUALIFICATIONS An Auditor must be a master at Listing and Nulling in order to touch such Actions as these lists. To foul up on listing on an already fouled-up pc is quite out-tech! An auditor's TRs should have been passed the Hard Way. His metering must be excellent and flawless. His command and use of the Auditor's Code must be complete. He should himself have had case gain. He must have a full checkout on this HCO B and be able to do it in clay. And as I say, he must know the subject of Listing and Nulling so well, he can always list smoothly to a BD F/N item with never a quiver. INTERIORIZATION RUNDOWN This HCO B does not change the Interiorization Rundown in theory or in practice. It does however give this procedure. 1. On a high or low TA pc check for Exteriorization in auditing. 2. If pc has gone Ext in Auditing make sure he has not had an Ext-Int RD earlier before giving him another. 3. If an earlier Int RD exists repair, complete or rehab it. Often an Int RD is itself overrun. An L3B on it will show what is wrong with the earlier one. Some poor High TA pcs have had 2 or 3 Ext-Int RDs! All run past the EP. Some Ext-Int RDs went totally flat on the secondaries! Or on the recalls. All else was overrun. 4. If no earlier Ext-Int RD was done, then do one. 5. If the check of the Ext-Int RD situation shows it not to be the reason, or was the reason but the TA goes high or low days later, then DO THIS TA HANDLING RD. As pc high and low TAs have been blocking auditing for a lot of auditors this discovery and its remedy is Delightful news! L. RON HUBBARD LRH:nt.rd Founder Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [This HCO B is added to by HCO B 15 June 1971, C/S Series 37R Addition, Hi-Lo TA Assessment Rules, page 282, HCO B 16 June 1971R, Issue IV, C/S Series 37R Addition 2R, Low TA Assessing, page 283, and HCO B 26 June 1971, C/S Series 37R Addition 3, page 296.] 271  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=7/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 40 LOW TAs   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 7 JUNE 1971 Remimeo C/S Series 40 LOW TAs As per C/S Series 37R, further work was done on low TAs. LOW TAs ALSO ASSESS ON RISE JUST LIKE HIGH TAs. There is no difference of procedure except that a low TA can blow UP to 2.0 + and F/N. Thus one can't say using 37R on a low TA case, "List to a BD F/N item" as it may be a Blow UP F/N item. The TA may be at 1.8 in listing and when the F/N item goes on the list, the TA will blow UP to 2.0 or 2.1 and F/N. Further if the F/N promptly dies, and the TA falls, one lists further until one blows up, the F/N continues and the pc is pleased with it. Assessment on a low TA is done on RISE for the item listed or a Blow UP, just as in the case of high TAs. When you list a low TA's falling flow (in assessing the seven flows) and use it for the Continue list the pc can get very unhappy and will get even more overwhelmed. Thus low TA or high TA, list the 7 flows for rise or blow UP and list the one that rose most. This is true of the first and every other flows assessment. Realize this blow UP rule only applies to 37R and the Continue list and is not used in any other listing. 37R works on low TAs like a bomb! L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:sb.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 272  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=9/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 41 C/S TIPS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 9 JUNE 1971 Issue I Remimeo C/S Series 41 C/S TIPS LISTS Always C/S to correct lists first when lists are out or suspected to be out. Don't do ARC Brks first in a case of out lists as an out list can make an ARC Break that can't be handled by ARC Brk but only an L4B. On a GF when lists show up or overlists you should handle that (first action in handling the GF) but also you must order an "L4B Method 5 and Handle." Method 5 is the once through for assessment. NO READ AUDITORS When auditors can get no reads on things you get their a) TRs checked to see if they can even be heard. b) Their metering checked for meter position on auditing table, can they see meter, pc and write without shifting eyes? And can they see pc's hands on the cans? And was the meter turned on and charged and can an auditor work the Tone Arm smoothly with his thumb? c) Does the auditor discount reads gotten on clearing commands? (They are the reads.) d) Can the auditor read out a list and see the meter reads as a coordinated action? CRAMMING Send auditors to cramming on all flubs, insist they GO to cramming, insist cramming calls them in and crams them and insist on a carbon copy of the fact that cramming has been done. All the hard work of C/Sing comes in when auditors are flubby. It takes weeks to make an auditor after he has had a course and it's only done by Cram-Cram-Cram. R FACTORS Never order an R Factor that takes pc into future or past as he then won't be in session. Example: C/Ses "R Factor we are setting you up for Dianetics." Promptly the pc is up ahead not in this session. 273 MIXING STARTS There are many ways to start a session. Don't mix them. It's "2 wc what do you have your attention on?" "Fly a rud if no F/N." "Fly all ruds." "2 wc the TA down." "Fly a rud or GF + 40 Method 5 and handle." It's not a mixture of frantic efforts to get a TA down. If the auditor can't on what the C/S says THE AUDITOR ENDS OFF. Interiorization is undone or out, there may be list errors, there may be overruns, but for sure it's a case for FOLDER STUDY, not for an auditor C/Sing in the chair. HIGH TA & ARC BRKS Train your auditors NEVER TRY TO GET A TA DOWN FROM 3.5 OR ABOVE ON ARC BREAKS. LOW TA QUITS Some auditors see a TA sink below 2.0 and then won't continue the 2 wc or process to get the TA back up. "The TA sank so I quit" is a common auditor note. Compare this: "The TA rose above 3.0 so I quit." See? Doesn't make sense. If a TA sinks below 2.0 -- and the auditor's TRs are good -- the same action will usually bring it up to 2.0 and F/N. Come down hard on auditors who do this. Get their TRs checked, make them continue. EXAM F/Ns AFTER FLUBS Pcs whose TAs are high in session or low in session and get F/N at the Exams put the finger on the auditor. They are protesting or being overwhelmed. Always C/S "Examiner! Ask pc what auditor did in session." Then you know it's the auditor or the case. The pc will say the auditor was okay. So it's case. But usually when cases are puzzles there's weird things going on with TRs. Also the auditor may be noisy or laugh hard or is boisterous and being "interesting". C/S VIA The C/S is handling cases on the via of an auditor. If the auditor is perfect the C/S can handle the work out of the case. If the 274 auditor is not perfect in TRs, metering, Code, reports and doing the C/S then the C/S is solving a factor unknown to him, not the pc's case. So, be a perfect C/S. Demand perfect auditing. Cases fly. HIGHER LEVELS A C/S who assesses a pc to higher levels to solve lower ones is really asking for a wreck. It's always the earlier actions that are out. Trying to cheat a case up to Grade 2 when he won't run on Grade 1 is like trying to run the whole grade chart to cure a cold. A pc can always be solved in or below where he is. "Oh, we'll put him up a grade and cure his high TA" is like "He can't pass kindergarten so we'll enroll him in college." C/S EXPERTISE A C/S has to know his auditing materials, HCO Bs and texts MUCH better than an auditor. If a C/S is not being successful, get a retread on VI and VIII materials. A C/S also must be confident HE could crack the case as an auditor. When a C/S is shaky on his materials then the world of auditing looks very unstable. The tech is very exact, very effective. If any errors existed in it they've been corrected. So the variables are the knowledge of the C/S, his discipline and demands of auditors and the actions of the auditor. If THESE are stable then the cases that come along are easy as can be. The successful C/S knows his materials. If he wants to be even more successful he keeps his study up. Then he is steady and calm for he is totally certain. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:sb.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 275  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=9/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 42 C/S RULES   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 9 JUNE 1971 Issue II Remimeo C/S Series 42 C/S RULES COMPLETE CYCLES Don't leave cycles incomplete on a case. If a C/S starts a 37R and the auditor goofs, correct the auditor and then get the 37R completed. Don't disperse and do something new. If you have a program going and it's goofed, repair the auditor and the goofed pc and continue the program you began on the case. Repair (Progress) Programs are ended when the pc is flying nicely. When a repair hits that, don't re-repair. On Advance Programs, take each step to its EP. Don't suddenly start something new. A sure way to solve a case is go back and find the earliest incomplete program, complete it and so on up to PT. Keep your "finger in the book" on a case. Don't lose your place. That's done by having the current pgm on the inside front cover, paper clipped on, and checked off with each step done. When it's done, put a new pgm on top of it. Insist that auditors keep up the inside front cover folder summary each session with their auditing time and admin time in the box. This FS is a 2 column set of boxes, date, what's run, F/N or bogged and time. By seeing Admin is in you can keep your place in the book or study back rapidly to find what's been done. DOUBLE ACTIONS The deadliest faults on cases are running the same action or grade twice. This drives TAs up through the roof. Example: Power done in '65. Done again in '69! Example: Grade IV done in '69, done in '70. You find the case isn't doing well or find the error. In doubles, rehab by date of the first time it was done. I've seen Interiorization done three times on one pc, Power twice and the same Dianetic Chains run over and over. And people wondered "Why is the TA high"! So when you order a major action always check to see if it's ever been done before! Save you grief. And if a major action won't run, suspect it may have been done before. 276 SET-UPS Always set up a case fully for the next major action. Don't overrepair. But be sure the case is not sick, has had good exam forms and does well. Then C/S the next major action. BLAMING THE PC Never blame the pc. Many it is true are dog cases. But even dog cases can be handled. When you find auditors (or feel yourself) blaming the pc, get the overts and withholds run out. Once I got the most splendid sessions out of an HGC. I had the auditor's overts and withholds checked on each auditor before he went into session. It was just research, but my it worked! Those were the smoothest sessions! Pcs began to fly! Too many times one blames the pc only to find later that the auditor's TRs were ghastly and that a major action had been run twice. Such discoveries make a C/S out of a C/S. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:sb.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 277  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=9/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=3 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 43 C/S RULES   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 9 JUNE 1971 Issue III Remimeo C/S Series 43 C/S RULES TROUBLE FOR THE PC Never make trouble for the pc. When a pc is running well let it roll. The C/S can spot a possible error but the pc is Wide F/N VGIs at the Exam, let it go. Chew the auditor, send to Cramming. But don't throw the well running pc into extensive repair -- don't break into a winning program harshly. It gives the pc a loss. The pc who isn't running well is the one you repair. Don't keep a pc going on and on, running badly with no case study. Study the case folder, find the right why by going back to where the pc was running consistently well and then come forward for the error. It will be in the exact next session. If the pc wasn't ever audited before, you go into his life of course, with a GF + 40 Method 5 and handle and other Life repairs. OVERREPAIR Any Repair or Progress action has reached its End Phenomena when the pc is running well again. This is peculiar to the Repair or Progress program. Wrong Example: Pc was on Grade III, fell on his head. C/S studied case, found out lists, wrote an extensive Repair Pgm and C/S. Half way through repair the pc again was flying. C/S continued the repair. Pc bogged. C/S C/Sed the pc to flying again. C/S continued the repair. Pc bogged. Right Example: Pc falls on his head on Grade III. C/S writes a Repair Pgm and C/S. Auditor finds the out list, corrects it. Pc flies. C/S puts pc at once back on Grade III to complete. AUDITOR INVAL An auditor can be invalidated by a C/S by having a lot of questionable tech points thrown at him. The auditor's data gets shaky. If no decision was ever made -- is not in HCO Bs and tapes -- is not to hand and can't be referred to by HCO B and tape, then a C/S should not be making the point. Example: Auditor extends a list three more items beyond an F/N. C/S chops him. There is no such rule. The pc maybe wouldn't accept the item until he listed a few more. Result is a firefight between C/S and auditor, simply because it isn't a valid point. 278 HCO Bs and Tapes are the stable data that form the agreement between the auditor and the C/S. "If it isn't written (or spoken on tape) it isn't true." Don't wander off known tech points in C/Sing. Never shake an auditor's data by advancing data not on HCO Bs and Tapes. Always know your data, your HCO Bs and Tapes and refer the auditor to them in Cramming. Cramming MUST have a library of all materials. A hidden data line can build up in C/S-Auditor lines (or course lines or Cramming lines) that CAN UNSTABILIZE ALL TECH AND DENY FURTHER RESULTS. The decay of tech in areas begins with hidden data lines that ARE NOT TRUE. So use and refer to HCO Bs and Tapes and leave all other points alone. Your auditors will become confident and certain and Tech will improve. It's enough just to insist on the usual. Then auditors and cases will fly. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:sb.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 279  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=10/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 44R C/S RULES PROGRAMMING FROM PREPARED LISTS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 10 JUNE 1971 Issue I Remimeo C/S Series 44R C/S RULES PROGRAMMING FROM PREPARED LISTS There are many vital prepared lists. King of these is the Green Form. The additional No. 40 items are the original Seven Resistive Cases. The best way to do a GF + 40 is Method 5 (once through), lengths of reads and BDs marked and C/S to then write a C/S for it. Hi-Lo TA is also such a list, also done Method 5. Any such prepared list can be done Method 5 and the C/S to then write a C/S. But L4B (Lists correction), L3B (Dianetic errors) and L1C (ARC Brks and bypassed charge) are usually done Method 3 (auditor assesses to a read, gets the action done, and/or earlier similar to an F/N, not going on until his action has resulted in an F/N and then going on to complete handling and F/Ning each read he gets). When the C/S has a list assessed Method 5 he expects usually to get it back with the reads and then write the C/S for it. Sometimes he asks for a GF + 40 and a Hi-Lo TA both to be done Method 5. Now the question comes up, which reads does the C/S write up to be handled first? And second? And third? Etc. In other words how does he arrange the C/S the auditor is to do now? What sequence are the items handled in? These rules apply: Handle an Out Int RD first. Handle anything connected with "Lists" (meaning Listing and Nulling Lists) first if Int isn't out. Like "Listed past right item," reads. The C/S would get that handled FIRST. Always handle list errors first. And usually do an L4B additionally, Auditor to handle. A pc can get sick after a listing error and you can't get auditing done when lists are out. Doesn't want auditing, why, is then handled if it read. Next C/S to handle anything to do with rudiments. ARC Brks, PTPs and W/Hs take precedence in that order. (Listing errors are first, before ARC Brks because an apparent ARC Break after a listing error can only be handled by getting the charge off the list.) Anything that looks like a withhold comes next. After that one just takes the lengths or BD of reads. Take the biggest reads before you take the smaller ones, once you have C/Sed for Lists, doesn't want auditing and Ruds and evident other withholds. 280 The only confusion that one can get into is a very high TA. But List errors can cause high TAs. Next in frequency is withholds. Never C/S to take a TA down with an ARC Brk rud or an L1C. Never. You can C/S to "talk a TA down" only when there are no list errors or withholds reading on a GF. Of course an Interiorization Rundown error is a primary target. But you don't have that once it's handled. You will get a soaring TA if Int is out. L3B is a potent tool to order for Int outnesses, the auditor handling as he goes, Method 3. So the above gives you the rules by which you C/S from assessed prepared lists. Basically -- when Int is out, auditing will drive the TA up. When lists are out nothing will handle but lists and L1C won't nor will ruds. When ruds are out nothing else will straighten up and you mustn't order auditors to audit with out ruds. Doesn't want auditing can come from a bad L & N list. Or out Int. Or out ruds. Previous bad auditing can be cured by L1C on previous bad auditing. The craziest out auditing I ever ran into was an auditor using reads and F/Ns when there were none and failing to take up or flatten reads he did get. So there can be variations on bad auditing and there can be, to our shame, false auditing reports. The best C/S is to find what auditor and find out what the error was. Bad TRs on a poor TR Course where the pc was a student (False passes and invalidated wins) can also cause "doesn't want auditing". "Protest" is a frequent reason for high TA and is a cousin to "doesn't want auditing" and is handled by checking "Lists" for read and doing an L4B if it reads or finding the out ruds or other BPC as in L1C. As there are so many combinations of reading items from prepared lists, you have to C/S according to these general principles. These rules serve as a steadying guide that you'll find win for you. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:sb.rd Founder Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [This HCO B is added to by BTB 31 October 1971, Reissued 2 July 1974, C/S Series 44R Addition, C/S Rules -- The Sequence of Programs, which is in the C/S Series Volume, page 151.] 281  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=15/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 37R Addition HI-LO TA ASSESSMENT RULES   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 15 JUNE 1971 Remimeo C/S Series 37R Addition HI-LO TA ASSESSMENT RULES In assessing and listing the Continue process it is VITAL to continue to assess the seven flows and list until the entire list widely F/Ns. There can be more than seven lists taken from the seven flows. One finds a rise or blow up item, does a list on it, then reassesses ALL seven flows, finds the next most rising item, lists then and assesses ALL seven flows and finds the next most stopped or rising item and lists that. One just keeps this up. Eventually on assessing the seven flows you can only get a stopped needle. Then a slowed or killed F/N. One uses these for lists. Sometimes toward the last they blow on indication and cog. The end of it all is the auditor assessing the seven flows without being able to disturb a wide wide persistent F/N. THAT is the EP of the 37R process. There is no other EP. If not done to that EP the 37R process is incomplete. CLEARING FLOWS The idea of flows should be cleared with the pc before assessment is done. One can do this by getting the pc to draw them. Don't confuse the pc with this clearing and make sure he is not confused before assessing the seven flows. REPEATED ASSMT One can take a sheet of paper lengthwise and write the seven flows along the left edge with lines to the right. By putting in dividing vertical lines one then has 10 or 12 assessments laid out ready to do. LOW TA Unless one does a THOROUGH JOB to the 37R End Phenomena on a low TA case the TA will continue to go low in future sessions. A low TA takes more times through the assessments and listing than a high TA. CRAMMING Auditors who can't do this well must be fully crammed on reading a needle and TA on stops, rises and blow ups. The result, if properly done, is invariably good. LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 282  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=16/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=4 Rev=1 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=2 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=1 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 37R Addition 2R LOW TA ASSESSING   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 16 JUNE 1971R Issue IV Remimeo (Corrected and Reissued) C/S Series 37R Addition 2R LOW TA ASSESSING If after an apparent EP of a wide F/N on the last assessment, the pc then has a low TA at the Examiner or subsequently has a low TA, one must NOT start a new program as the existing one (37R) is incomplete. The correct C/S for an apparent 37R EP which then went sour would be 1. L4B Method 3 and handle. 2. Ask if there is another flow not yet touched. Note its read as it is described and list it. 3. Reassess the existing and the additional flows for any slightest slow or choke and list it. Should there still be trouble with low or high TA subsequently, it lies in the area of overts and withholds which blow loose on the Continue process. This is true because overts and withholds add up to stopping something which is discontinuance. The next process (when all possible thoroughness has been taken with 37R yet trouble of high or low TA persists) has not yet been released. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971, 1973 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 283  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=19/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 45 C/S RULES   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 19 JUNE 1971 Issue I Remimeo C/S Series 45 C/S RULES A C/S never C/Ses exclusively for result. He C/Ses for exact tech application. If that occurs he'll also get his result. If a goof still wins, the C/S stomps on the goof. This prevents auditors getting hung on an accidental win. The wins a C/S wants are exact tech application. If a C/S can finally get auditors exactly auditing the exact processes with exact TRs, metering and Code everybody then wins all the time. So the pc got an F/N at the Exam after the auditor failed to do the final run through, leaving the TA high at session end. That's a goof. To hell with the F/N at Exams or how PR the pc was. That is a goof. The C/S stomps on it. Never give a "very well done" on wins only. Give them on tech exactness. Got an Exam F/N not quite by the book. That's only "well done". Got an Exam F/N and did it by the book is the "Very well done". We know the tech works. That's no surprise. Perfect application by the Auditor is what the "well dones" and "very well dones" are for. The moment a C/S loses sight of this point he has started his team on a downgrade that will wind up with everyone losing, org, auditors and pcs. That's the secret of how I as a C/S make star auditors. If it's by the book, hurrah. If it isn't by the book then a pc dial-wide F/N VGI rave at Exams gets, from me, a flunk! on the auditor. With a good plain why. The Very Well done means "You applied the tech splendidly". It does not mean "You helped the pc". We know the standard tech will do that. So watch this point. It's an awful big one. It will make your auditors into stars or bums. Auditor runs a narrative chain. Gets away with it. Pc F/N VGIs at Exam. My C/S includes "Auditor to cramming on HCOBs covering types of items." Now please recognize that auditors for whom I C/S do make it and go on making it. Well, in addition to knowing the subject, this is the one thing I do that is not always done by C/Ses. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 284  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=19/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 46 DECLARES   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 19 JUNE 1971 Issue II Remimeo C/S Series 46 DECLARES It is the C/S's responsibility that a pc or Pre OT is sent to Declare? This is not an Admin point I'm making. It is a technical point. Every so often a pc is found hung up in not having declared and attested the state attained. A Declare Completes his cycle of action and is a vital part of the action. One never forces or feeds one to the pc. I recall one org where the entire tech and income structure crashed, the C/O and several personnel had to be removed because they were forcing "clear cogs" on their Dianetic pcs who hadn't had them (and then telling them they couldn't be audited further on Scientology) (Connie Broadbent, ASHO, March '70). So this goes 2 ways. THE PC OR PRE OT WHO KNOWS HE MADE IT MUST BE SENT TO EXAMS AND C & A TO ATTEST. THE PC OR PRE OT WHO HASN'T MADE IT MUST NEVER BE SENT TO EXAMS TO DECLARE AND ATTEST. This gives us a third: PCs AND PRE OTs WHO HAVEN'T MADE IT MUST BE HANDLED UNTIL THEY HAVE MADE THAT SPECIFIC DECLARE, EVEN THOUGH IT MEANS SIGNING UP FOR MORE AUDITING. TRUTH is the keynote, the essence, the point here. All the "PR" (slang for promotional talk) in the world will not supplant truth. The pc KNOWS he made something. Therefore he must be sent to declare it whether it's a standard grade or not! The pc who hasn't made it KNOWS he hasn't and so when forced to declare or ordered to attest tends to cave in. His concept of the validity of the org and honesty of Scientology depends on this, and really on this alone. The correct declare or not declare decision of the C/S is a vital C/S action. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 285  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=19/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=3 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  STUDY DEFINITIONS FOR THE TR COURSE   Remimeo TR Course  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 19 JUNE 1971 Issue III Remimeo TR Course STUDY DEFINITIONS FOR THE TR COURSE CHECKSHEET: A list of materials, often divided into sections, that give the theory and practical steps which, when completed, give one a study completion. The items are selected to add up to the required knowledge of the subject. They are arranged in the sequence necessary to a gradient of increasing knowledge of the subject. After each item there is a place for the initial of the student or the person checking the student out. When the checksheet is fully initialed it is complete, meaning the student may now take an exam and be granted the award for completion. Some checksheets are required to be gone through twice before completion is granted. CHECKLIST: A list of actions or inspections to ready an activity or machinery or object for use or estimate the needful repairs or corrections. This is erroneously sometimes called a "checksheet", but that word is reserved for study steps. CHECKOUT: The action of verifying a student's knowledge of an item given on a checksheet. SUPERVISOR CHECKOUT: A checkout done by the Supervisor of a course or his assistants. THEORY: The data part of a course where the data as in books, tapes and manuals is given. PRACTICAL: The drills which permit the student to associate and coordinate theory with the actual items and objects to which the theory applies. Practical is application of what one knows to what one is being taught to understand, handle or control. TWIN: The study partner with whom one is paired. Two students studying the same subject who are paired to checkout or help each other are said to be "Twinned". TWO WAY COMM: The precise technology of a process used to clarify data with another for the other. It is not chatter. It is governed by the rules of auditing. It is used by Supervisors to clear up blocks to a person's progress in study, on post, in life or in auditing. It is governed by the communication cycle as discovered in Scientology. METER CHECK: The action of checking the reaction of a student to subject matter, words or other things, isolating blocks to study, interpersonal relations or life. It is done with an E-Meter. COURSE SUPERVISOR: The instructor in charge of a course and its students. COURSE ADMINISTRATOR: The course staff member in charge of the course materials and records. BLOW: Unauthorized departure from an area, usually caused by misunderstood data or overts. LEAVE OF ABSENCE: An authorized period of absence from a course granted in writing by a Course Supervisor and entered in the student's study folder. 286 ROLL BOOK: The master record of a course giving the student's name, local and permanent address and the date of enrollment and departure or completion. QUAL: The Qualifications Division (Division V of an org) where the student is examined and where he may receive cramming or special assistance and where he is awarded completions and certificates and where his qualifications as attained on courses or in auditing are made a permanent record. CRAMMING: A section in the Qualifications Div where a student is given high pressure instruction at his own cost after being found slow in study or when failing his exams. PROGRAMMING: The overall planning for a person of the courses, auditing and study he should follow for the next extended time period. STUDENT CONSULTATION: The personal handling of student problems or progress by a qualified consultant. HC: A HUBBARD CONSULTANT is shilled in testing, two-way comm, consultation, programming and interpersonal relations. This is the certificate especially awarded to persons trained to handle personnel, students and staff. These technologies and special training were developed to apply Scientology auditing skills to the field of administration especially. An HC is not an auditor but a consultant. HC is a requisite for Course Supervisors and Student Consultants. SCHEDULING: The hours of a course or the designation of certain times for auditing. OUT: Things which should be there and aren't or should be done and aren't are said to be "Out". I.e. "Enrollment Books are out." IN: Things which should be there and are or should be done and are, are said to be "In". I.e. "We got scheduling in." PACK: A pack is a collection of written materials which match a checksheet. It is variously constituted -- such as loose leaf or a cardboard folder or bulletins in a cover stapled together. A pack does not necessarily include a booklet or hardcover book that may be called for as part of a checksheet. MANUAL: A booklet of instruction for a certain object or procedure or practice. POINTS: The arbitrary assignment of a credit value to a part of study materials. "One page equals one point." "That drill is worth 25 points." POINT SYSTEM: The system of assigning and counting up points for studies and drills that give the progress of a student and measure his speed of study. They are kept track of by the student and Course Administrator and added up each week as the student's statistic. The statistic of the course is the combined study points of the class. FLUNK: To make a mistake. Fail to apply the materials learned. Opposite of pass. DEMO KIT: Demonstration Kit. Consists of various small objects such as corks, caps, paper clips, pen tops, batteries -- whatever will do. These are kept in a box or container. Each student should have one. The pieces are used while studying to represent the things in the material one is demonstrating. It helps hold concepts and ideas in place. A demo kit adds mass, reality and doingness to the significance and so helps the student to study. PINK SHEET: Pink Sheets are issued by a Course Supervisor as a corrective measure. A student is given a Pink Sheet when something earlier was missed that should 287 have been learned. The principle of the Pink Sheet is that a student is responsible for all the material he has studied earlier. If he is unable to apply or use any of this material then the Pink Sheet is issued to remedy the situation. It gives the student a study assignment calling for re-study and checkout of the specific materials pertaining. It is a quick and precise remedy. TR: Training Regimen or Routine. Often referred to as Training Drill. TRs are a precise training action putting a student through laid out practical steps gradient by gradient to teach a student to apply with certainty what he has learned. COACH: To train intensively by instruction, demonstration and practice. In training drills, one twin is made the coach and the other the student. The coach, in his coaching actions, coaches the student to achieve the purpose of the drill. He coaches with reality and intention following exactly the materials pertaining to the drill to get the student through it. When this is achieved the roles are then reversed -- the student becoming the coach and the coach becoming the student. COMPLETION: A "completion" is the completing of a specific course or an auditing grade, meaning it has been started, worked through and has successfully ended with an award in Qual. SUCCESS STORY: The statement of benefit or gains or wins made by a student or a preclear or Pre OT to the Success Officer or someone holding that post in an org. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:dz.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 288  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=20/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 47 THE SUPREME TEST OF A C/S   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 20 JUNE 1971 Remimeo C/S Series 47 THE SUPREME TEST OF A C/S (Reference HCO B August 19, 1967, The Supreme Test which must be read with this HCO B) A C/S or auditor who knows his tech is able to hold the line on any given action in auditing or C/Sing and not mix up. One C/Ses Dianetics purely. Not Dn, C1 VI, Class VIII, Dn, Class VI. One C/Ses or audits a Rundown as itself, not as a botch of several actions run into it. So this brings to view that some can run the process or program for A to B. And some, worse luck, (a) Go from A to G to Q to A and wonder why they don't arrive at the B of result. (b) Some go from A to B all right but when at B go right on past it. Both, actually, are a type of non-confront. The A.G.Q.A can't confront and disperses off arriving at B. The A beyond B hasn't confronted B and so doesn't recognize B. The ability to confront the pc and the session and parts of the session permits one to accurately go from A to B. Proving this, perception reduces in ratio to overts. Accept that fact as it's true. If you run O/W on an auditor regarding the pc he is to audit, the auditor will give a perfect session to that pc. Why? He can confront because he can see. Programming is simply an A to B action. The road is all laid out. Auditing a process is a simple A to B Action. What if you had an auditor who half way through Level Zero with no completion found a picture, did Dianetics on it, didn't flatten the R3R because pc cogged it was like his mother and the auditor did O/W on mother in the middle of the engram! The pc would be a mess! B was run away from. Same way with programming that isn't handled. What if you had an auditor who got an F/N Cog VGIs and continued the same process to TA 5.6? He got to B and kept right on going. Same way with programs. So really the Supreme Test of an Auditor or C/S is to begin at the A and arrive at the B in any process or program. 289 You should look into some folders where the C/S or auditor dispersed off B or where B was reached with no halt. The most recent examples I've seen have been taking processes out of one Rundown and using them in another Rundown all in an effort to achieve a maximum effect when the error that was present came from failure to complete 2 earlier programs. The correct action would have been to complete the earliest program left incomplete and then complete the next incomplete program, not scramble parts of two new programs. A to B is a cycle of action. A clean one. It is best to keep it so. The Supreme Test of an Auditor or a C/S is to make Auditing go right -- by the book. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 290  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=21/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  AFFINITY, REALITY AND COMMUNICATION   Remimeo TR Course  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 21 JUNE 1971 Remimeo Issue I TR Course AFFINITY, REALITY AND COMMUNICATION (Extracted from Problems of Work & Dianetics '55!) There are three factors in Scientology which are of the utmost importance in handling life. These three factors answer the questions, How should I talk to people? -- How can I sell people things? -- How can I give new ideas to people? -- How can I find out what people are thinking about? -- How can I handle my work better? We call this in Scientology the A-R-C triangle. It is called a triangle because it has three related points. The first of these points is Affinity. The second of these points is Reality. The third of these points and the most important is Communication. By Affinity we mean emotional response. We mean the feeling of affection or lack of it, of emotion or misemotion connected with life. By Reality we mean the solid objects, the real things of life. By Communication we mean an interchange of ideas between two terminals. Without affinity there is no reality or communication. Without reality there is no affinity or communication. Without communication there is neither affinity nor reality. Now these are sweeping statements but are nevertheless very valuable and are true. Have you ever tried to talk to an angry man? An angry man's communication is at a level of misemotion which repels all terminals from him. Therefore his communication factor is very low, even though very loud. He is attempting to destroy something or some other terminal, therefore his reality is very poor. Very likely what he is being angry about apparently is not what has made him mad. An angry man is not truthful. Thus it could be said that his reality, even on the subject he is attempting to voice, is poor. There must be good affinity (which is to say affection) between two people before they are very real to each other (and reality must here be used as a gradient, with things being more real than other things). There must be good affinity between two people before they can talk together with any truth or confidence. Before two people can be real to each other there must be some communication between them. They must at least see each other, which is in itself a form of communication. Before two people can feel any affinity for each other they must, to some degree, be real. These three terms are interdependent one upon the other, and when one drops the other two drop also. When one rises the other two rise also. It is only necessary to improve one corner of this very valuable triangle in Scientology in order to improve the remaining two corners. It is only necessary to improve two corners of the triangle to improve the third. These three items, Affinity, Reality and Communication, can be demonstrated to equate into Understanding. It is a truism that if we could understand all Life we would then tolerate all Life. When we say "Life" we mean Understanding, and when we say "Understanding" we mean Affinity, Reality and Communication. To understand all would be to live at the highest level of potential action and ability. The quality of Life exists in the presence of Understanding -- in the presence, then, of Affinity, Reality and Communication. LRH:nt.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright $c 1971 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 291  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=24/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Word Clearing Series 2 WORD CLEARING   Remimeo All Students Tech & Qual Course Supervisors Course Supers Checksheet Cramming Officers Word Clearers  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 24 JUNE 1971 Remimeo All Students Tech & Qual Course Supervisors Course Supers Checksheet Cramming Officers Word Clearers Word Clearing Series 2 WORD CLEARING If anyone has "word cleared" you without these steps it is incorrect. (1) By Meter in Session: A full assessment of many many subjects is done. The auditor then takes each reading subject and clears the chain back to earlier words and/or words in earlier subjects until he gets an F/N VGIs. (2) By Meter in Classroom: The earlier passage is read by the student while on a meter and the misunderstood word is found. Then it is fully defined by dictionary. The word is then used several times in sentences of the student's own verbal composing. The misunderstood area is then reread until understood. (3) Verbal in classroom: The student says he does not understand something. The Supervisor has him look earlier in the text for a misunderstood word, gets the student to look it up, use it verbally several times in sentences of his own composition, then read the text that contained it. Then come forward in the text to the area of the subject he did not understand. If any other word clearing is going on it is OUT tech. There is a C/S on HCOB 30 June 71 to be followed exactly on word clearing in a session. Do not follow any other version or excerpt. There is NO other way to do it. If you are not auditing this way or using word clearing this way or if words are not being cleared this way, report it to Ethics. Once development and issue has occurred the next step is to get it understood and applied EXACTLY. Then in both Tech and Admin we have successes. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 292  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=25/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=25/11/74 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Word Clearing Series 3R BARRIERS TO STUDY   Remimeo Tech & Qual All Students Supervisors Supervisor's Course Cramming Word Clearers  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 25 JUNE 1971R Remimeo REVISED 25 NOVEMBER 1974 Tech & Qual All Students Supervisors Word Clearing Series 3R Supervisor's Course Cramming Word Clearers BARRIERS TO STUDY There are three different sets of physiological and mental reactions that come from 3 different aspects of study. They are three different sets of symptoms. (1) Education in the absence of the mass in which the technology will be involved is very hard on the student. It actually makes him feel squashed. Makes him feel bent, sort of spinny, sort of dead, bored, exasperated. If he is studying the doingness of something in which the mass is absent this will be the result. Photographs help and motion pictures would do pretty good as they are a sort of promise or hope of the mass but the printed page and the spoken word are not a substitute for a tractor if he's studying about tractors. You have to understand this data in its purity -- and that is that educating a person in a mass that they don't have and which isn't available produces physiological reactions. That is what I am trying to teach you. It's just a fact. You're trying to teach this fellow all about tractors and you're not giving him any tractors -- well he's going to wind up with a face that feels squashed, with headaches and with his stomach feeling funny. He's going to feel dizzy from time to time and very often his eyes are going to hurt. It's a physiological datum that has to do with processing and the field of the mind. You could therefore expect the greatest incidence of suicide or illness in that field of education most devoted to studying absent masses. This one of studying the something without its mass ever being around produces the most distinctly recognizable reactions. If a child felt sick in the field of study and it were traced back to this one, the positive remedy would be to supply the mass -- the object or a reasonable substitute -- and it would clear it up. (2) There is another series of physiological phenomena that exist which is based on the fact of too steep a study gradient. That's another source of physiological study reaction because of too steep a gradient. 293 It is a sort of a confusion or a reelingness that goes with this one. You've hit too steep a gradient. There was too much of a jump because he didn't understand what he was doing and he jumped to the next thing and that was too steep and he went too fast and he will assign all of his difficulties to this new thing. Now differentiate here -- because gradients sounds terribly like the 3rd one of these study hang-ups, definitions -- but remember that they are quite distinctly different. Gradients are more pronounced in the field of doingness but they still hang over into the field of understanding. In gradients however it is the actions we are interested in. We have a plotted course of forward motion of actions. We find he was terribly confused on the second action he was supposed to do. We must assume then that he never really got out of the first one. The remedy for this one of too steep a gradient is cutting back. Find out when he was not confused on the gradient, then what new action he undertook to do. Find what action he understood well. Just before he was all confused what did he understand well -- and then we find out that he didn't understand it well. It's really at the tail end of what he understood and then he went over the gradient you see. It is most recognizable and most applicable in the field of doingness. That's the gradient barrier and one full set of phenomena accompanies that. (3) There is this third one. An entirely different set of physiological reactions brought about through -- a bypassed definition. A bypassed definition gives one a distinctly blank feeling or a washed-out feeling. A not- there feeling and a sort of nervous hysteria will follow in the back of that. The manifestation of "blow" stems from this 3rd aspect of study which is the misunderstood definition or the not comprehended definition, the undefined word. That's the one that produces the blow. The person doesn't necessarily blow on these other two -- they are not pronouncedly blow phenomena. They are simply physiological phenomena. This one of the misunderstood definition is so much more important. It's the make-up of human relations, the mind and subjects. It establishes aptitude and lack of aptitude and it's what psychologists have been trying to test for years without recognizing what it was. It's the definitions of words. The misunderstood word. That's all it goes back to and that produces such a vast panorama of mental effects that it itself is the prime factor involved with stupidity and the prime factor involved with many other things. If a person didn't have misunderstoods his talent might or might not be present but his doingness would be present. We can't say that Joe would paint as well as Bill if both were unaberrated in the field of art, but we can say that the inability of Joe to paint compared with the ability of Joe to do the motions of painting is dependent exclusively and only upon definitions -- exclusively and only upon definitions. 294 There is some word in the field of art that the person who is inept didn't define or understand and that is followed by an inability to act in the field of the arts. That's very important because it tells you what happens to doingness and that the restoration of doingness depends only upon the restoration of understanding on the misunderstood word -- misunderstood definition. This is very fast processing. There is a very swift wide big result obtainable in this. It has a technology which is a very simple technology. It enters in at the lower levels because it has to. This doesn't mean it is unimportant, it means it has to be at the entrance gates of Scientology. It is a sweepingly fantastic discovery in the field of education and don't neglect it. You can trace back the subject a person is dumb in or any allied subject that got mixed up with it. The psychologist doesn't understand Scientology. He never understood a word in psychology so he doesn't understand Scientology. Well that opens the gate to Education. Although I've given this one of the misunderstood definition last it is the most important one. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd.jh Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 295  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=26/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=3 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 37R Addition 3   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 26 JUNE 1971 Remimeo C/S Series 37R Addition 3 37R is a very beefy process. It has been combined into L9S, HCO B 17 June 71, and is best done as part of this full rundown. 37R works on anyone, regardless of TA or state of case. Neither it nor L9S are used only on bad off cases. They work on both the worst and the best. In doing 37R the items are sometimes very heavy and it takes the pc a bit to accept them. Therefore when one gets a BD F/N item, one asks "Is _______ your item?" If he says yes, indicate it to him by saying " _______ is your item." The meter should give a fall and the F/N will widen. If the pc says it is NOT his item, ask the question again and continue to list. The pc will put the item back on the list usually for it was his item. But he has to list further to realize it. He can also fail to put it back on the list and if so and he is getting restless in listing, give him the BD F/N item again and he'll buy it. A very big item that alters the pc's whole concept of things with big cogs and 2 wc is a good place to stop a session. 37R doesn't all have to be done in one session. When you begin a new list before the last item is discharged the pc can get a bit overwhelmed. This is a "nice" point, not a vital one. Also the big item will often cause the next assessment to be a bit hard as the pc's attention remains tied up in it for a while. If after 37R the pc's TA later goes up or down again out of normal 2.0 to 3.0 range the action to do is an L4B in general on 37R. It usually picks up the cognitions and confirms rather than corrects. L4B reads on wrong item. Auditor says which one. Pc gives it. Quite usually it's a right item pc hasn't cogged on. After the L4B, one can again run 37R. However, a better action is to Fly all ruds Continue with L9S. RUDS When Ruds are out during 37R a pc can feel strange. Of course with a high or low TA you can't get the ruds in. So you can do a list of 37R and as this will F/N the meter, you can get in all ruds. FLOWS The pc may have NO idea of flows. So before assessing the first time one must clear "flows". The pc must understand that these words self to another mean a flow from himself to any another, etc. If while clearing the word "flow" and "flows" you watch your meter also you will get your first blow up of the TA. 296 ASSESS SLOWLY By reading a flow and waiting a moment, you give the TA time to rise. You can assess too rapidly and find that the TA has gone up, but which of the last items did it go up on? By proceeding a little more slowly you will be sure. ADDITIONAL FLOW There is another flow. H. ANOTHER TO ANOTHER. This should be added to your assessment sheet. ASSESSMENT FORM An assessment form can be printed. The flows A to H (adding the new one above) are put in on the left-hand edge of the paper held the long way. They can be repeated A-H and A-H. Lines and boxes lead out for repeated assessments. This makes it easier for the auditor. STEPS 37R 1. Clear the word "flow". 2. Clear the idea of flow (watch meter) for each flow A to H so you have no misunderstoods. 3. Assess the listing sheet. Take the biggest Blow Up or speeded rise (if no big Blow Up). 4. Mark it on the assmt form and W/S. 5. Fit it into the Q on a separate listing sheet, What could _______ continue to do to _______ ? 6. Ask the Question of the pc. 7. Get the pc to give you items. 8. Write the items down while watching the meter. Mark needle reads or BDs. Put down TA reads regularly on the list. 9. Get the first item that Blows down (or up) and F/Ns. 10. Ask pc if _______ is his item. 11. If pc says Yes, say, " _______ is your item." Circle it on listing sheet and mark the F/N and "Ind" for Indicated to pc. If pc says No, continue to list. Pc will put item back on the list, at which time do 10 and 11 above. Pc will accept it. If he goes on and begins to protest, give him the first BD F/N item and do 11 and 12. He will accept it. 12. Mark item and TA and any 2 wc on the item or cogs on the W/S. DON'TS Don't do this process without (a) Checking out on C/S Series 37R, with Additions 1, 2 and this one, 3. 297 (b) Do 1 hrs confront and 1 hour reach and withdraw on your meter. (c) Dummy running the 12 steps above with no pc but all the paper and tools until it is a faultless action. (d) Don't call pc's attention to the meter with comments or stares or looks of horror or edginess or fumbles. (e) Have smooth, perfect TRs. (f) Follow the Auditor's Code. USING L9S If used in conjunction with L9S then L9S should also be drilled on dating and locating and dummy run. SESSION FORM These processes and rundowns are done in a streamlined session form. SPECIAL 37R The various flows of Auditor to pc can be run and indeed an assessment of many subjects or dynamics can be assessed by rise and then flow patterned as in Auditor-pc below. This Special 37R is mentioned here but will be laid out in full for other subjects in another issue. Pcs who have protest on auditing can be done in this way. The flows are Auditor to pc _______ Pc to Auditor _______ Auditors to pc _______ Pc to Auditors _______ Pc to Self _______ Auditor to Self _______ Aside from list change -- Auditor-pc is done like general 37R. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [HCO B 17 June 1971, L9S, referred to on first page of this issue, is a Flag Only issue and is not in these volumes.] 298  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=26/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=1 rDate=30/11/74 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Word Clearing Series 4R SUPERVISOR TWO-WAY COMM AND THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD   Remimeo Tech & Qual All Supervisors Super's Course Cramming Officers Word Clearers  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 26 JUNE 1971R Remimeo Issue II Tech & Qual REVISED 30 NOVEMBER 1974 All Supervisors (Revision in this type style) Super's Course Cramming Officers Word Clearers Word Clearing Series 4R SUPERVISOR TWO-WAY COMM AND THE MISUNDERSTOOD WORD (From LRH taped briefing to Lt. Bill Foster 14 June 71) Two-way comm where it has been described has been described for the use of an auditor, not a Supervisor of a Course. Supervisors not knowing this then run around itsa-ing students. They let the students itsa and they think they are going to get some place. It's the most incredible scene that you ever heard of and the boom could go bust only on this one point. I've got it narrowed down to this. Apparently no matter how many times the study tapes have been played, nobody has ever heard of them. I watched a recent course run to find out how deep they would let the students struggle -- how long it would stay bogged -- and it would have stayed bogged from here on out! And do you know what's out? It's the study data tapes -- just that -- and that's all that's out on a course. So when they say "2-way comm the students" you'll find the Supervisors instantly start to itsa them and are using auditor 2-way comm on these courses. It doesn't belong on these courses. I'll give you now the total dialogue of a Supervisor: The Supervisor shows interest. There can be a little bit of chatter, like -- "I see you've just completed. Great!" -- something like that, or he shows interest -- "How are you doing?" Student replies -- "Ah well, I'm doing all right." Supervisor -- "Now are there any words there in that, that you have misunderstood?" Student -- "No... no...." Supervisor -- "Well what is the word that you didn't quite understand?" Student -- "Ah well... ah... this one." Supervisor -- "Good. Now look that word up.... Now what's the word in the paragraph above that, where's that?... Alright let's look that up. Now use it in a sentence a couple of times and I'll be back in a minute." 299 He comes back, the student gives him the sentences for it and straightens it out and he sees the student's got it. That's the 2-way comm of a Supervisor. If a Supervisor does any other thing you've got a wrecked course. I've got the proof of it. The way you teach a TR Course is you give the student the bulletin and you have him read it. You don't check the guy out on the bulletin, he just reads it. When you come back you say, "Alright, have you read it?" "Yeah. I've read it." "What word don't you understand on it?" You will find things like HCO B and TR, and you get those cleared up, etc. I am having some roaring success stories from FEBC students who are through this. One had gone through the bulletin 10 times and had found words he didn't know all 10 times, and he was all of a sudden finding new things on the bulletin that he'd never heard of before. Another student had gone through it 20 times with the same result and they were doing fine and getting down to TRs and passing them. On a TR Course you give them the bulletin and let them read it and you find what word they didn't understand. That's the routine. Now that sounds so impossible -- and it's been on the study tapes for so long -- that you wouldn't believe that this thing is the key. Do you know there were students there for 15 or 20 days until we started doing this, then all of a sudden there was a breakthrough and their enthusiasm started coming up. They had been just going lose, lose, lose, out the bottom because Supervisors were letting them itsa. Maybe Supervisors thought they were auditors. They aren't. Neither are they supposed to give advice or tell students how -- or ask them if they blinked or anything else. The other thing they were doing was only emphasizing all the "can'ts". The students just went into despair. This was because the Supervisors were inviting all kinds of itsa and criticizing and so forth. You may say, "Gee! Everybody knows it's a misunderstood word." Yeah -- but they don't use it. Now I'll give you another one. I set up a test so that each student was brought up to the D of T who had a meter on his desk and he'd ask them if they had anything they misunderstood -- and see if they got a read on the meter. If it didn't clear up at once he'd send them back to get the definitions and look the thing up and of course use the word in a couple of sentences and then if it didn't 300 clear up he'd send them to the word clearer and really let them get worked over because it goes way back. They even found a student who had a misunderstood word clear back into his last life. There wasn't any other 2-way comm and no other interest and they just about blew the roof off with student stat points. This is the action of a Supervisor and that's ALL the action a Supervisor does -- and he can do that. The course has plenty of dictionaries and so on. But, the main point is, it is the misunderstood word. This has been proven again. On a TR practical course it's the misunderstood word and the misunderstood action. On other courses it's just misunderstood words and misunderstood words and misunderstood words, one right after the other. As fast as they clear this up -- up the student's production goes. It's painfully slow on some of them at first and I suppose the Supervisors have so many misunderstood words of their own that they just won't key into doing this action and that's what's wrecking courses. It's elementary, and it's the wildest discovery of all time but they don't use it. If it is used, your courses start running fast, your students start learning quickly and all starts going well. Other course outnesses like Supervisors not giving anybody a pack or no one to give checkouts are all Administrative outnesses. As far as actual Supervision is concerned it's this other line of handling misunderstood words. The second that line is in there are wins all over the place. The second that line is out there is no delivery. If auditors are goofing, then in their training they have not been made to look up the misunderstood word and a lot of itsa has gone on and people have evaluated for them. Then these auditors having made mistakes they never corrected with this tech, think they need something new to run on pcs, but they just wreck new tech too. We are shooting for a target, using just this misunderstood word tech, of a reduction of time by about a third on all major courses. Just using this misunderstood word tech. That's all. If some student is a totally slow student, you can get him back to the first bulletin or book he ever read and make him get every word in it he didn't understand, and it will go up in a chain. People on courses were being itsa'd to death. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.jh Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 301  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=27/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=2/12/74 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Word Clearing Series 5R SUPERVISOR TWO-WAY COMM EXPLAINED   Remimeo All Students Tech & Qual Course Supervisors Course Super Chksht Cramming Offs Word Clearers  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex Remimeo All Students HCO BULLETIN OF 27 JUNE 1971R Tech & Qual REVISED 2 DECEMBER 1974 Course Supervisors (Revision in this type style) Course Super Chksht Cramming Offs Word Clearers Word Clearing Series 5R SUPERVISOR TWO-WAY COMM EXPLAINED (From LRH Lecture Tape 16/6/71 Briefing to Aides Council) I don't think from the day they were spoken until now, anybody has understood or used "The Study Tapes". This is the only piece of Technology that you use on a course. There is no other teaching technology of any kind used on a course. The 2-way comm HCOBs are Auditor 2-way comm. The Supervisor has to know 2-way comm simply so that he can ask these burning questions: "How are you doing?" (Not with a lot of student itsa.) "Is there any word you haven't understood?" "Look it up." "Use it in a sentence a few times." That's the TOTALITY. That's all there is to teaching a course as far as the technology goes. It's contained in the few words which I have just given you and there's no other technology. That's all there is to teaching a course because that's all that's wrong with students. You can monitor it this way. You can watch a student's stats day to day. His stats are down today compared with yesterday's so you go over and talk to him. He says, "Yes. I had a hard night last night, up all night arguing with my wife," etc -- which could go on for hours. But the Supervisor says, "Now yesterday or today what word did you run across that you didn't understand?" The meter gives a LF. He says, "Yes! Well I didn't understand the word 'waffle-waffle'." The Supervisor says, "Well let's look it up and get it defined." The student says, "Well it wasn't that word, it was the word before that." 302 Supervisor, "Good -- let's get this looked up and used a couple of times in a sentence." The student does and he gets an F/N and it's all fine. His study stats go back up. That's all there is to it! There are two ways to fail to communicate the tech. One is not to read the HCO Bs and the other is not to use the misunderstood word tech. (Of course you can have no course and nobody there even trying.) The worst thing would be to pretend to have a course but have missing materials and Supervisors giving verbal advice or tech. That is deadly and will turn any Academy sour. Verbal tech comes about when course materials are not available to students and no or faulty Word Clearing is used. As long as the Administration of the course is in and all the course materials are available, the sole course Tech is this misunderstood word tech. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.jh Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 303  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=30/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=1/12/74 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  EXPANDED GF 40 RB  Type = 11 iDate=3/12/71 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 30 JUNE 1971R REVISED 1 DECEMBER 1974 Cancels HCO B 3 Dec 71, Handling Sheet Remimeo EXPANDED GF 40 RB This list is assessed Method 5 and fully handled. Must be done by an Auditor who has checked out on the Qual OK to Audit Checksheets, BPLs 14 Nov 74, Issues I-IV, and BPL 20 July 70R, Issue III, "Two-Way Comm Checksheet", and can make a prepared list read. Where R3R (and Recalls) is done it can be done Triple or Quad, depending on what is C/Sed for the pc. SECTION A A-1 DO YOU NOT WANT AUDITING? _______ (2wc and find out why not. It will be an out rud or an out list. Handle to F/N.) A-2 ARE YOU REFUSING AUDITING? _______ (2wc and find out why. Get pc to explain. Handle any out rud or out list to F/N.) A-3 ARE YOU PROTESTING AUDITING? _______ (2wc E/S to F/N.) A-4 DO YOU DISLIKE TALKING TO AN AUDITOR? _______ (If so run "Look at me. Who am I?" to F/N. Then "What could you say?" to F/N.) A-5 HAS NO ONE ASKED WHAT YOU REALLY WANT? _______ (E/S to F/N.) A-6 HAS THERE BEEN ANYTHING WRONG WITH F/Ns? _______ (Find the fault and handle with False TA HCO Bs. Rehab any overruns due to false TA.) A-7 HAS THERE BEEN ANYTHING WRONG WITH YOUR TONE ARM OR METER? _______ (Find the fault and handle with False TA HCO Bs. Rehab any overruns due to false TA.) SECTION B B-1 HAVE YOU BEEN AUDITED WITH RUDIMENTS OUT? _______ (Find out which. Handle E/S to F/N.) B-2 HAVE YOU BEEN AUDITED OVER AN ARC BREAK? _______ (2wc What was the ARC Brk? ARCU CDEINR E/S to F/N.) B-3 HAVE YOU BEEN AUDITED OVER A PTP? _______ (2wc What was the PTP? E/S to F/N.) B-4 HAVE YOU BEEN AUDITED OVER A W/H? _______ (What was the W/H? Who missed it? E/S to F/N.) B-5 HAVE YOU BEEN AUDITED OVER AN OVERT? _______ (What was the overt? E/S overt to F/N.) B-6 ARE YOU LYING TO PEOPLE? _______ (2wc E/S to F/N.) B-7 DO YOU HAVE SECRETS? _______ (2wc What Secrets? E/S to F/N.) 304 B-8 ARE YOU HERE FOR REASONS NOT DISCLOSED? _______ (If so, L&N "What was your original reason for coming here?" R3R Triple/Quad if an E. Purp.) (Pgm for Ex Dn.) B-9 DO YOU HAVE AN EVIL PURPOSE? _______ (L&N "What Evil Purpose do you have?" R3R Triple/Quad.) (Pgm for Ex Dn.) SECTION C C-1 ARE YOU CONTINUOUSLY COMMITTING OVERTS ON SCIENTOLOGY? _______ C-2 DO YOU KEEP ON GOOFING? _______ C-3 ARE YOU COMMITTING CONTINUOUS OVERTS IN LIFE? _______ Handling on each: (a) L&N "What are you trying to prevent?" R3R Triple/Quad preventing _______ (b) 2wc Committing continuous overts and pull them E/S to F/N. _______ SECTION B D-1 HAVE YOU NOT HAD AUDITING? _______ (a. L&N "Who or what would prevent auditing?" b. Triple/Quad Ruds & Overts on the item.) D-2 HAVE YOU BEEN SELF AUDITING? _______ (2wc E/S. Get when pc 1st started self auditing. Do L1C on prior upset.) D-3 HAVE YOU BEEN AUDITED IN AN EARLIER LIFE? _______ (2wc E/S to F/N.) SECTION E E-1 HAVE YOU BEEN OVERWHELMED BY AUDITING? _______ (R3R "When have you felt overwhelmed in auditing?" E/S to EP. "Have you ever overwhelmed another in auditing?" E/S to EP. "Have others ever overwhelmed others in auditing?" E/S to EP. F-0 if necessary.) (Repair Pgm.) E-2 HAVE YOU BEEN OVERWHELMED BY LIFE? _______ (R3R "When have you felt overwhelmed in life?" E/S to EP. "Have you overwhelmed another in life?" E/S to EP. "Have others overwhelmed others in life?" E/S to EP. F-0 if Quad.) (Repair Pgm.) E-3 HAVE YOU BEEN OVERWHELMED BY FAMILY CONNECTIONS? _______ (R3R "When have you felt overwhelmed by family connections?" E/S to EP. "When have you used family connections to overwhelm another?" E/S to EP. "When have others used family connections to overwhelm others?" E/S to EP. F-0 if Quad.) (Repair Pgm.) E-4 ARE YOU CONNECTED TO SOMEONE HOSTILE TO SCIENTOLOGY? _______ (PTS Interview.) E-5 ARE YOU RESTIMULATED IN YOUR CURRENT ENVIRONMENT? _______ (R3R Triple/Quad times he felt restimmed in his environment to EP.) (Repair Pgm.) E-6 ARE YOU ANTAGONISTIC TO WHAT YOU ARE DOING? _______ (3 S&Ds -- see below.) 305 E-7 HAVE YOU BEEN SUPPRESSED BY ANOTHER? _______ (3 S&Ds -- see below.) 3 S&Ds Assess: Withdraw From _______ Stop _______ Unmock _______ Suppress _______ Invalidate _______ Make Nothing Of _______ Suggest _______ Been Careful Of _______ Failed to Reveal _______ Take the 3 that read best. Use the one that read the most first. Test in these two questions: "Who or what has attempted to _______ you?" "Who or what have you tried to _______ ?" List the best reading question to BD F/N item. Use each of the 3 this way. SECTION F F-1 ARE YOU SEEKING THE SAME THRILL ATTAINED FROM DRUGS? _______ (2wc. E/S "Is there an earlier time you were seeking the same thrill attained from drugs?" to F/N.) (Drug RD or complete it.) F-2 HAVE YOU TAKEN DRUGS? _______ List each type taken and rehab each by counting number of times. L3RD on his Drug RD if he had one.) (Verify or do full Drug RD all steps.) F-3 DO YOU WANT TO CONTINUE TO TAKE DRUGS? _______ (List each type taken and rehab each by counting number of times. L3RD on his Drug RD if he had one.) (Verify or do full Drug RD all steps.) F-4 HAVE YOU NEVER TAKEN DRUGS? _______ (2wc "Is there an earlier time you never took drugs?" to F/N.) F-5 ARE YOU CURIOUS ABOUT DRUGS? _______ (2wc E/S "Is there an earlier time you were curious about drugs?" to F/N.) F-6 HAS MEDICINE ACTED AS DRUGS? _______ (List the type of medicines pc has taken. Rehab each by counting. L3RD on his Drug RD if he had one.) (Verify or do full Drug RD all steps.) F-7 HAVE YOU DRUNK ALCOHOL? _______ (List the types of alcohol pc had. Rehab each by counting. L3RD on his Drug RD if he had one.) (Verify or do full Drug RD all steps.) SECTION G G-1 HAVE YOU HAD A FORMER THERAPY BEFORE SCIENTOLOGY? _______ 3-Way or Quad Recall: (Each repetitive to F/N Cog VGIs.) F-1 "Recall another giving a former therapy to you." F-2 "Recall giving a former therapy to another." F-3 "Recall another giving a former therapy to another or others." F-0 "Recall giving a former therapy to yourself." 306 3-Way or Quad Engrams: (R3R each flow to F/N Cog VGIs and Erasure.) F-1 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another giving a former therapy to you." E/S "Is there an earlier incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another giving a former therapy to you?" F-2 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you giving a former therapy to another." E/S "Is there an earlier incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you giving a former therapy to another?" F-3 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another giving a former therapy to another or others." E/S "Is there an earlier incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another giving a former therapy to another or others?" F-0 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you giving a former therapy to yourself." E/S "Is there an earlier incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you giving a former therapy to yourself?" G-2 HAVE YOU HAD MEDICAL THERAPY? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in G-1 substituting "Medical Therapy".) G-3 HAVE YOU HAD PSYCHIATRIC THERAPY? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in G-1 substituting "Psychiatric Therapy".) G-4 HAVE YOU HAD PSYCHOLOGY THERAPY? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in G-1 substituting "Psychology Therapy".) G-5 HAVE YOU HAD DENTAL THERAPY? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in G-1 substituting "Dental Therapy".) G-6 HAVE YOU HAD ELECTRIC SHOCK? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams, followed by AESPs separately listed and R3Red.) SECTION H H-1 ARE YOU CURRENTLY DOING ANY BODY PRACTICES? _______ 3-Way or Quad Recall: (Each repetitive to F/N Cog VGIs.) F-1 "Recall another forcing body practices on you." F-2 "Recall you forcing body practices on another." F-3 "Recall another forcing body practices on another or others." F-0 "Recall forcing body practices on yourself." 3-Way or Quad Engrams: (R3R each flow to F/N Cog VGIs and Erasure.) F-1 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another forcing body practices on you." E/S "Is there an earlier incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another forcing body practices on you?" F-2 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you forcing body practices on another." E/S "Is there an earlier incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you forcing body practices on another?" F-3 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another forcing body practices on another or others." E/S "Is there an earlier incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another forcing body practices on another or others?" F-0 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you forcing body practices on yourself." E/S "Is there 307 an earlier incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you forcing body practices on yourself?" H-2 ARE YOU CURRENTLY DOING ANY EXERCISES? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Exercises".) H-3 ARE YOU CURRENTLY PRACTICING ANY RITES? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Rites".) H-4 ARE YOU CURRENTLY PRACTICING YOGA? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Yoga".) H-5 DO YOU HOLD ANY EASTERN BELIEFS? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Eastern Beliefs".) H-6 ARE YOU DOING ANY MENTAL EXERCISES? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Mental Exercises".) H-7 DO YOU CURRENTLY PRACTICE MEDITATION? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Meditation".) H-8 HAVE YOU TAKEN PART IN EARLIER PRACTICES BEFORE SCIENTOLOGY? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Earlier Practices Before Scientology".) H-9 HAVE YOU TAKEN PART IN EARLIER RELIGIONS? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Earlier Religions".) H-10 HAVE YOU TAKEN PART IN EARLIER RITES? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Earlier Rites".) H-11 HAVE YOU TAKEN PART IN EARLIER EXERCISES? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Earlier Exercises".) H-12 HAVE YOU TAKEN PART IN HYPNOTISM? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Hypnotism".) H-13 HAVE YOU HELD EARLIER BELIEFS? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Earlier Beliefs".) H-14 HAVE YOU TAKEN PART IN EARLIER INDOCTRINATIONS? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Earlier Indoctrinations".) H-15 HAVE YOU TAKEN PART IN EARLIER SCIENTIFIC PRACTICES? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Earlier Scientific Practices".) H-16 HAVE YOU TAKEN PART IN EARLIER ELECTRONIC PRACTICES? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Earlier Electronic Practices".) H-17 HAVE YOU TAKEN PART IN EARLIER THOUGHT PRACTICES? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Earlier Thought Practices".) H-18 HAVE YOU TAKEN PART IN EARLIER SPIRITUAL PRACTICES? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Earlier Spiritual Practices".) 308 H-19 HAVE YOU TAKEN PART IN EARLIER EASTERN RITES? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Earlier Eastern Rites".) H-20 HAVE YOU TAKEN PART IN EARLIER EASTERN PRACTICES? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Earlier Eastern Practices".) H-21 HAVE YOU TAKEN PART IN EARLIER IMPLANTING TECHNIQUES? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams as in H-1 substituting "Earlier Implanting Techniques".) H-22 HAVE YOU PRACTICED WITCHCRAFT? _______ 3-Way or Quad Recall: (Each repetitive to F/N Cog VGIs.) F-1 "Recall another practicing witchcraft on you." F-2 "Recall you practicing witchcraft on another." F-3 "Recall another practicing witchcraft on another or others." F-0 "Recall practicing witchcraft on yourself." 3-Way or Quad Engrams: (Each flow to F/N Cog VGIs and Erasure.) F-1 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another practicing witchcraft on you." E/S "Is there an earlier incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another practicing witchcraft on you?" F-2 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you practicing witchcraft on another." E/S "Is there an earlier incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you practicing witchcraft on another?" F-3 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another practicing witchcraft on another or others." E/S "Is there an earlier incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another practicing witchcraft on another or others?" F-0 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you practicing witchcraft on yourself." E/S "Is there an earlier incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you practicing witchcraft on yourself?" H-23 HAVE YOU CAST SPELLS? _______ 3-Way or Quad Recall: (Each repetitive to F/N Cog VGIs.) F-1 "Recall a time a spell was used on you." F-2 "Recall a time you used a spell on another." F-3 "Recall a time another used spells on another or others." F-0 "Recall a time you used spells on yourself." 3-Way or Quad Engrams: (Each flow to F/N Cog VGIs and Erasure.) F-1 "Locate an incident of pain and unconsciousness when a spell was used on you." E/S "Is there an earlier incident of pain and unconsciousness when a spell was used on you?" F-2 "Locate an incident of pain and unconsciousness when you used a spell on another." E/S "Is there an earlier incident of pain and unconsciousness when you used a spell on another?" F-3 "Locate an incident of pain and unconsciousness when another used spells on another or others." E/S "Is there an earlier incident of pain and unconsciousness when another used spells on another or others?" F-0 "Locate an incident of pain and unconsciousness when you used spells on yourself." E/S "Is there an earlier incident of pain and unconsciousness when you used spells on yourself?" 309 H-24 ARE YOU DOING SOME EXERCISE BETWEEN SESSIONS? _______ (Handle as in H-2 with 3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams.) SECTION I I-1 DO YOU HAVE AN ENGRAM EXACTLY MATCHING PT DANGERS? _______ 3-Way Engrams: (R3R each to F/N Cog VGIs and Erasure.) F-1 Ack what the pc says then continue with the R3R commands 2-9, etc. E/S "Is there an earlier similar engram?" F-2 "Locate a time when you gave another such an engram." E/S "Is there an earlier time you gave another such an engram?" F-3 "Locate a time when another gave another or others such an engram." E/S "Is there an earlier time another gave another or others such an engram?" F-0 "Locate a time when you gave yourself such an engram." E/S "Is there an earlier time you gave yourself such an engram?" SECTION J J-1 ARE YOU SERIOUSLY PHYSICALLY ILL? _______ (2wc Find out what the illness or symptoms are: BTB 28 May 74R, "FULL ASSIST CHECKLISTS FOR INJURIES AND ILLNESSES".) J-2 IS YOUR BODY ILL? _______ (2wc "What seems to be wrong with your body?" to F/N.) (BTB 28 May 74R, "FULL ASSIST CHECKLISTS FOR INJURIES AND ILLNESSES".) J-3 ARE YOU MENTALLY ILL? _______ (2wc E/S "Is there an E/S time you were mentally ill?" to F/N. Handle as a W/H.) (R3R Narrative and AESPs R3R.) J-4 DO YOU HAVE ANY BROKEN BONES? _______ (2wc E/S "Is there an E/S time you had broken bones?" to F/N.) (Medical Treatment. BTB 28 May 74R, "FULL ASSIST CHECKLISTS FOR INJURIES AND ILLNESSES".) J-5 DO YOU HAVE ANY INFECTIOUS DISEASES? _______ (2wc Get the Data on what it is. E/S "Is there an E/S time you had an infectious disease?" to F/N.) (Medical Treatment. BTB 28 May 74R, "FULL ASSIST CHECKLISTS FOR INJURIES AND ILLNESSES".) J-6 DO YOU HAVE ANY HIDDEN ILLNESSES? _______ (2wc E/S "Is there an E/S time you had a hidden illness?" to F/N.) (BTB 28 May 74R, "FULL ASSIST CHECKLISTS FOR INJURIES AND ILLNESSES".) J-7 DO YOU HAVE ANY TOOTH DECAY? _______ (2wc E/S "Is there an E/S time you had tooth decay?" to F/N.) (Dental Treatment. BTB 28 May 74R, "FULL ASSIST CHECKLISTS FOR INJURIES AND ILLNESSES".) J-8 DO YOU HAVE ANY PHYSICALLY DAMAGED PARTS? _______ (2wc to find out what. BTB 28 May 74R, "FULL ASSIST CHECKLISTS FOR INJURIES AND ILLNESSES".) J-9 DO YOU HAVE ANY BODY PARTS MISSING? _______ (2wc to find out what. BTB 28 May 74R, "FULL ASSIST CHECKLISTS FOR INJURIES AND ILLNESSES".) J-10 HAVE YOU HAD ANY BODY PARTS REMOVED? _______ (2wc to find out what. BTB 28 May 74R, "FULL ASSIST CHECKLISTS FOR INJURIES AND ILLNESSES".) 310 SECTION K K-1 ARE YOU OUT OF VALENCE? _______ LX Lists 3, 2, 1. Ref: HCO B 2 Aug 69, " 'LX' Lists", HCO B 5 Nov 69, "LX3", HCO B 3 Aug 69, "LX2", HCO B 9 Aug 69, "LX1", BTB 26 Nov 71, Issue III, Corrected 30 Dec 71, "Out of Valence -- 220H". Triple or Quad. If no valence change on the above do std Class VIII 220H as follows: 3-Way or Quad Recall: (Each repetitive to F/N Cog VGIs.) F-1 "Recall another causing you to be someone else." F-2 "Recall you causing another to be someone else." F-3 "Recall another causing another or others to be someone else." F-0 "Recall causing yourself to be someone else." 3-Way or Quad Engrams: (R3R each flow to F/N Cog VGIs and Erasure.) F-1 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another causing you to be someone else." E/S "Is there an earlier similar incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another causing you to be someone else?" F-2 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you causing another to be someone else." E/S "Is there an earlier similar incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you causing another to be someone else?" F-3 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another causing another or others to be someone else." E/S "Is there an earlier similar incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another causing another or others to be someone else?" F-0 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you causing yourself to be someone else." E/S "Is there an earlier similar incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you causing yourself to be someone else?" K-2 ARE YOU BEING SOMEONE ELSE? _______ (Handle as in K-1 above. LX3, 2 & 1 and 220H if necessary.) SECTION L L-1 ARE YOU PRETENDING? _______ 3-Way or Quad Recall: (Each repetitive to F/N Cog VGIs.) F-1 "Recall another pretending to you." F-2 "Recall you pretending to another." F-3 "Recall another pretending to another or others." F-0 "Recall pretending to yourself." 3-Way or Quad Engrams: (R3R each flow to F/N Cog VGIs and Erasure.) F-1 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another pretending to you." E/S "Is there an earlier incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another pretending to you?" F-2 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you pretending to another." E/S "Is there an earlier incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you pretending to another?" F-3 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another pretending to another or others." E/S "Is there an earlier incident containing pain and unconsciousness of another pretending to another or others?" F-0 "Locate an incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you pretending to yourself." E/S "Is there an earlier incident containing pain and unconsciousness of you pretending to yourself?" 311 L-2 ARE YOU PRETENDING TRAINING NOT ATTAINED? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams of Pretending.) L-3 ARE YOU PRETENDING ATTAINMENTS IN LIFE NOT REALLY ATTAINED? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams of Pretending.) L-4 ARE YOU PRETENDING GRADES NOT ATTAINED? _______ (3-Way or Quad Recall/3-Way or Quad Engrams of Pretending.) SECTION M M-1 HAVE YOU BEEN AUDITED WITH PRIOR GRADES OUT? _______ (2wc Find what grades pc feels are out. Indicate it. E/S "Is there an earlier time you were audited over that/those out grade(s)?" to F/N.) M-2 IS YOUR DIANETICS INCOMPLETE? _______ (2wc E/S to F/N.) M-3 DO ENGRAMS FAIL TO ERASE? _______ (L3RD Rundown.) (R-Factor: "We are looking for engrams contacted in early auditing and not fully handled." Assess L3RD Method Five with the preface "In your early Dianetics _______ ?" and handle with R3R over and over until it F/Ns.) M-4 IS YOUR COMMUNICATION GRADE OUT? _______ (2wc E/S to F/N.) (Pgm for Exp Gr 0.) M-5 IS YOUR PROBLEMS GRADE OUT? _______ (2wc E/S to F/N.) (Pgm for Exp Gr I.) M-6 IS YOUR O/W GRADE OUT? _______ (2wc E/S to F/N.) (Pgm for Exp Gr II.) M-7 DO YOU HAVE PERSISTING ARC BREAKS? _______ (2wc E/S to F/N.) (Pgm for Exp Gr III.) M-8 ARE YOU ANXIOUS ABOUT CHANGE? _______ (2wc E/S "Is there an E/S time you were anxious about change?" to F/N.) (Pgm for Exp Gr III.) M-9 DO YOU HAVE SERVICE FACSIMILES? _______ (E/S to F/N.) (Pgm for Exp Gr IV.) M-10 DO YOU HAVE FIXED IDEAS? _______ (2wc E/S to F/N.) (Pgm for Exp Gr IV.) M-11 ARE YOU CONCERNED ABOUT BEING RIGHT OR WRONG? _______ (2wc E/S "Is there an E/S time you were concerned about being right or wrong?" to F/N.) (Pgm for Exp Gr IV.) M-12 HAVE YOU FAILED TO ATTAIN OTHER GRADES? _______ (2wc E/S to F/N.) (Note for C/S.) M-13 HAVE WINS ON GRADES BEEN BY-PASSED? _______ (Rehab each to F/N.) L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 312  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=30/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Word Clearing Series 8 STANDARD C/S FOR WORD CLEARING   Remimeo Tech & Qual Secs C/Ses Auditors Word Clearers Only  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 30 JUNE 1971 (CANCELLED -- see HCO B 30 Jun 71R II Volume VIII -- 131) Issue II Remimeo Tech & Qual Secs C/Ses Auditors Word Clearers Word Clearing Series 8 Only STANDARD C/S FOR WORD CLEARING 1. Fly a rud if no F/N. 2. ASSESS Religion _______ Ministers _______ Church _______ Rituals _______ Rites _______ College _______ Schools _______ Sacrifices _______ Surgery _______ Electronics _______ Physics _______ Technical Subjects _______ Dianetics _______ Scientology _______ Theology _______ Theosophy _______ Law _______ Organization _______ Written Materials _______ Text Books _______ Practice _______ Science _______ 313 The Humanities _______ The Mind _______ The Spirit _______ Bodies _______ Sex _______ The Insane _______ Psychiatry _______ Psycho-analysis _______ Psychology _______ 3. Take each reading item from the best read on down and with E/S pull each one to F/N. "In the subject of _______ what word has been misunderstood?" He may look them up, so have a good dictionary handy. It isn't an earlier time he misunderstood that word. It's an earlier word in that subject and it can be an earlier subject. Considerations about it and other questions are not touched. Overts, W/Hs, etc are neglected. Just do the process and it will eventually F/N on each chain. A persistent F/N should be attained as the EP. (From a Flag C/S 24/6/71) LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder 314  (From a Flag C/S 24/6/71) L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=2/7/71 Volnum=0 Issue=3 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Word Clearing Series 13 WORD CLEARING CLARIFICATION   Remimeo Tech and Qual Students Course Supervisors Supervisor's Course Cramming Off Word Clearers  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 2 JULY 1971 Remimeo Issue III Tech and Qual Students Course Supervisors Supervisor's Course Cramming Off Word Clearing Series 13 Word Clearers WORD CLEARING CLARIFICATION Reference HCO B 24 June 71, "Word Clearing" Method No. 1 Word Clearing has yet to foul up any other auditing. When Method No. 2 is done it is far more likely to foul up auditing. Persons just reporting to courses are the first candidates for Word Clearing. Qual usually gets itself across numerous lines when it begins to Word Clear. I don't know why it should. The most fantastic figure-figure occurs around this action. It is wholly unlimited. If No. 1 Method is done on Monday, it can be done again, same actions, same list assessed, same items left on the list, on Tuesday -- and Weds and Thurs! It can even be done with no folder to hand. The only change would be to add some subjects if one wishes. But even that isn't vital. A pc has spoken millions of languages. The EP is not "He was word cleared once". It would be a persistent F/N on the whole list. Who knows what the word clearing will lay bare in other languages or when one will attain the EP forever. But there are too many strings being put into it like needing a folder, using tech pages, etc, etc. The action is in V. Well, why is Div IV getting in on it unless Div V is pulling it in? You frankly have no idea what it takes to get tech really applied. The simplicity of hats, lines and tech actions gets overlaid with complexities. Probably misunderstoods attract complexities. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:sb.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 315  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=3/7/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  AUDITING BY LISTS REVISED AUDITING BY LISTS   SCIENTOLOGY III Remimeo Franchise All Auditors Level III Checksheets  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 3 JULY 1971 Remimeo Franchise All Auditors Level III Checksheets Replaces HCO Bs 22 May 65 and 23 Apr 64, and cancels HCO B 27 July 65 all on the same subject. SCIENTOLOGY III AUDITING BY LISTS REVISED (Note: We now F/N everything. We do NOT tell the pc what the meter is doing. This changes "Auditing By Lists" in both respects. We do not say to the pc, "That's clean" or "That reads".) AUDITING BY LISTS (Reference: HCO B 14 Mar 71, "F/N Everything") Use any authorized, published LIST. (Green Form for general review, L1C for ARC Brks, L4B for listed items list errors.) METHOD 3 Use meter at a sensitivity so meter needle is loose but it is easy to keep needle at "Set". If sensitivity is too high the needle will be in constant motion as one tries to set the TA. If too low, the instant read will not be visible. 5 is usual for upper grade cases. 16 is usual for lower grade or Dianetic cases. Have your meter in a position (line of sight) so you can see the list and the needle or you can see the needle and the pc. The meter position is important. Hold the mimeoed list close beside the meter. Have your worksheet more to the right. Keep record on your worksheet. Mark the pc's name and date on it. Mark what list it is on the W/S with Time. It remains in the folder stapled to the W/S. Read the question on the list, note if it reads. Do NOT read it while looking at the pc, do NOT read it to yourself and then say it while looking at the pc. These are the L10 actions and are called Method 6, not Method 3. It is more important to see the pc's cans than his face as can fiddle can fake or upset reads. TR 1 must be good so the pc clearly hears it. You are looking for an INSTANT READ that occurs at the end of the exact last syllable of the question. If it does not read, mark the list X. If the list is being done through an F/N and the F/N just continues, mark the Question F/N. If the question reads, do not say "That reads". Mark the read at once (tick, SF, F, LF, LFBD, R/S), transfer the number of the Q to the W/S and look expectantly at the pc. You can repeat the Q by just saying it again if pc doesn't begin to talk. He has probably already begun to answer as the Q was live in his bank as noted by the meter. 316 Take down the pc's remarks in shortened form on the W/S. Note any TA changes on the W/S. If the pc's answer results in an F/N (Cog VGIs sometimes follow, GIs always accompany a real F/N), mark it rapidly on the W/S and say, "Thank you. I would like to indicate your needle is floating." Do NOT wait endlessly for the pc to say more. If you do he will go into doubt and find more, also do NOT chop what he is saying. Both are TR errors that are very bad. If there is no F/N, at the first pause that looks like the pc thinks he has said it, ask for an Earlier Similar _______ whatever the question concerned. Do NOT change the Q. Do NOT fail to repeat what the Question is. "Was there an Earlier Similar Restimulation of 'rejected affinity'?" This is the "E/S" part of it. You do not leave such a Question merely "clean". It does not matter now if you look at the pc when you say it or not. But you can look at the pc when you say it. The pc will answer. If he comes to a "looks like he thinks he said it" and no F/N, you ask the same Q as above. You ask this Q "Was there an earlier similar _______ " until you finally get an F/N and GIs. You indicate the F/N. That is the last of that particular question. You mark "F/N" on the list and call the next question on the list. You call this and other questions without looking at the pc. Those that do not read, you X as out. The next question that reads, you mark it on the list, transfer the question number to the W/S. Take the pc's answer. Follow the above E/S procedure as needed until you get an F/N and GIs for the question. Ack. Indicate and return to the mimeoed list. You keep this up until you have done the whole list in this fashion. If you got no read on the list Question but the pc volunteers some answer to an unreading question, do NOT take it up. Just ack and carry on with your mimeoed list. BELIEVE YOUR METER. Do not take up things that don't read. Don't get "hunches". Don't let the pc run his own case by answering non-reading items and then the auditor taking them up. Also don't let a pc "fiddle the cans" to get a false read or to obscure a real one. (Very rare but these two actions have happened.) BIG WIN If half way down a prepared list (the last part not yet done) the pc on some question gets a wide F/N, big Cog, VGIs, the auditor is justified in calling the list complete and going to the next C/S action or ending the session. There are two reasons for this -- one, the F/N will usually just persist and can't be read through and further action will tend to invalidate the win. The auditor can also carry on to the end of the prepared list if he thinks there may be something else on it. 317 GF AND METHOD 3 When a GF is taken up Method 3 (item by item, one at a time and F/Ned) it can occur that the TA will go suddenly high. The pc feels he is being repaired, that the clearing up of the first item on the GF handled it and protests. It is the protest that sends the TA up. This is not true of any other list. Thus a GF is best done by Method 5 (once through for reads, then the reads handled). L1C and L4B, L7 and other such lists are best done by Method 3. The above steps and actions are exactly how you do Auditing by List today. Any earlier data contrary to this is cancelled. Only 2 points change -- we F/N everything that reads by E/S or a process to handle (L3B requires processes, not E/S to get an F/N) and we never tell the pc that it read or didn't read, thus putting his attention on the meter. We still indicate F/Ns to the pc as a form of completion. L1C and Method 3 are NOT used on high or very low TAs to get them down or up. The purpose of these lists is to clean up by-passed charge. An auditor also indicates when he has finished with the list. An auditor should dummy drill this action both on a doll and bullbait. The action is very successful when precisely done. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 318  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=4/7/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 48 DRUG HANDLING   IMPORTANT URGENT Remimeo Dianetics Checksheet All Dn Auditors All C/Ses  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 4 JULY 1971 (REVISED -- see HCO B 15 July 71 III Volume VII -- 327) Remimeo Dianetics Checksheet All Dn Auditors IMPORTANT All C/Ses URGENT C/S Series 48 DRUG HANDLING See: HCO B 28 Aug. 68 Drugs Issue II HCO B 29 Aug. 68 Drug Data HCO B 23 Sept. 68 Drugs & Trippers Refer: HCO B 19 May 69 Drug and Alcohol Cases Prior Assessing HCO B 12 Aug. 69 (HCO B 10 Dec. 68 Updated) Confidential -- Case Supervisor Actions (Page 24 Resistive Case 220D) A person who has been on Drugs is one of the "seven types of resistive cases". (These types are found on the Scientology Green Form No. 40.) In other words, someone who has been on drugs does not make good case gain until the drugs are handled. The same somatics will come back again. The case roller-coasters -- goes up and down. Drugs since 1962 have been in very widespread use. Before then they were rare. A worldwide spread of drugs occurred. A large percentage of people became and are drug takers. By drugs (to mention a few) are meant -- tranquilizers, opium, cocaine, marijuana, peyote, amphetamine and the psychiatrist's gift to Man, LSD, which is the worst. Any medical drugs are included. Drugs are drugs. There are thousands of trade names and slang terms for these drugs. ALCOHOL is included as a drug and receives the same treatment in auditing. They are supposed to do wonderful things but all they really do is ruin the person. Even someone off drugs for years still has "blank periods". The abilities to concentrate or to balance are injured. The moral part of it has nothing to do with auditing. The facts are that: (a) People who have been on drugs can be a liability until the condition is handled in auditing. (b) A former drug user is a resistive case that does not make stable gains until the condition is handled. (c) Auditing is the only successful means ever developed for handling drug damage. THOSE ON DRUGS On persons who are currently on drugs, it is necessary to take them through a special TR Course while they are still on them. They gradually come off of them voluntarily in most cases without painful "withdrawal symptoms" (which is the term for the agony and convulsions caused, particularly in the case of heroin takers, by just stopping the drug. Alcoholics are of course included.) 319 DRUG ENGRAMS People who have been on drugs are sometimes afraid of running engrams. In fact, it is almost a way to detect a "druggie". The drugs, particularly LSD and even sometimes antibiotics or other medicines to which the person has an allergy, can turn on whole track pictures violently. These tend to overwhelm the person and make him feel crazy. Some of these people are afraid to confront the bank again. The TR and other steps of the special TR Course improve their confront. If a person "doesn't like Dianetics" and doesn't want to be run on engrams, it is necessary to put them on the special course. If Dianetics has been run but poorly, it should of course be repaired fully with an L3B (List used to correct Dianetic errors). But if the person still flinches, the special course successfully completed will handle. It contains recall steps giving the pc a chance to confront the bank more easily and get used to it. FULL AUDITING RUNDOWN A full auditing rundown on drugs, all done on the same pc, would be: 1. Special TR Course for ex-drug users or alcoholics. 2. Pc Assessment Form. 3. Class VIII Drug Rundown Quad (done by a Class IV or VI). 4. By a Dianetic Auditor: Pains, emotions, sensations, attitudes connected with drugs (or alcohol), R3R Quad. 5. Prior Assessment to Drugs, Quad R3R, Dianetic Auditor. This can be followed by routine Quad Dianetics to EP for the grade. DONE FIRST Drugs are done first. They are NOT done after the Health Form and regular Dianetics. Why? Because Drugs make a resistive case! Regular Dianetics will get loses. Any current Dianetic case failures are from flubby Dianetic auditing or the person has been on Drugs or alcohol which were not handled by Dianetics. It hasn't harmed anyone to omit drugs. But it made it hard or impossible to get stable case gain. THUS ANY DIANETIC PC WHO HAS HAD DRUG HANDLING OMITTED MUST BE RUN ON DRUGS AS SOON AS POSSIBLE BEFORE MORE AUDITING IS GIVEN. I repeat, drugs or alcohol in most instances make a resistive case so the point must be handled before the case will attain and hold case gain. ANY PC WHO IS NOT MAKING IT IN AUDITING SHOULD BE CHECKED FOR A DRUG OR ALCOHOL HISTORY. DISCOVERY In investigating a series of cases who were not making it, I found in each one that the person had been on drugs or alcohol and that drugs or the alcohol had not been run out. 320 Drug data was not covered fully enough in the Dianetics pack. Only Prior Assessment to Drugs was given. Thus I find several Dianetic pcs were only run on the Prior Assessment to Drugs. This is not good enough. DIANETICS ONLY Where Dianetic auditing only is available and the rest of the rundown given above is not, drugs can still be handled by a Dianetic Auditor in this way with this Dianetic Pgm. 1. Pc Assessment Form. 2. Full C/S 1, also doing the TRs well with the pc. 3. Write down the drugs from the Pc Assessment Form. Take the one that reads best on the meter. 4. List, what pains, emotions, sensations or attitudes are connected with taking (the drug). 5. Take the best reading Dianetic item from the list in 4. Run R3R Quad. 6. Complete items on 4 above with R3R Quad. 7. Take another drug from 3 above that reads. 8. Repeat 4. 9. Repeat 5. 10. Use up the whole list in 4 above in this way until the entire list of drugs F/Ns when called. 11. Do Prior Assessment to Drugs (or alcohol). R3R Quad. 12. Quad R3R on any missing flows of earlier Dn items run. 13. Do Health Form. 14. Proceed with routine Quad Dianetics. This program is the one that would be done at step 4 in the full Drug Pgm above that includes the TR Course and Class VIII Rundown. However, when only Dianetic Auditors are available, at least the above Dianetic Program must be done. This repairs an omission in the Dianetic pack and unblocks the case gain of a great many pcs on whom a drug or alcohol history was never noticed or handled. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 321  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=5/7/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=8/6/74 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 49R ASSISTS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 5 JULY 1971R Revised & Reissued 8 June 1974 (Only changes the 2nd last & 4th last paras.) Remimeo C/S Series 49R ASSISTS There are three types of assists. They are: 1. Contact Assist 2. Touch Assist 3. Dianetic Assist. They are quite different from each other. They are VERY effective when properly done. A severe injury or illness case can be run on all three and SHOULD BE. If the handling is very soon after injury, burns do not blister, breaks heal in days, bruises vanish. But to obtain such results it is necessary that the C/S and auditor or auditor alone know and RESPECT the assist tech. It is too often a toss-off, only one kind being done and then not to EP. Every assist must end with an F/N (at Examiner or checked on a meter). CONTACT ASSIST Done off meter at the physical Mest Universe location of the injury. EP -- Pain Gone. Cog. F/N. See HCO B 9 Oct 67, Assists for Injuries. [See BTB 18 Feb 74, same title.] DIANETIC ASSIST Done in session on the meter. EP Pain Gone. Cog. F/N. See HCO Bs 12 Mar 69 Issue II, Physically Ill Pcs and Pre OTs 24 Apr 69 Dianetic Use 14 May 69 Sickness 20 May 69 Issue II, Dianetics (Dn Auditing Assists) [see BTB 10 Dec 74, VI] 23 May 69 Narrative Versus Somatic Chains 24 July 69 Seriously Ill Pcs 27 July 69 Antibiotics 15 Jan 70 The Uses of Auditing 21 June 70 C/S Series 9, Superficial Actions (Sick Pcs) 1 Dec 70 Dianetics -- Triple Flow Action [now BTB 1 Dec 70R, same title] 5 Jan 71 Going Earlier in R3R ((D Auditing Assist) [see BTB 10 Dec 74] 8 Mar 71 C/S Series 29, Case Actions, Off Line 1 Mar 71 Assists -- A Flag Expertise Subject [see page 335] 322 TOUCH ASSIST Done off the meter by an auditor on the pc's body. EP Pain Gone. Cog. F/N. See HCO Bs 9 Oct 67 Assists for Injuries [see BTB 18 Feb 74, same title] 5 May 69 Issue I, Touch Assists [cancelled, see Volume IX, page 502] 22 July 70 Touch Assist -- An Improvement on Spinal Adjustment [now BTB] 23 Aug 70 The Body Communication Process [cancelled by BTB 10 Dec 74] 15 Mar 71 Assists -- A Flag Expertise Subject [see page 335] UNCONSCIOUS PC An unconscious pc can be audited off a meter by taking his hand and having him touch nearby things like pillow, floor, etc or body without hurting an injured part. A person in a coma for months can be brought around by doing this daily. One tells them a hand signal like, "Press my hand twice for 'Yes', once for 'No'," and can get through to them, asking questions and getting "Yes" and "No" hand responses. They usually respond with this, if faintly, even while unconscious. When one has the person conscious again one can do the assists. FIRST AID RULES APPLY TO INJURED PERSONS. IN MAKING THEM TOUCH SOMETHING THAT WAS MOVING, STOP IT FIRST. IN MAKING THEM TOUCH THINGS THAT WERE HOT, COOL THEM FIRST. WHEN POSSIBLE MAKE THEM HOLD THE THINGS THEY WERE HOLDING, IF ANY, WHILE DOING A CONTACT ASSIST. IF AFTER A TOUCH OR CONTACT ASSIST THEY DON'T F/N WHEN TAKEN TO OR GIVEN AN EXAM, CHECK FOR O/R AND IF NO F/N TAKE THEM AWAY AND COMPLETE THE ASSIST. DIANETIC ASSISTS CAN BE RUN TRIPLE. This is important tech. It saves pain and lives. Know it and use it. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [The second last paragraph originally read, "DIANETIC ASSISTS CAN BE RUN TRIPLE OR QUAD." The change in the fourth last paragraph simply corrected a typographical error.] 323  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=15/7/71 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=1 rDate=6/6/74 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 28R, 32R, 33R, 36R, 49R QUADS CANCELLED   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 15 JULY 1971R Issue I (CANCELLED -- see HCO B 12 Jan 75 Volume VIII -- 373) REVISED 6 JUNE 1974 Remimeo C/S Series 28R, 32R, 33R, 36R, 49R (This HCO B Revises HCO B 5 Mar 71, Issue II, Revises HCO B 7 Mar 71, C/S Series 28, Revises HCO B 8 Mar 71, Issue II, Revises HCO B 4 April 71, C/S Series 32, and Revises HCO B 5 April 71, C/S Series 33, and Revises HCO B 21 April 71, C/S Series 36. Changes HCO B 4 July 71, C/S Series 48, from Quad to Triple on all Drug Handling. Changes HCO B 5 July 71, C/S Series 49, "Assists".) QUADS CANCELLED The disadvantages of Quad Dianetics outweigh any advantages in actual practice. Flow Zero is therefore cancelled as part of Dianetics and lower grades. This flow is self to self. It remains in use only in C/S Series 37R where it is one of the 7 basic flows. What happens when you use Flow Zero as an addition to Flow 1 (another to self), Flow 2 (self to another), and Flow 3 (others to others) is that the pc now and then runs the same chain twice, usually two F1s rather than an F1 and F0. In the Interiorization Rundown, when Flow Zero is run one is running a lie. A static cannot go into itself. It can only appear to go into itself by calling other things "self". Further, in the Int RD some pcs get into an implant chain when they try to run F0 and the TA goes up. In getting in the fourth flow by rerun of singles and triples (was called Quading for Quadruple or 4) a pc is sometimes made to run a chain twice and this will send the TA up. Therefore, so as to simplify matters, do not run Flow Zero self to self on any rundown except 37R. REPAIR The majority of cases benefited from Quads. Those that did not can easily be repaired by the use of L3B, the Dianetic correction list. In repairing an Interiorization Rundown it will almost always be found that the Int RD was overrun in the first place. Int RDs often go flat on Secondary F2 or even Recall steps. Continuing to run all secondaries and engrams and Flow Zero after the rundown flattened, for example on F1 Engrams, is to overrun the Interiorization Rundown. In making a repair of Int this is easily checked by asking if the Int RD was overrun. 324 If this is found to be the case, one then dates the Int RD exactly. If it was overrun it will quickly F/N. If it does not F/N, then it was never completed. If it does F/N on the date, also have the pc point to where it was done (location) and it will F/N again. If this doesn't work, one uses L3B on the Int RD. Repairing any jam-up in Quads is done by the use of L3B. To L3B one should add "Wrong flow?" when repairing Quad. CANCELLATION It was no overt to run Quad and has not ruined any cases. But it is not easy to handle and can jam up and require repair. Thus its advantages are not great enough to continue it in use. The same auditing time spent on other things will give more gain. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.sb.ntm.ts Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [The original 15 July 1971 issue of this HCO B had the same text, but cancelled C/S Series 28, 32, 33 and 36. In this 6 June 1974 revision these cancellations have been changed to revisions. This HCO B was cancelled by HCO B 12 January 1975, Quads Reinstated, Volume VIII -- 373.] 325  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=15/7/71 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 50 C/S CASE GAIN   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 15 JULY 1971 Issue II Remimeo C/S Series 50 C/S CASE GAIN Some C/Ses get audited over the present time problem "How to get case gain." Working with pcs who sometimes don't can become a minor PTP. This is also true of some auditors. The way to C/S this is to run it triple PTP, but in this sequence: THE C/S 1. 2WC Have you ever had a problem in getting case gain for another? E/S to F/N. 2. 2WC What solutions have you had in getting case gain for another? E/S to F/N. 3. 2WC Have others ever had a problem getting case gain for others? E/S to F/N. 4. 2WC What solutions have others had getting case gain for others? E/S to F/N. 5. 2WC Have you ever had a problem getting case gain for yourself? E/S to F/N. 6. 2WC What solutions have you had getting case gain for yourself E/S to F/N. Once handled it ceases to be a problem when one does it in the future. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 326  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=15/7/71 Volnum=0 Issue=3 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 48R DRUG HANDLING   IMPORTANT URGENT Remimeo Dianetics Checksheet All Dn Auditors All C/Ses  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 15 JULY 1971 Issue III Remimeo Dianetics Checksheet All Dn Auditors All C/Ses IMPORTANT URGENT C/S Series 48R DRUG HANDLING See: HCO B 28 Aug 68, Issue II, "Drugs" HCO B 29 Aug 68, "Drug Data" HCO B 23 Sept 68, "Drugs & Trippers" Refer: HCO B 19 May 69, "Drug and Alcohol Cases PRIOR Assessing" HCO B 12 Aug 69 (HCO B 10 Dec 68 Updated), Confidential -- "Case Supervisor Actions" (Page 24 Resistive Case 220D.) [Now BTB] (In this revision of HCO B 4 July 71, C/S Series 48, Quad [4] Flow has been changed to Triple Flow. There is no other change.) A person who has been on Drugs is one of the "Seven types of resistive cases". (These types are found on the Scientology Green Form No. 40.) In other words, someone who has been on drugs does not make good case gain until the drugs are handled. The same somatics will come back again. The case roller-coasters -- goes up and down. Drugs since 1962 have been in very widespread use. Before then they were rare. A worldwide spread of drugs occurred. A large percentage of people became and are drug takers. By drugs (to mention a few) are meant -- tranquilizers, opium, cocaine, marijuana, peyote, amphetamine and the psychiatrist's gift to Man, LSD, which is the worst. Any medical drugs are included. Drugs are drugs. There are thousands of trade names and slang terms for these drugs. ALCOHOL is included as a drug and receives the same treatment in auditing. They are supposed to do wonderful things but all they really do is ruin the person. Even someone off drugs for years still has "blank periods". The abilities to concentrate or to balance are injured. The moral part of it has nothing to do with auditing. The facts are that: (a) People who have been on drugs can be a liability until the condition is handled in auditing. (b) A former drug user is a resistive case that does not make stable gains until the condition is handled. (c) Auditing is the only successful means ever developed for handling drug damage. 327 THOSE ON DRUGS On persons who are currently on drugs, it is necessary to take them through a special TR Course while they are still on them. They gradually come off of them voluntarily in most cases without painful "withdrawal symptoms" (which is the term for the agony and convulsions caused, particularly in the case of heroin takers, by just stopping the drug. Alcoholics are of course included.) DRUG ENGRAMS People who have been on drugs are sometimes afraid of running engrams. In fact, it is almost a way to detect a "druggie". The drugs, particularly LSD and even sometimes antibiotics or other medicines to which the person has an allergy, can turn on whole track pictures violently. These tend to overwhelm the person and make him feel crazy. Some of these people are afraid to confront the bank again. The TR and other steps of the special TR Course improve their confront. If a person "doesn't like Dianetics" and doesn't want to be run on engrams, it is necessary to put them on the special course. If Dianetics has been run but poorly, it should of course be repaired fully with an L3B (List used to correct Dianetic errors). But if the person still flinches, the Special Course successfully completed will handle. It contains recall steps giving the pc a chance to confront the bank more easily and get used to it. FULL AUDITING RUNDOWN A full auditing rundown on drugs, all done on the same pc, would be: 1. Special TR Course for ex-drug users or alcoholics. 2. Pc Assessment Form. 3. Class VIII Drug Rundown Triple (done by a Class IV or VI). 4. By a Dianetic Auditor: Pains, emotions, sensations, attitudes connected with drugs (or alcohol), R3R Triple. 5. Prior Assessment to Drugs, Triple R3R, Dianetic Auditor. This can be followed by routine Triple Dianetics to EP for the grade. DONE FIRST Drugs are done first. They are NOT done after the Health Form and regular Dianetics. Why? Because Drugs make a resistive case! Regular Dianetics will get loses. Any current Dianetic case failures are from flubby Dianetic auditing or the person has been on Drugs or alcohol which were not handled by Dianetics. It hasn't harmed anyone to omit drugs. But it made it hard or impossible to get stable case gain. THUS ANY DIANETIC PC WHO HAS HAD DRUG HANDLING OMITTED MUST BE RUN ON DRUGS AS SOON AS POSSIBLE BEFORE MORE AUDITING IS GIVEN. I repeat, drugs or alcohol in most instances make a resistive case so the point must be handled before the case will attain and hold case gain. ANY PC WHO IS NOT MAKING IT IN AUDITING SHOULD BE CHECKED FOR A DRUG OR ALCOHOL HISTORY. 328 DISCOVERY In investigating a series of cases who were not making it, I found in each one that the person had been on drugs or alcohol and that drugs or the alcohol had not been run out. Drug data was not covered fully enough in the Dianetics pack. Only Prior Assessment to Drugs was given. Thus I find several Dianetic pcs were only run on the Prior Assessment to Drugs. This is not good enough. DIANETICS ONLY Where Dianetic Auditing only is available and the rest of the rundown given above is not, drugs can still be handled by a Dianetic Auditor in this way with this Dianetic Pgm. 1. PC Assessment Form. 2. Full C/S 1, also doing the TRs well with the pc. 3. Write down the drugs from the pc assessment form. Take the one that reads best on the meter. 4. List, what pains, emotions, sensations or attitudes are connected with taking (the drug). 5. Take the best reading Dianetic item from the list in (4). Run R3R Triple. 6. Complete items on the (4) above with R3R Triple. 7. Take another drug from (3) above that reads. 8. Repeat (4). 9. Repeat (5). 10. Use up the whole list in (4) above in this way until the entire list of drugs F/Ns when called. 11. Do Prior Assessment to Drugs (or alcohol). R3R Triple. 12. Triple R3R on any missing flows of earlier Dn items run. 13. Do Health Form. 14. Proceed with routine Triple Dianetics. This program is the one that would be done at step 4 in the full Drug Pgm above that includes the TR Course and Class VIII Rundown. However, when only Dianetic Auditors are available, at least the above Dianetic Program must be done. This repairs an omission in the Dianetic pack and unblocks the case gain of a great many pcs on whom a drug or alcohol history was never noticed or handled. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 329  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=17/7/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 51 OUT OF VALENCE   Remimeo C/Ses Testing Personnel Class IX Checksheet  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 17 JULY 1971 Remimeo C/Ses Testing Personnel C/S Series 51 Class IX Checksheet OUT OF VALENCE (OCA Graph) On OCA graphs (the plotted test score of a pc) you find sometimes a case that read high on the graph will drop and read lower after auditing. This is caused by the fact that the person was OUT OF VALENCE in the first place. Social machinery was what the first registered. Now after auditing the graph expresses something closer to the actual being even though it dropped. We have known about this since '57 or '58 but I do not think it was fully written up. Further, we now know MORE about it. If you look into Suppressive Person tech you will find an SP has to be out of valence to be SP. He does not know that he is because he is himself in a non-self valence. He is "somebody else" and is denying that he himself exists, which is to say denying himself as a self. Now this doesn't mean all persons whose graphs dropped were active SPs. But it does mean they weren't being themselves. After some auditing they became themselves somewhat and this self isn't the social cheery self the first graph said. But the dropped graph is nearer truth. Now, how to get the graph UP again? The person with the dropped graph is closer to being himself but is not yet fully restored, not yet fully into his "own valence". While Class XI would handle this a bit differently, Class VIII rundown already has an answer. The Class VIII out of valence lists LX1, LX2 and LX3 and the recall, secondary and engram triples for each assessed item from these lists is a way to handle. Completing any cycle the pc is on is of course fundamental. And even if the pc goes on to next grade the graph will improve. The fact is that the pc is emerging more and more and becoming himself and then he himself begins to gain. The graph that dives will come back up if general processing is done. The pc will keep saying he is "more there". And it is true. LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder 330  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=19/7/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 52 INTERNES   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 19 JULY 1971 Remimeo C/S Series 52 INTERNES The word INTERN or INTERNE means "An advanced graduate or a recent graduate in a professional field who is getting practical experience under the Supervision of an experienced worker". An Interneship then is serving a period as an Interne, or an activity offered by an org by which EXPERIENCE can be gained. Interneships have been arranged this long while for every auditing class. The apprenticeship of an auditor is done as an org Interne. C/Ses very often have Internes on their lines and sometimes have trouble with getting them to audit. The WHY of this is that the Interne seldom knows the definition of the word "Interne" (which is as above). They sometimes think they are still students. They do not know this fact: A COURSE GRADUATE BECOMES AN AUDITOR BY AUDITING. That means LOTS of auditing. The failure of "auditors" is that they go from one level to the next, HDC to IV to VIII, without ever becoming an auditor for that Class. Thus you can get a silly situation where a Class IX can't audit or C/S well. Thus you get tech going out. An HDC graduate who doesn't then audit under an experienced Case Supervisor who knows and demands the standard actions rarely gets to be an HDC AUDITOR. It takes tons of hours to make a real Dianetic auditor who can toss off standard sessions and get his routine miracles. So if an HDC doesn't INTERNE, but simply goes on to the Academy Courses or SHSBC he has skipped his apprenticeship as a Dianetic Auditor. If he gets his Class VI and never Internes but goes on to VIII _______ well, we now have somebody who has long since lost touch with the reality of why he is studying. Therefore you CAN'T take a Class VI graduate who was never a Dianetic Auditor and Interne him as a VI. He'll goof-goof-goof. So you have to Interne him as an HDC. WHEN he can turn out flawless Dianetic sessions on all kinds of pcs you can Interne him as a IV etc. In other words you have to catch up all neglected Apprenticeships. I don't care if the guy is an VIII, if he wasn't ever a Dianetic Auditor and a Class VI Auditor and isn't Interning as an VIII then he is only a provisional. Flubby auditors are the biggest time wasters a C/S has. If auditors on his lines aren't good, he'll take forever to get his C/S work done. And he won't get results. The answer is, regardless of Class as a course graduate, a C/S MUST INTERNE HIS AUDITORS FOR EACH INTERNESHIP MISSED ON THE WAY UP. The "ok to audit" system is used. One takes any graduate and Internes him on the lowest Interneship he has missed. He reviews his material, gets his drills checked, gets his misunderstood words cleared 331 and gets an "ok to audit" for that level. If he goofs he is crammed. And sometimes wholly retreaded. The "ok to audit Dianetics" would be his first okay. This suspends if he has to retread. When he then has turned out pcs, pcs, pcs, pcs, 5, 6, 8, 10 hours a day for weeks and weeks and is a total success as a Dianetic Auditor, he can go on up. At first as a Dianetic Interne he is part time studying Dianetics. Then as he gets flawless and while he is getting experience and practice on Dianetics, he can gradually phase over into re-studying his next Interneship, usually IV or VI. Then one day he is word cleared, checked out on his drills, and he qualifies for "ok to audit" for IV or VI. Now it begins all over again. Flubs -- Cramming, midnight oil, audit audit cramming audit audit new word clear new drill work audit audit audit audit 5, 6, 8, 10 hours a day. Now he is a IV or VI auditor. His next real step is a VI or VII Interne at an SH. If he has been a good IV Interne Auditor his VI Interneship after his SHSBC will be a VII Interneship. VII is an Interne activity. When he's an Auditor that can do VI and Power, he is ready for VIII and IX. If he is going to be a good VIII-IX auditor he will Interne in an AO or SH under an experienced C/S. Now when he goes to his own org, you have a real honest to goodness C/S. And as a C/S he must know how you use Interneships to make auditors. Wherever this function is neglected, you don't get auditors. You get doubtful students and out-tech. On Flag C/Ses have to catch up every missed Interneship to make a high volume high quality auditor. The world renowned Superiority of Flag Auditors is built just like I am telling you here. There is no reason just that same quality can't be built in any org. One does it by the Interne method. By using this method you get IN tech and high volume. Any auditor in any org that is limping and fumbling simply has never been properly Interned. The way to remedy it is to set up a good Cramming that uses only HCO Bs and has them available (and no verbal tradition), a Good Word Clearer and a Qual "okay to audit" Interne system. The Internes are a Section in Qual. They have a Course Supervisor. They study and audit cram audit cram study audit, audit audit audit. And one day you have IN tech and high volume high Class auditing all over the place. Otherwise you just have a bunch of students, in doubt, chewing on their misunderstood words and failed tech. There IS a right way to go about it. It is by Interneship. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 332  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=21/7/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=9/8/71 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  WORD CLEARING CORRECTION LIST   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 21 JULY 1971 REVISED (REVISED by BTB 21 July 71RD W/C Series 35RD Volume IX -- 455) Remimeo (Revised 9 Aug 71) (Reference WORD CLEARING METHOD I HCO B 30 June 71 REVISED) WORD CLEARING CORRECTION LIST (Use to correct upsets, high or low TA occurring in word clearing sessions.) Assess this list once thru noting reads (Method 5). Carry all Reads to an F/N or get the reading item fully repaired to F/N. 1. UNFLAT INT/EXT _______ (Correct by using L3B & handling.) 2. OVERRUN INT/EXT _______ (Correct by dating exactly first Int Rundown to F/N and then locating to F/N -- per HCO B 15 July 71, "Quads Cancelled". If it doesn't F/N use L3B on the Int Rundown.) 3. AUDITED OVER EXTERIOR _______ (Full Int Rundown if never done before. If already done -- by folder inspection -- correct as per 2.) 4. LIST ERROR _______ (Use L4B and handle.) 5. UNFLAT ENGRAM CHAIN _______ (Get which chain and flow and flatten -- use L3B if it bogs.) 6. ARC BREAK _______ (Use ARCU CDEI itsa earlier similar itsa.) (Or L1C Method 3 if it does not clean up.) 7. PTP (PRESENT TIME PROBLEM) _______ (Handle by itsa E/S itsa.) 8. WITHHOLD _______ (Pull it -- what, when, all, who E/S.) 9. OVERT _______ (Pull it E/S.) 10. UNREADING SUBJECT _______ (Get which one PC thought didn't read -- put in buttons suppress, invalidate and protest and clean it up.) 11. READING ON PROTEST _______ (Get which word, clean off protest and indicate by-passed charge.) 12. OVERRUN A WORD _______ (Get which one and rehab.) 13. COULDN'T HEAR THE WORD CLEARER _______ 333 14. DIDN'T UNDERSTAND WHAT THE WORD CLEARER SAID _______ (2wc E/S and clean it up.) 15. DIDN'T UNDERSTAND THE ACTION BEING DONE _______ 16. CONFUSED BY SOMETHING _______ (Work it out by 2-way comm and E/S.) 17. A WORD ON THE LIST OF SUBJECTS WAS MISUNDERSTOOD _______ (Clear it.) 18. OVERRUN A SUBJECT _______ (Get which one and rehab release point.) 19. WORD STILL MISUNDERSTOOD _______ (Get it cleared up with a dictionary and take E/S word/subject to F/N.) 20. SUBJECT STILL MISUNDERSTOOD _______ (Get which subject and which word and handle per usual word clearing tech.) 21. AUDITOR EVALUATION _______ (Clean up with eval button E/S to EP.) 22. WORD CLEARING IN THE MIDDLE OF ANOTHER INCOMPLETE AUDITING CYCLE _______ (Get which cycle PC is on and by folder inspection evaluate which one needs to be completed first -- make sure it is fully noted on PGM to complete word clearing if the other action is handled first.) 23. WORD CLEARING WHILE DOING TR COURSE _______ (Have PC finish the course.) 24. INCOMPLETE TR COURSE _______ (Complete TR Course -- then complete word clearing cycle.) 25. NOT GETTING THE BASIC WORD _______ (Find which subject/word is incomplete by two-way comm and then take it to EP.) 26. NOT GETTING THE BASIC SUBJECT _______ (Handle as in 25.) 27. AUDITOR FORGOT TO GO EARLIER SIMILAR _______ (Get which subject/word and take to EP -- if several subjects have been started take first one semi-run and flatten, then next, etc.) 28. NOT YOUR MISUNDERSTOOD _______ (Clean it up by two-way comm.) 29. INVALIDATION OF KNOWINGNESS _______ (Clean up using inval E/S.) 30. BY-PASSED A WIN _______ (Rehab it.) LRH:sb.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [The original issue of this HCO B was staff-written as were later revisions dated 31 Mar. 72, 30 Dec. 72 and 1 Dec. 74, the last being W/C Series 35RD, Vol. IX, page 455.] 334  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=23/7/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  ASSISTS A FLAG EXPERTISE SUBJECT  Type = 11 iDate=15/3/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 23 JULY 1971 Remimeo (Corrected in this type style, 4 May 1972) (Revises and replaces HCO B 15 Mar 71 of same title) ASSISTS A FLAG EXPERTISE SUBJECT (Commands are the only change) For a pc being run on a Touch Assist for handling something around the head (for example: teeth), go further even to the toes as the area extends through the nerve channel to the whole body. Right-left and also whole body. A head somatic also sticks in the spine. Assist EP All Assists are run to cognition and should F/N VGI at the Examiner. Injury Rundown On an injury, after the Touch Assist, a Contact Assist and then an L1C on the injured member could be done. Usual Dianetic actions would follow as necessary. Pc Running a Temperature COMMANDS CORRECTED FROM EARLIER ISSUE. A persistent temperature can be brought down by running the pc on Objective "Hold it still". This can be run on a two command basis. VERSION A For a pc running a temperature too ill for regular auditing, he should be given antibiotics and an assist type boost, not a major action like Dianetics. This version would be run if the pc is far too ill to get up. The pc is run on a meter to Cog F/N VGIs. 1. 2 command Repetitive Process alternate commands: a. Look around here and find something. b. Hold it still (until pc can or feels he can). Then (a) again. Then (b) again, etc. This will drop a fever. 2. 2 WC How do you feel? Have you felt like this before? Earlier Similar to F/N VGIs. 335 VERSION A is NOT very lasting. It is for very ill pcs and very high temperatures. VERSION B This is true Objective "Hold it still" and is very lasting. It is done on a pc who can, even with effort, walk around a room. It is done OFF the meter to Cog, GIs. The pc then should at once be put on the meter and will be found to have an F/N. If no F/N on the meter the process is either (a) unflat or (b) overrun. If unflat it is continued, flattened off the meter and the same meter test follows. If overrun the release point is rehabbed. VERSION B Commands are: (a) Look around here and find something. (b) Walk over to it. (c) With your hands, hold it still. The three commands are given in (a) (b) (c) sequence one after the other, the pc executing each command and being acknowledged until the pc has a cognition and GIs. He is then checked on the meter. A thermometer can be used to check temperature after the meter check for F/N. The temperature will be found to have subsided. Both A and B versions can be used on the same pc. Let us say on Monday, A Version is used. Then on Tuesday if temperature has gone back up but pc is better B Version is then used. The temperature process is most effective on a low order persistent fever that goes on and on for days and even weeks. In such cases Version B would be used and the temperature would come down and stay down very nicely. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:sb.nt.rd Copyright $c 1971, 1972 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [This HCO B is added to by HCO B 24 August 1971, Issue II, Assists Addition, page 364.] 336  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=25/7/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 53 SHORT HI TA ASSESSMENT C/S   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 25 JULY 1971 (CANCELLED -- see HCO B 24 Nov 73RB Volume VIII -- 389) Remimeo C/S Series 53 SHORT HI TA ASSESSMENT C/S The following C/S is one I use to get a fast result in handling a high TA. It does handle most of them. It is in a version the auditor can use directly. _______________________________________ PC Name _______________ date _______________________________________ Auditor Name (Auditor Grade for last session) 1. Assess pc Method 5 on this sheet (go down the list calling off the items to the pc, watching the meter. Mark any Tick, sF, F, LF, LFBD [to what TA], speeded rise or Blow Up). A. Interiorization _______ D. Drugs _______ Went in _______ LSD _______ Go in _______ Alcohol _______ Can't get in _______ Pot _______ Want to get out _______ Medicine _______ B. List Errors _______ E. Same engram run twice _______ Overlisting _______ Can't see Wrong items _______ engrams too well _______ Upset with giving items Invisible _______ to auditor _______ Black _______ C. Withholds _______ F. Same thing Overts _______ run twice _______ Not saying _______ Same action done by Problems _______ another auditor _______ Protest _______ Don't like it _______ G Doing something with mind between sessions _______ 337 2. Use only the ticks or falls or BDs. The rises will however show where mass lies. A. If A or any of the A Group, and the pc has had an Int RD, Date -- tell pc date Int RD was run from Folder Summary, then date the point it was flat by exact time -- hour, minute, second until it F/Ns and he says something blew. Locate -- have pc point where the Int RD was done, get distance away, part of room, etc until it F/Ns and he says something blew. If these do not happen it is not Flat so do L3B on each Flow and handle per the L3B directions. If Pc has never had an Int RD, then give him a standard Int RD providing you have checked out on the Int-Ext pack and are good at R3R. B. If any of these read, do an L4B on the earliest lists you can find that have not been corrected. Lacking these do an L4B in general. You can go over an L4B several times handling each read to F/N until the whole L4B gives nothing but F/Ns. C. If any of these, handle with 2 way comm and earlier similar to F/N. If more than one reads do biggest read first and then clean up each of the others E/S to F/N. If all read on assessment you have to get an F/N for each or 6 F/Ns. D. If any of these, do full Drug RD as per HCO B 15 July 1971, Issue III. E. If any of these, do L3B and handle according to what is stated to do on L3B. F. Do exactly as in A using the earliest time it was done. G. Find out what it is. If Yoga or Mystic exercises or some such 2wc E/S it to first time done, find out what upset had occurred before that and if TA now down do L1C on that period of pc's life. General. Handle Int RD (A) if it reads at all before handling rest as nothing will go right if Int is still out. For the remainder prefer to handle any BD group if you get a BD. If in doubt about what to do, return to the C/S. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:dz.sb.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [This HCO B was revised by order of LRH on 31 December 1971, 16 March 1972, 22 March 1972 (which changed the title to Short Hi-Lo TA Assessment C/S), 16 May 1972, 18 August 1972 and 20 April 1973. These were revised by LRH HCO Bs: 24 November 1973, C/S Series 53RF, Volume VIII, page 228; 24 November 1973, Reissued 4 April 1974, C/S Series 53RG, Volume VIII, page 282; 24 November 1973R, Revised and Reissued 30 August 1974, C/S Series 53RH, Volume VIII, page 308; 24 November 1973RA, Revised and Reissued 12 November 1974, C/S Series 53RI, Volume VIII, page 356; and 24 November 1973RB, Revised and Reissued 22 March 1975, C/S Series 53RJ, Volume VIII, page 398; all titled Short Hi-Lo TA Assessment C/S.] 338  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=28/7/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 54 DIANETICS, BEGINNING A PC ON   DIANETICS Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 28 JULY 1971 Remimeo DIANETICS C/S Series 54 DIANETICS, BEGINNING A PC ON Make Dianetics work fully in our modern culture. DO NOT BEGIN DIANETICS WITH A HEALTH FORM ANY LONGER. BEGIN DIANETICS WITH A PC ASSESSMENT SHEET, HCO B 24 April 1969. This is VITAL. DRUGS IF YOU GET ANY TA ACTION OR READS ON DRUGS EVEN IF THE PC SAYS "NO" THE FIRST DIANETIC ACTION IS THE THIRD PAGE OF HCO B 15 July 1971, Issue III. If the pc is currently on Drugs, then a Special Drug TR COURSE IS VITAL until the pc is off them. Then do the third page of HCO B 15 July 1971, Issue III. ACCIDENTS If you get a read on Part E of Assessment Form, Accidents, run them out Narrative R3R Triple. ILLNESS If Illness Part F Assessment Form reads, run it out Narrative R3R Triple. MENTAL TREATMENT If Mental Treatment reads, run it out Narrative R3R Triple. OPERATIONS If Operations Part G reads run the reading one out Narrative R3R Triple. MEDICINE If Medicine Part M reads TREAT IT HCO B 15 Jul 71, Iss III, as it reacts like any other drug but pcs don't sometimes think of medicines as drugs when they are. DEATHS If Deaths of relatives, etc read on Part 7, run them out Narrative as SECONDARIES R3R TRIPLE. 339 FAMILY INSANITY If Part L reads on a member of the family going insane, run it out Narrative SECONDARIES R3R TRIPLE. PERCEPTION Lack of perception (sight, hearing, etc) comes from overts and improves when Flow 2 is done on any of the above or any R3R. PROGRAM The C/S Programs the Case from the Assessment Form as above, using Drugs or Medicine first and the rest by largest reads first. Narrative Items or incidents were used for years with great effect. BUT THE ITEM MUST BE DONE R3R TRIPLE and is once in a while very long. REPAIR Repair by L3B ANY FLUBBED DIANETIC SESSION OR CHAIN WITHIN 24 HOURS. Do not let it go unrepaired. HEALTH FORM WHEN any and all of the above are handled, then and only then proceed with the usual Health Form by item. The pc in many cases won't be able to run engrams at all unless you run out drugs or medicines first. They will run these and these alone until the engrams are gone. People who "can't run engrams" are usually drug cases. This is CORRECT Dianetic Programming. MAKE DIANETICS WORK FOR YOU. Program it correctly. C/S it correctly. It won't work unless used on where the pc's attention is. IT WILL WORK IF YOU USE IT. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 340  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=2/8/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  TRS, SOLO COURSE AND ADVANCED COURSES   Remimeo Advanced Courses C/Ses Ad Course Supers Not Confidential TR Course Supers  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 2 AUGUST 1971 Remimeo Advanced Courses C/Ses Ad Course Supers Not Confidential TR Course Supers TRS, SOLO COURSE AND ADVANCED COURSES (Definition -- TR means Training Drills) Do not put a student who has done a Solo Course onto TRs before auditing. A wrong sequence would be R6EW study -- TR Course -- Solo Auditing. Another wrong sequence would be CC or OT Material Study -- TR Course or TRs -- Solo Auditing. WHY? Because with all the study materials stirred up ready to Audit, the TRs are the wrong process to run it out. If put on TRs then the as yet unaudited bank tends to cave in. While it would run out on TRs the basic bank is so heavy that very unnecessary stress is put on the student and he is subjected to distressing somatics and ideas. Therefore on 1. R6EW SOLO STUDENTS 2. ANY AD COURSE the rule applies DO NOT MIX TRS WITH SOLO OR ADVANCED COURSES. The time to put a student through the TR Course is BEFORE Solo or after he is OT, not in the time between. Factually Scientologists should be TR public course grads even before a Dianetics completion. People before extensive auditing make great gains on a properly run word cleared TR Course. A Clear OT has a ball doing TRs the Hard Way. But when you put the TRs out of sequence on the Grade Chart they can distress people. Way up on the Chart or way down, not in between. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 341  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=4/8/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  PURPOSE CLEARING   Remimeo Dept 13 Qual Div Qual Bu  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 4 AUGUST 1971 (REVISED -- see HCO B 4 Aug 71R Volume VIII -- 363) Remimeo Dept 13 Qual Div Qual Bu PURPOSE CLEARING (This HCO B is the basic action of the Post Purpose Clearing Section of Dept 13 Div V, Qual Div or by auditors as a technology.) An essential part of HATTING as done in HCO is to get the person's POST PURPOSE CLEARED by an auditor. INSTANT PURPOSE HCO usually tells the person what the purpose of the post is and certainly the staff member's seniors would. This action is not metered and goes along with Instant hatting. It is not done by an auditor. "George, the purpose of your post is to _______ . Any questions?" Questions are answered and clarified. Giving the person on the post the purpose is a basic hatting step. FULL POST CLEARING This requires an auditor, an E-Meter, and is done in session. Usually this is done after Mini-hatting and after some experience with the post. It is NOT done in this full fashion before the person has any knowledge of the post. It can also be done during or at the end of full hatting. But the sooner it is done after Mini-hatting and some weeks' experience on the post the more successful it will be. AUDITOR QUALIFICATIONS The auditor doing Post Purpose Clearing must be expert with 1. TRs 2. Metering 3. Code 4. 2 Way Comm 5. Flying rudiments. ADMIN A Post Purpose Clearing is given full worksheet and report handling and person goes to Examiner. A record of the session is kept with others done in the PPC RECORD BOOK with especially noted High or Low TA and vitally, any Rock slam. PC The pc must not be in an Ethics cycle, must be rested, not hungry and not ill or on drugs or medication. ANY RINGS ON THE PC'S HANDS MUST BE REMOVED AS THEY CAUSE A FALSE ROCK SLAM. HAT FOLDER Staff Member must bring hat folder to the PPC session so if there is any confusion on purposes in it they can be cleared from the Hat folder. 342 CASE FOLDER Case folder of the pc must also be collected and examined before session. This is repeated in the Rundown so it won't be missed. POST PURPOSE CLEARING STEPS PPC 1 -- Get the staff member's folder. Verify that he is not in the middle of some processes, repair or Major Grade. If so, don't touch. PPC 2 -- Fly a rud or talk the TA down if high. Note that it WAS high on the session worksheet. If the TA does not come down refer the case to Staff Staff Auditors and do not proceed. Case would need Folder Error Summary, Int Rundown verified, C/S Series 53 and handled. PPC 3 -- 2wc about person's post. Be alert to problems or w/hs and if these seem to be there do E/S to F/N on Problems and/or E/S to F/N on w/hs. PPC 4 -- 2wc "What is your post?" Need not F/N but if pc can't tell you resort to his hat and clear up confusions to F/N. PPC 5 -- 2wc "What opportunities would you have on your post?" This is carried to F/N. If no F/N treat it as a w/h and ask if there's anything pc isn't telling you. Carry any w/h to F/N. Then check the question again and get the F/N back by 2wc or E/S to F/N. (If you start to clear w/hs in the middle of the Q then the w/hs will F/N but the Q hasn't yet so must be F/Ned also. Overts may come up as well as w/hs and if so F/N them by E/S.) Pc should finish this step with F/N Cog and GIs. PPC 6 -- 2wc "How does your job align (compare) with what you incline (would like) to do?" Get any conflicts into view if not clean. Go E/S to F/N if there is conflict. If no F/N despite Itsa on conflict ask for overts or withholds and carry this to F/N. Check Q again to be sure it's clean or F/Ns. PPC 7 -- 2wc "What do you imagine the purposes of your post are?" Take it to clean needle or F/N. PPC 8 -- 2wc "How does this purpose tie in with the purpose of your Division?" Clean this up if there's doubt. Use folders or OEC books. Be sure it's clean if not an F/N. F/N is the ideal. PPC 9 -- 2wc "How does your purpose tie in with the purpose of the org?" Clean this up. PPC 10 -- 2wc "If your post was not done what would happen to the org?" Clean this up. PPC 11 -- 2wc "What is the purpose of your post?" This should go to F/N. PPC 12 -- Thank pc and send to Examiner. Complete Worksheet. Enter results in log. Put the session report in pc's folder. Send a report to the E/O AND TO FLAG if the person Rock slams. If you can get no satisfactory F/Ns and cogs and VGIs or if Exam report is bad, DIRECT THE FACT TO THE ATTENTION OF THE HAS AND THE C/O AND THE CASE SUPER. Post Purpose Clearing counts as a completion for the Dept on an F/N at Examiner's. LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 343  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=8/8/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 55 THE IVORY TOWER   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 8 AUGUST 1971 Remimeo C/S Series 55 THE IVORY TOWER It has been stated before that the Case Supervisor is most successful when he supervises in seclusion. This is called the IVORY TOWER rule. It comes from the practical experience that in C/Sing thousands of cases the only few mistakes I made (and repaired) were when I listened to the opinion of the auditor or saw the pc. This can be quite fatal to a case's progress. The fantastic results I achieve as a C/S mainly stem from not permitting what I know of tech and cases to be clouded by "Human Emotion and Reaction" (a Scn Public Relations term) by others. Part of a C/S's duty is to get the case through it despite auditor opinions and flubs or the opinions of others. A C/S has no political or personnel opinions. He can of course have his own opinions of the pc's case. But he is the FRIEND of the pc even when being harsh. Often the C/S, unseen by the pc, is sometimes never suspected but quite often adored by those for whom he C/Ses. One often sees this in success stories, "Thank you, thank you to my great auditor (name) and the C/S (name) and Ron." Sometimes it's only the auditor. But most pcs know the C/S is there. This awareness is also a great trust and it is a trust that is earned by great results and is never betrayed. To the majority of pcs, then, it is a trio -- always in the same order -- his auditor, his C/S and myself. He trusts us. And we do our best for him. We don't change our actions, then, if he is a dope addict, a wife beater, a criminal, a degraded being or an upstat (one who has high statistics) and a sterling person. When we are researching, C/Sing or auditing, we do our best for him. We have nothing to do with whether his seniors like him or for that matter whether we like him. It is our job. We hold it in trust. In our hands is his future, his sanity, his immortality. It depends on us whether he survives and lives a full life or whether he goes into limbo. If we do our duty, when we know and do our jobs, he achieves everything. When we don't, he is gone. 344 No priest or fancied idol has ever been endowed with more cause over the beingness of another than a C/S and his auditor. This isn't my opinion or my feeling about it. It's the way pcs look at it. Actually one can't really state the full actuality of it. The pc is justified in trusting us when we keep up to date on our tech, know our job, take every care that a good job is done and do our duty. AUDITOR OPINION Some auditors develop overts and withholds on pc and color their auditing reports with critical remarks about a pc = more withholds. A C/S who pays much attention to these opinions is foolish. When they get too bad on too many pcs, get the auditor's overts and withholds pulled as he'll begin to flub. The Worksheet and What the pc said or did is important. The opinions aren't. An auditor has a right to refuse to audit certain pcs as long as he audits others. That's as it should be. But a lot of "dog cases" are just unsolved cases that can be solved. Some are very difficult, true, but the difficulty is finding the bug. Some pcs are rather wild in conduct. But they solve too. So an auditor's opinion is not a study of the case. Talking to an auditor about a case he is auditing is not of any technical value to a C/S. Again, a case does not know what is wrong with it or it would as-is and wouldn't be wrong. So talking to a case about his case is a waste of time for a C/S. Some write huge notes to a C/S. The only value in all this is to analyze whether it's a hidden standard or an ARC Brk or a w/h or a PTS matter. TECHNICAL considerations are all that enter in looking over such. EXECUTIVE opinion is the world's worst source of data on a pc. No C/S should ever take what seniors say about a junior. It's all Human Emotion and Reaction. It's not tech. FAMILY, husbands, wives, fathers, mothers, brothers and sisters, aunts and uncles are of little value to listen to about a case. The most they could give you would be a list of accidents or illness or time in a home. But beware, they may be worse off than the pc. No. The C/S is the pc's safest friend. The pc trusts the C/S and the auditor. Or he wouldn't sit still at all. Sometimes he only trusts me. And that's the time I have to trust you. And I do. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 345  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=30/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=2 rDate=9/8/71 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  METHOD I  Type = 11 iDate=30/6/71 Issue=2 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0 Type = 11 iDate=30/6/71 Issue=2 Rev=1 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Remimeo Tech & Qual Secs C/Ses Auditors Word Clearers Only  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 30 JUNE 1971 REVISED Issue II (CANCELLED -- see HCO B 30 Jun 71R II Volume VIII -- 131) Remimeo Tech & Qual Secs (Revised 9 Aug 71) C/Ses Auditors Word Clearing Series 8RR Word Clearers Only (Cancels HCO B 30 June 71 Issue II and HCO B 30 June 71 Issue II 8R STANDARD C/S FOR WORD CLEARING IN SESSION METHOD I 1. Fly a rud if no F/N. (See "Auditor's Rights", C/S Series 1, if any trouble with this pc. If errors in previous word clear sessions use HCO B 21 July 1971 REVISED to handle word clearing corrections needed.) 2. ASSESS R Factor: We are going to go over a list of subjects to see if there is any word you didn't understand while studying these subjects. (Assess the whole list rapidly and clearly, good TR1 and noting every read from the meter.) Religion _______ Arithmetic _______ Ministers _______ Grammar _______ Church _______ The Humanities _______ College _______ The Mind _______ Schools _______ The Spirit _______ Sacrifices _______ Bodies _______ Surgery _______ Sex _______ Medicine _______ The Insane _______ Electronics _______ Psychiatry _______ Physics _______ Psychoanalysis _______ Technical Subjects _______ Psychology _______ Dianetics _______ Rituals _______ Scientology _______ Rites _______ Theology _______ Ships _______ Theosophy _______ The Sea _______ Philosophy _______ Military _______ Law _______ Armies _______ Organization _______ Navies _______ Government _______ Stars _______ Written Materials _______ Heavenly Bodies _______ Text Books _______ The Universe _______ Practice _______ Planes _______ Science _______ Vehicles _______ Music _______ Machinery _______ 346 Motors _______ Illnesses _______ Administration _______ Spoken Words _______ Healing _______ Add items dealing with this specific Pc's life. 3. Ask the Question, "Is there any word on this list you didn't understand?" Clear it. (Do not reassess because there was a list word not understood.) 4. Take each reading item from the best read on down and with E/S pull each one to F/N. "In the subject of _______ what word has been misunderstood?" He MUST look them up, so have a good dictionary handy. Do not accept "I know the meaning" if the subject or word reads. It isn't an earlier time he misunderstood that word. It's an earlier word in that subject and it can be an earlier subject. Considerations about it and other questions are not touched. Overts, W/Hs, etc are neglected. They are not done on the subject of the word. They are done in the session ruds. Just do the process and it will eventually F/N on each chain. 5. When all reads on the first assessment are handled to F/N, REASSESS the whole list. Do not take off the list items already handled. 6. Repeat Step 4. 7. Repeat Step 5. 8. Repeat Step 6, etc. 9. A persistent F/N should be attained on assessing the whole list as the End Phenomena of the Word Clearing sessions. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 347  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=16/8/71 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  TRAINING DRILLS MODERNIZED  Type = 11 iDate=17/4/61 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0 Type = 11 iDate=5/1/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0 Type = 11 iDate=21/6/71 Volnum=0 Issue=3 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0 Type = 11 iDate=25/5/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Remimeo Courses Checksheets  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 16 AUGUST 1971 Issue II Remimeo Courses Checksheets TRAINING DRILLS MODERNIZED (Revises 17 APRIL 1961. This HCO B cancels the following: Original HCO B 17 April 1961, "Training Drills Modernized" Revised HCO B 5 Jan 1971, "Training Drills Modernized" Revised HCO B 21 June 1971, "Training Drills Modernized" Issue III HCO B 25 May 1971, "The TR Course', This HCO B is to replace all other issues of TRs 0-4 in all packs and checksheets.) Due to the following factors, I have modernized TRs 0 to 4. 1. The auditing skill of any student remains only as good as he can do his TRs. 2. Flubs in TRs are the basis of all confusion in subsequent efforts to audit. 3. If the TRs are not well learned early in Scientology training courses, THE BALANCE OF THE COURSE WILL FAIL AND SUPERVISORS AT UPPER LEVELS WILL BE TEACHING NOT THEIR SUBJECTS BUT TRS. 4. Almost all confusions on Meter, Model Sessions and Scientology or Dianetic processes stem directly from inability to do the TRs. 5. A student who has not mastered his TRs will not master anything further. 6. Scientology or Dianetic processes will not function in the presence of bad TRs. The preclear is already being overwhelmed by process velocity and cannot bear up to TR flubs without ARC breaks. Academies were tough on TRs up to 1958 and have since tended to soften. Comm Courses are not a tea party. These TRs given here should be put in use at once in all auditor training, in Academy and HGC and in the future should never be relaxed. Public courses on TRs are NOT "softened" because they are for the Public. Absolutely no standards are lowered. THE PUBLIC ARE GIVEN REAL TRS -- ROUGH, TOUGH AND HARD. To do otherwise is to lose 90% of the results. There is nothing pale and patty-cake about TRs. THIS HCO B MEANS WHAT IT SAYS. IT DOES NOT MEAN SOMETHING ELSE. IT DOES NOT IMPLY ANOTHER MEANING. IT IS NOT OPEN TO INTERPRETATION FROM ANOTHER SOURCE. THESE TRS ARE DONE EXACTLY PER THIS HCO B WITHOUT ADDED ACTIONS OR CHANGE. NUMBER: OT TR 0 1971 NAME: Operating Thetan Confronting. COMMANDS: None. 348 POSITION: Student and coach sit facing each other with eyes closed, a comfortable distance apart -- about three feet. PURPOSE: To train student to be there comfortably and confront another person. The idea is to get the student able to BE there comfortably in a position three feet in front of another person, to BE there and not do anything else but BE there. TRAINING STRESS: Student and coach sit facing each other with eyes closed. There is no conversation. This is a silent drill. There is NO twitching, moving, confronting with a body part, "system" or vias used to confront or anything else added to BE there. One will usually see blackness or an area of the room when one's eyes are closed. BE THERE, COMFORTABLY, AND CONFRONT. When a student can BE there comfortably and confront and has reached a major stable win, the drill is passed. HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in June 71 to give an additional gradient to confronting and eliminate students confronting with their eyes, blinking, etc. Revised by L. Ron Hubbard in August 1971 after research discoveries on TRs. NUMBER: TR 0 CONFRONTING REVISED 1961 NAME: Confronting Preclear. COMMANDS: None. POSITION: Student and coach sit facing each other a comfortable distance apart -- about three feet. PURPOSE: To train student to confront a preclear with auditing only or with nothing. The whole idea is to get the student able to be there comfortably in a position three feet in front of a preclear, to BE there and not do anything else but BE there. TRAINING STRESS: Have student and coach sit facing each other, neither making any conversation or effort to be interesting. Have them sit and look at each other and say and do nothing for some hours. Student must not speak, blink, fidget giggle or be embarrassed or anaten. It will be found the student tends to confront WITH a body part, rather than just confront, or to use a system of confronting rather than just BE there. The drill is misnamed if Confronting means to DO something to the pc. The whole action is to accustom an auditor to BEING THERE three feet in front of a preclear without apologizing or moving or being startled or embarrassed or defending self. Confronting with a body part can cause somatics in that body part being used to confront. The solution is just to confront and BE there. Student passes when he can just BE there and confront and he has reached a major stable win. HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Washington in March 1957 to train students to confront preclears in the absence of social tricks or conversation and to overcome obsessive compulsions to be "interesting". Revised by L. Ron Hubbard April 1961 on finding that S.O.P. Goals required for its success a much higher level of technical skill than earlier processes. Revised by L. Ron Hubbard in August 1971 after research discoveries on TRs. NUMBER: TR 0 BULLBAIT REVISED 1961 NAME: Confronting Bullbaited. COMMANDS: Coach: "Start" "That's it" "Flunk". POSITION: Student and coach sit facing each other a comfortable distance apart -- about three feet. 349 PURPOSE: To train student to confront a preclear with auditing or with nothing. The whole idea is to get the student able to BE there comfortably in a position three feet in front of the preclear without being thrown off, distracted or reacting in any way to what the preclear says or does. TRAINING STRESS: After the student has passed TR 0 and he can just BE there comfortably, "bull baiting" can begin. Anything added to BEING THERE is sharply flunked by the coach. Twitches, blinks, sighs, fidgets, anything except just being there is promptly flunked, with the reason why. PATTER: Student coughs. Coach: "Flunk! You coughed. Start." This is the whole of the coach's patter as a coach. PATTER AS A CONFRONTED SUBJECT: The coach may say anything or do anything except leave the chair. The student's "buttons" can be found and tromped on hard. Any words not coaching words may receive no response from the student. If the student responds, the coach is instantly a coach (see patter above). Student passes when he can BE there comfortably without being thrown off or distracted or reacting in any way to anything the coach says or does and has reached a major stable win. HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in Washington in March 1957 to train students to confront preclears in the absence of social tricks or conversation and to overcome obsessive compulsions to be "interesting". Revised by L. Ron Hubbard April 1961 on finding that S.O.P. Goals required for its success a much higher level of technical skill than earlier processes. Revised by L. Ron Hubbard in August 1971 after research discoveries on TRs. NUMBER: TR 1 REVISED 1961 NAME: Dear Alice. PURPOSE: To train the student to deliver a command newly and in a new unit of time to a preclear without flinching or trying to overwhelm or using a via. COMMANDS: A phrase (with the "he saids" omitted) is picked out of the book "Alice in Wonderland" and read to the coach. It is repeated until the coach is satisfied it arrived where he is. POSITION: Student and coach are seated facing each other a comfortable distance apart. TRAINING STRESS: The command goes from the book to the student and, as his own, to the coach. It must not go from book to coach. It must sound natural not artificial. Diction and elocution have no part in it. Loudness may have. The coach must have received the command (or question) clearly and have understood it before he says "Good". PATTER: The coach says "Start", says "Good" without a new start if the command is received, or says "Flunk" if the command is not received. "Start" is not used again. "That's it" is used to terminate for a discussion or to end the activity. If session is terminated for a discussion, coach must say "Start" again before it resumes. This drill is passed only when the student can put across a command naturally, without strain or artificiality or elocutionary bobs and gestures, and when the student can do it easily and relaxedly. HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in London, April 1956, to teach the communication formula to new students. Revised by L. Ron Hubbard 1961 to increase auditing ability. 350 NUMBER: TR 2 REVISED 1961 NAME: Acknowledgements. PURPOSE: To teach student that an acknowledgement is a method of controlling preclear communication and that an acknowledgement is a full stop. COMMANDS: The coach reads lines from "Alice in Wonderland" omitting "he saids" and the student thoroughly acknowledges them. The coach repeats any line he feels was not truly acknowledged. POSITION: Student and coach are seated facing each other at a comfortable distance apart. TRAINING STRESS: Teach student to acknowledge exactly what was said so preclear knows it was heard. Ask student from time to time what was said. Curb over and under acknowledgement. Let student do anything at first to get acknowledgement across, then even him out. Teach him that an acknowledgement is a stop, not beginning of a new cycle of communication or an encouragement to the preclear to go on. To teach further that one can fail to get an acknowledgement across or can fail to stop a pc with an acknowledgement or can take a pc's head off with an acknowledgement. PATTER: The coach says "Start", reads a line and says "Flunk" every time the coach feels there has been an improper acknowledgement. The coach repeats the same line each time the coach says "Flunk". "That's it" may be used to terminate for discussion or terminate the session. "Start" must be used to begin a new coaching after a "That's it". HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in London in April 1956 to teach new students that an acknowledgement ends a communication cycle and a period of time, that a new command begins a new period of time. Revised 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard. NUMBER: TR 3 REVISED 1961 NAME: Duplicative Question. PURPOSE: To teach a student to duplicate without variation an auditing question, each time newly, in its own unit of time, not as a blur with other questions, and to acknowledge it. To teach that one never asks a second question until he has received an answer to the one asked. COMMANDS: "Do fish swim?" or "Do birds fly?" POSITION: Student and coach seated a comfortable distance apart. TRAINING STRESS: One question and student acknowledgement of its answer in one unit of time which is then finished. To keep student from straying into variations of command. Even though the same question is asked, it is asked as though it had never occurred to anyone before. The student must learn to give a command and receive an answer and to acknowledge it in one unit of time. The student is flunked if he or she fails to get an answer to the question asked, if he or she fails to repeat the exact questions, if he or she Q and As with excursions taken by the coach. PATTER: The coach uses "Start" and "That's it", as in earlier TRs. The coach is not bound after starting to answer the student's question but may comm lag or give a commenting type answer to throw the student off. Often the coach should answer. 351 Somewhat less often the coach attempts to pull the student in to a Q and A or upset the student. Example: Student: "Do fish swim?" Coach: "Yes." Student: "Good." Student: "Do fish swim?" Coach: "Aren't you hungry?" Student: "Yes." Coach: "Flunk." When the question is not answered, the student must say, gently, "I'll repeat the auditing question," and do so until he gets an answer. Anything except commands, acknowledgement and, as needed, the repeat statement, is flunked. Unnecessary use of the repeat statement is flunked. A poor command is flunked. A poor acknowledgement is flunked. A Q and A is flunked (as in example). Student misemotion or confusion is flunked. Student failure to utter the next command without a long comm lag is flunked. A choppy or premature acknowledgement is flunked. Lack of an acknowledgement (or with a distinct comm lag) is flunked. Any words from the coach except an answer to the question, "Start", "Flunk", "Good" or "That's it", should have no influence on the student except to get him to give a repeat statement and the command again. By repeat statement is meant, "I'll repeat the auditing command." "Start", "Flunk", "Good" and "That's it" may not be used to fluster or trap the student. Any other statement under the sun may be. The coach may try to leave his chair in this TR. If he succeeds it is a flunk. The coach should not use introverted statements such as "I just had a cognition." "Coach divertive" statements should all concern the student, and should be designed to throw the student off and cause the student to lose session control or track of what the student is doing. The student's job is to keep a session going in spite of anything, using only command, the repeat statement or the acknowledgement. The student may use his or her hands to prevent a "Blow" (leaving) of the coach. If the student does anything else than the above, it is a flunk and the coach must say so. HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in London in April 1956 to overcome variations and sudden changes in sessions. Revised 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard. The old TR has a comm bridge as part of its training but this is now part of and is taught in Model Session and is no longer needed at this level. Auditors have been frail in getting their questions answered. This TR was redesigned to improve that frailty. NUMBER: TR 4 REVISED 1961 NAME: Preclear Originations. PURPOSE: To teach the student not to be tongue-tied or startled or thrown off session by originations of preclear and to maintain ARC with preclear throughout an origination. COMMANDS: The student runs "Do fish swim?" or "Do birds fly?" on coach. Coach answers but now and then makes startling comments from a prepared list given by Supervisor. Student must handle originations to satisfaction of coach. POSITION: Student and coach sit facing each other at a comfortable distance apart. TRAINING STRESS: The student is taught to hear origination and do three things. 1. Understand it; 2. Acknowledge it; and 3. Return preclear to session. If the coach feels abruptness or too much time consumed or lack of comprehension, he corrects the student into better handling. PATTER: All originations concern the coach, his ideas, reactions or difficulties, none concern the auditor. Otherwise the patter is the same as in earlier TRs. The student's 352 patter is governed by: 1. Clarifying and understanding the origin. 2. Acknowledging the origin. 3. Giving the repeat statement "I'll repeat the auditing command," and then giving it. Anything else is a flunk. The auditor must be taught to prevent ARC breaks and differentiate between a vital problem that concerns the pc and a mere effort to blow session. (TR 3 Revised.) Flunks are given if the student does more than 1. Understand; 2. Acknowledge; 3. Return pc to session. Coach may throw in remarks personal to student as on TR 3. Student's failure to differentiate between these (by trying to handle them) and coach's remarks about self as "pc" is a flunk. Student's failure to persist is always a flunk in any TR but here more so. Coach should not always read from list to originate, and not always look at student when about to comment. By Originate is meant a statement or remark referring to the state of the coach or fancied case. By Comment is meant a statement or remark aimed only at student or room. Originations are handled, Comments are disregarded by the student. HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in London in April 1956 to teach auditors to stay in session when preclear dives out. Revised by L. Ron Hubbard in 1961 to teach an auditor more about handling origins and preventing ARC breaks. As TR 5 is also part of the CCHs it can be disregarded in the Comm Course TRs despite its appearance on earlier lists for students and staff auditors. TRAINING NOTE It is better to go through these TRs several times getting tougher each time than to hang on one TR forever or to be so tough at start student goes into a decline. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:jw.JR:JS:nt.pe.rd Copyright $c 1961, 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 353  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=20/8/71 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  HAS SPECIALIST AUDITING PROGRAM   Remimeo Div IV HGC Div V Dept 13  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 20 AUGUST 1971 Issue I (REVISED -- see HCO B 20 Nov 71 Volume VIII -- 50) Remimeo Div IV HGC Div V Dept 13 HAS SPECIALIST AUDITING PROGRAM (Reference HCO PL 20 Aug 71, Issue I, "HAS TROUBLES") The HAS (HCO Area Secretary), any HCO Executive Secretary, HCO Cope Officer, HCO Org Officer, Tech Establishment Officer, any HAS Deputy OR any Executive or Divisional Head or staff member who shows a tendency to transfer or unstabilize staff members or who fails to hat others, must be processed especially in order to be totally stable on post. The HAS and Establishment Officers are peculiarly subject to efforts to unstabilize them. These require the Program to be done in any case whether stable or not. Executives or staff members who show signs of obsessive transfer of the staff or org are also greatly benefitted. The HAS Specialist Rundown consists of processes which increase the ability to hold a position. THE RUNDOWN MAY ONLY BE DONE WHEN NO EXISTING AUDITING PROGRAM IS ONLY PARTIALLY DONE. COMPLETE THE EXISTING CYCLE FIRST. HAS SPECIALIST PGM Action 1. Check if ever Exterior in auditing, if the Interiorization RD has been run. Repair or handle any omission or error in the Interiorization RD. _______ Action 2. Do L4B METHOD 5 and handle and correct any out lists. _______ Action 3. Do C/S Series 53 and handle. _______ Action 4. TR COURSE to full EP. _______ Action 5. ADMIN TRs OR UPPER INDOC if ADMIN TRs not available. _______ Action 6. C/S Series 54 and handle. _______ Action 7. CCHs. _______ Action 8. Hold It Still. (HCO B 23 July 71, Page 2, Version B.) _______ Action 9. Start -- Change -- Stop (SCS) on an object. _______ Action 10. Start -- Change -- Stop. _______ Action 11. Op Pro By Dup (Book and Bottle). _______ Action 12. Verify Int RD, run if not run in No. 1 or date to blow locate to blow. _______ Action 13. Expanded Lower Grades especially Grade III. _______ Caution: Do not repeat Processes already done on the pc. PACK: HCO B 20 Aug 71, Issue II, is auditor's checksheet for the above, giving all materials. It is done by Tr and Serv Aide. Packs can be locally assembled or procured from CLO A/CS-2. Most of these materials occur in Level 1 PABs SHSBC. LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 354  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=23/8/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 1 AUDITOR'S RIGHTS   Remimeo All Auditors C/Ses SHSBC Acad Level IV Class VIIIs HGCs Class VIII Checksheet Class VI Checksheet Class III Checksheet C/S Course Checksheet HSST Internes  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex Remimeo All Auditors HCO BULLETIN OF 23 AUGUST 1971 C/Ses (HCO B 24 May 1970 Revised) SHSBC Acad Level IV Class VIIIs HGCs Class VIII Checksheet C/S Series 1 Class VI Checksheet Class III Checksheet C/S Course Checksheet HSST AUDITOR'S RIGHTS Internes (Revised to update and delete the O/R List and add Auditing Over Out Ruds. All changes are in this type style.) AUDITOR RESPONSIBILITY FOR C/Ses An auditor who receives a Case Supervisor direction (C/S) of what to audit on a pc is NOT discharged of his responsibility as an auditor. THE AUDITOR HAS A SERIES OF RESPONSIBILITIES THAT ARE PART OF EVERY C/S HE GETS TO AUDIT. ACCEPTING THE PC No auditor is required to accept a specific pc just because the pc is assigned to him. If an auditor does not believe he can help that particular pc or if he dislikes auditing that particular pc the auditor has a right to refuse to audit that pc. The auditor must state why. The Case Supervisor, Director of Processing or Director of Review, nor any of their seniors, may not discipline the auditor for refusing to audit a particular pc. An auditor who refuses to audit his quota of hours or sessions is of course subject to action. Thus refusing to audit a particular pc, so long as one is not refusing to audit other pcs, is not actionable. "I do not wish to audit this pc because _______ . I am willing to audit other pcs," is the legal auditor statement in the matter. Some pcs get a bad name with some auditors, some don't appreciate the auditing, some conflict with a particular auditor's own personality. There are such instances. It does not mean certain pcs cannot be helped by others. It is also true that an auditor who dislikes a pc may not do a good job so the rule also has a practical side to it. One auditor disliked young men and did a bad job on them. Another disliked old ladies and chopped them up in session. One pc had messed up several Scientologists and couldn't find anyone to audit him at all. We are not auditing people to make amends to the world. Thus an auditor has a right to reject or accept the pcs he is given. 355 ACCEPTING A C/S When the auditor gets a C/S to do on a case and if he thinks it is not the correct thing to do he has the right to reject the C/S for that pc and require another one he can agree to. The auditor does not have the right to start doing a C/S and change it during the session except as noted below. The auditor may NOT C/S in the auditing chair while auditing the pc. If he has NO Case Supervisor at all the auditor still audits from a C/S. He writes the C/S before session and adheres to it in session. To do something else and not follow the C/S is called "C/sing in the chair" and is very poor form as it leads to Q and A. STALE DATED C/S A C/S that is a week or two old or a Repair (Progress) Pgm that is a month or two old is dynamite. This is called a "Stale Dated Pgm" or a "Stale Dated C/S" meaning it is too old to be valid. It should have been done sooner. The pc of last week when the C/S was written may have been well and happily employed but a week later may have headaches and reprimand from the boss. It is dangerous to accept a Repair (Progress) Pgm if it is old. The auditor who sees his C/S is old and sees the pc has Bad Indicators is justified in demanding a fresh C/S giving his reasons why. A program written in January may be completely out of date in June. Who knows what may have happened in between. Use fresh C/Ses and fresh Pgms. Stale Dates only occur in poorly run backlogged Divisions anyway. The real remedy is reorganize and hire more and better auditors. ENDING THE SESSION When the C/S he has is proving unworkable during the session, the auditor has a right to end the session and send the folder to the C/S. Ending the session is totally up to the auditor. If the auditor just doesn't complete an action that was producing TA and could be completed it is of course a flunk. Such a case is just not running a basic engram the one more time through that would bring the TA down and give a proper end phenomena. This and similar actions would be an auditor error. The judgement here is whether or not the auditor's action is justified in ending the session. Even though he may have made an error, the auditor cannot be blamed for the ending off of the session as that is totally up to him. He can be given a flunk for the error. AUDITING OVER OUT RUDS Auditing a pc on something else whose ruds are out is a MAJOR AUDITING ERROR. 356 Even if the C/S omits "Fly a rud" or "Fly ruds" this does not justify the auditor auditing the pc over out ruds. The auditor can do one of two things: He can Fly all ruds or he can return the folder and request ruds be flown. The DIANETIC AUDITOR is not excused from auditing over out ruds and in an HGC must be specially cautioned not to do so but return the folder for a new C/S. Better still he should learn to Fly ruds. INABILITY TO FLY RUDS If an auditor cannot get a rud to F/N, cannot get any rud to F/N, he is justified in starting a Green Form. The auditor solution to no F/N on ruds is to do a GF whether the C/S said to or not. This is an expected action. It is understood the auditor would use Suppress and False in trying to Fly ruds. SESSIONS FAR APART When a pc has not had a session for some time, or when a pc gets sessions days apart, RUDS MUST BE FLOWN. Otherwise the pc will get audited over out ruds. This can develop mental mass. Optimum session scheduling is a series of sessions or a whole program done in a block of sessions close together. This prevents the world from throwing the pc's ruds out between sessions. Giving sessions far apart barely keeps up with life. The auditing time is absorbed in patching life up. Rapid gain gets above life's annoyances and keeps the pc there. UNREADING ITEMS When an item the auditor has been told to run doesn't read on the meter, even when the auditor puts in Suppress and Invalidate on it, the auditor MUST NOT do anything with the item no matter what the C/S said. It is expected he will see if it reads and use Suppress and Invalidate on it. And if it still doesn't read he will be expected NOT to run it. LISTS When an auditor whose C/S told him to list "Who or what _______ " or any list question finds that the list question does not read, the auditor MUST NOT list it. When doing a list ordered by the C/S it is assumed that the auditor will test it for read before listing and that he will NOT list an unreading question. (A read is an actual fall, not a tick or a stop.) LIST TROUBLE When an auditor has trouble doing a list and getting an item it is expected he will use a Prepared List like L4B to locate the trouble and handle it. As it is very hard on a pc to mess up a list it is expected the auditor will handle the situation then and there with no further C/S directions. 357 HIGH TA When the auditor sees the TA is high at session start yet the C/S says to "Fly a rud" or run a chain, the AUDITOR MUST NOT TRY TO FLY A RUD and he must not start on a chain. Trying to bring a TA down with ARC Brks or ruds is very hard on a pc as ARC Breaks aren't the reason TAs go up. Seeing a high TA at start the Dianetic auditor or Scn auditor up to Class II does not start the session but sends the folder back to the C/S and for a higher class auditor to do. Seeing a high TA at start the Scientology auditor (Class III or above) (a) checks for exteriorization in a recent session and if so the session is ended and the C/S is asked for an "Interiorization Rundown"; (b) if the pc has had an Interiorization Rundown the auditor asks the C/S for permission to do a "C/S Series 53" or a Hi-Lo TA assessment or whatever the C/S indicates. The Int RD may have been (usually is) overrun and needs rehab or correction and it is usual to check it -- it is included in a "C/S 53" and a Hi Lo TA. These actions are expected of the auditor even when not stated in the C/S. GOING ON HOPING When a case is running badly session to session the LAST thing you do is go on hoping, either in auditing or C/Sing. "Let's try _______ ", "Then this", "Then this", is not going to solve the case. YOU GET DATA. You can get data by a White Form (Pc Assessment Form). You can get data from a GF fully assessed (Method 5). You can get data by 2-way comm on various subjects. You can have the D of P interview and get answers. You can even ask his mother. You look for case errors. You study the folder back to where the pc ran well and then come forward and you'll find the error every time. DO NOT JUST GO ON SESSION AFTER FAILED SESSION HOPING. That's pure idiocy. You get data! from prepared lists, from life, from the pc, from the folder. FIND THE BUG! Ah, good Lord, he is a Pinkerton Agent sworn to secrecy! He does yoga exercises after every session. He was tried for murder when he was 16 and nobody has run the engram of it. Various auditors ran the same engram chain four times. An auditor ran Int RD twice. After Power she had her baby and nobody ran the delivery. He doesn't like to talk but is a "Grade Zero"! A dozen dozen reasons can exist. An auditor does NOT let a C/S C/S hopefully. He refuses the C/Ses until a Folder Error Summary is done and the bug found. 358 THINGS DONE TWICE By carelessness the same rundowns can be called for twice and done twice or even more. A Folder Summary inside the front cover must exist and must be kept up. Over it there must be a program on which the case is being audited. But just because it's covered, never neglect entering a session and what was run on the Folder Summary (FS). If Hold it Still is ordered, see if it was run before. Don't let major Rundowns be done twice. DIANETIC ITEMS must NEVER be run twice. Dianetic lists must not be scattered through a folder. Bring them together and keep them together and being brought forward. COPY Don't copy Dianetic lists or worksheets from notes or items from lists. keep all admin neat and in the original form. Copying makes errors possible. RUDS GOING OUT When the ruds go out during the session the auditor recognizes the following: Pc Critical = W/H from auditor Pc Antagonistic = BPC in session No TA = Problem Tired = Failed Purpose or no sleep Sad = ARC Break Soaring TA = Overrun or Protest Dope Off = By-passed F/N or not enough sleep No Interest = Out Ruds or no interest in the first place. An auditor who isn't sure what it is but runs into trouble with the pc (except on lists which he handles at once always) is smart to end off the session quickly, write down the full observation and get it to the C/S. The auditor who is an old hand and knows what he is looking at as per above scale (and the C/S the C/S would give) handles it promptly. Pc Critical = W/H = pull the W/H. Pc Antagonistic = BPC = assess proper list (such as L1C) and handle. No TA (or case gain) = Problem = locate the problem. Tired = no sleep or Failed Purpose = check which it is and handle. Sad = ARC Brk = locate and handle, Itsa earlier Itsa. Soaring TA = O/R or Protest = find which and handle. Such an O/R is usually [handled] by rehab. Dope Off = lack of sleep or BP F/N = check on sleep, or rehab F/N. 359 No Interest = no interest in first place or Out Ruds = check for interest or put in ruds. List goes wrong = BPC = handle or do L4B or any L4 at once. Ruds won't fly = some other error = assess GF and handle. The auditor has no business trying to do the C/S given when it collides with and isn't designed to handle any of the above. If the previous session disclosed such an error and this session C/S was designed to handle and doesn't, the auditor should end off and the next C/S should be "2-way comm for data". CASE NOT HANDLED When the auditor or the Examiner collides with a pc who is asserting his case has not been handled, there should not be a new set of actions based on little data but the auditor should end off and the C/S should order a "2-way comm on what hasn't been handled". The auditor should not at once take this up as part of any other C/S. In other words an auditor doesn't change the C/S to a 2-way comm on something not called for by C/S. MAJOR ACTIONS An auditor should never begin a major action on a case that is not "set up" for it. As this can occur during a session it is vital to understand the rule and follow it. Otherwise a case can be bogged right down and will be hard to salvage as now a new action to repair has been added to an unrepaired action. Now, if the auditor starts a major action on a case not "set up" we get 2 things to repair where we only had 1 as the major action won't work either. Repair = patching up past auditing or recent life errors. This is done by prepared lists or completing the chain or correcting lists or even 2-way comm or prepchecks on auditors, sessions, etc. Rudiments = setting the case up for the session action. This includes ARC Brks, PTPs, W/Hs, GF or O/R listing or any prepared list (such as L1C, etc). Set up = getting an F/N showing and VGIs before starting any major action. It means just that -- an F/N and VGIs before starting any major action. Such may require a repair action and rudiments as well. Major Action = any -- but any -- action designed to change a case or general considerations or handle continual illness or improve ability. This means a Process or even a series of processes like 3 flows. It doesn't mean a grade. It is any process the case hasn't had. Grade = a series of processes culminating in an exact ability attained, examined and attested to by the pc. Program = any series of actions designed by a C/S to bring about definite results in a pc. A program usually includes several sessions. The vast bulk of auditing errors come about because C/Ses and auditors seek to use a Major Action to repair a case. It is a responsibility of an auditor to reject a C/S which seeks to use one or more major actions to repair a case that isn't running well. 360 The auditor must understand this completely. He can be made to accept a wrong C/S for the pc and even more importantly can in his own session make the error and mess up the case. Example: Pc has not been running well (no real TA or had a grumpy Exam report). Auditor sees C/S has ordered a major action, not a repair by prepared lists, ruds, etc. The auditor must reject the C/S as he will be made to fail in session by it. Example: Auditor gets a C/S, "(1) Fly a rud; (2) Assess LX3; (3) Run 3-way recall, 3-way secondaries, 3-way engrams on all / / X items". The auditor can't get a rud to fly. Does the LX3. In other words he flunks by failing to SET UP the case. It could also go this way. Auditor can't get a rud to fly, does a GF, gets no F/N. He MUST NOT begin a major action but MUST end off right there. It is fatal to begin any new process on the case designed to change the case if the case is not F/N VGIs. The pc who starts processing for the first time and is surely not F/N VGIs must be set up by repair actions! Simple rudiments, life ruds, O/R list on life, even assessing prepared lists on life, these are repair actions. The pc will sooner or later begin to fly. Now at session start you put in a rud, get F/N VGIs and CAN start major actions. So the auditor has a responsibility not to be led up a garden path by a C/S orders a major action on a pc who isn't repaired or by not being able in session to get an F/N VGIs by repair. The only exceptions are a touch assist or life ruds or the Dianetic assist all on a temporarily sick pc. But that's repair isn't it? PROGRAM VIOLATIONS When an auditor receives a C/S and sees that it violates the pc's program he should reject it. The pc, let us say, is supposed to finish his Dianetic Triples but is suddenly being given a Group Engram Intensive. That violates the program and also the grade. If the pc is running badly, a repair should be ordered. If not, the program should be completed. Example: An effort is being made to get the pc to go backtrack. This is a program containing several major actions which probably consists of several sessions. Before this program is complete and before the pc has gone backtrack, the C/S orders "(1) Fly a rud, (2) 3 S & Ds". The auditor should recognize in 3 S & Ds a major action being run into the middle of a program and reject it. The correct action is of course the next backtrack process. GRADE VIOLATIONS A pc who is on a grade and hasn't attained it yet must not be given major actions not part of that grade. Example: Pc is on Grade I. C/S orders a list having to do with drinking. It is not a process on that grade. It could be done after Grade I is attained and before Grade II is begun. The C/S is incorrect and should not be accepted. ABILITY ATTAINED Now and then before the full major action is complete or before all the grade processes are run, the pc will attain the ability of the grade or the end phenomena of the action. 361 This is particularly true of valence shifters or Interiorization Rundowns and can happen in grades. The auditor should recognize it and, with the F/N VGIs always present at such moments, end off. I know of one case who had a huge cog about Interiorization on Flow 1 Engrams and was pushed by both C/S and auditor to do Flows 2 and 3 who bogged so badly that it took a long while -- weeks -- to straighten the case out. The ability itself gets invalidated by pushing on. On the other hand this should never be taken as an excuse. "I think he cogged to himself so we ended off." It must be a real "What do you know!" sort of out-loud cog with a big F/N and VVGIs and directly on the subject to end off a major action or a program or a grade before its actions are all audited. REVIEWING REVIEWS An auditor who gets a C/S or an order to repair a case that is running well should reject doing the action. I have seen a case ordered to repair who had Ext Full Perception Doing Great. The repair bogged the case. The case then got running well again but a second C/S ordered a new repair which of course bogged it. Then major actions were done. The case was again repaired and rehabbed and became ok. Three times the auditor should have said NO. FALSE REPORTS The vilest trick that can be played on a pc is for an auditor to falsify an auditing report. It may be thought to be "good Public Relations" (good PR) for the auditor with the C/S. Actually it buries an error and puts the pc at risk. INTEGRITY is a hallmark of Dianetics and Scientology. Just because psychiatrists were dishonest is no reason for auditors to be. The results are there to be gotten. False reports like false attests recoil and badly on both the auditor and pc. OVERTS ON PCS When an auditor finds himself being nattery or critical of his pcs he should get his withholds on pcs pulled and overts on them off. An auditor who goes sad is auditing pcs over his own A RC Break. An auditor worried about his pc is working over a Problem. Getting one's ruds in on pcs or C/Ses or the org can bring new zest to life. AUDITORS DON'T HAVE CASES In the chair no auditor has a case. If breath shows on a mirror held to his face he can audit. 362 Faint afterwards if you must but see that the pc gets to the Examiner with his F/N. Then get yourself handled. "WHAT HE DID WRONG" An auditor has a right to know what he did wrong in the session that went wrong. Most often a sour session occurs only when the rules and data in this HCO B have been violated. But an auditor's TRs can go out or his listing and nulling is in error. After a session that went wrong somebody else (not the auditor) should ask the pc what the auditor did. This sometimes spots a false auditing report. But it also sometimes is a false report by the pc. In any event, the auditor has a right to know. Then he can either correct his auditing or his know-how or he can advise the C/S the pc's report is untrue and better repair can be done on the pc. Savage action against an auditor is almost never called for. He was trying to help. Some people are hard to help. Not only does an auditor have the right to be told what was wrong but he must be given the exact HCO B, date and title, that he violated. Never take a verbal or written correction that is not in an HCO B or tape. Don't be party to a "hidden data line" that doesn't exist. "You ruined the pc.!" is not a valid statement. "You violated HCO B _______ page _______ " is the charge. No auditor may be disciplined for asking, "May I please have the tape or HCO B that was violated so I can read it or go to Cramming." If it isn't on a tape, a book or an HCO B IT IS NOT TRUE and no auditor has to accept any criticism that is not based on the actual source data. "If it isn't written it isn't true" is the best defense and the best way to improve your tech. These are the rights of the auditor with relation to a C/S. They are all technical rights based on sound principles. An auditor should know them and use them. If an auditor stands on these rights and gets beaten down he should put all the facts before his nearest OTL or SO ship as something would be very wrong somewhere. Auditing is a happy business -- when it is done right. LRH:nt.jh Copyright $c 1970, 1971 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [OTL means Operation-Transport Liaison which was a Sea Organization office that managed orgs or an area and was a forerunner of the Flag Operations Liaison Office (FOLO).] 363  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=24/8/71 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  ASSISTS ADDITION   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 24 AUGUST 1971 Issue II Remimeo ASSISTS ADDITION (Refers to HCO B 23 July 71 which revised HCO B 15 Mar 71) In running Version A and Version B of a Hold it Still temperature assist DO NOT RUN IT OVER OUT RUDS. Often a pc is ill because his ruds in life are out. The Temperature Assist will only fail if the pc had an In Life ARC Break, Present Time Problem or Withhold. Sometimes these alone will change the temperature for the better. Each rud of course must be taken Earlier Similar to F/N if no F/N on the first answer given to a rud. So Add to Version A C/S at the start: 0. Fly all ruds. And to Version B C/S at the start: 0. Fly all ruds. These are done with the pc holding the cans. The walkabout version is done off the cans but checked. Overrun is rehabbed. If no rehab then flatten by further running. When the pc off the cans in Version B has a cognition he should be put back on the cans and checked. Usually an F/N will be found. It has not been fully determined how many times a pc can be run on "Hold it Still". But if the pc has been run before on the process and does not run, it should be checked for overrun and rehabbed. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:sb.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 364  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=25/8/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Auditor Admin Series 2 C/S Series 56 HOW TO GET RESULTS IN AN HGC   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 25 AUGUST 1971 Re-issued 2 November 1972 as Remimeo Auditor Admin Series 2 C/S Series 56 HOW TO GET RESULTS IN AN HGC Obtaining excellent case results is an ADMINISTRATIVE not a wholly technical function. Auditors and C/Ses are often weak on Administrative. They think general tech results improve only by more tech study. If they continue to think this way they wind up squirreling. For they are working on a wrong target for improvement, a wrong WHY or reason. Auditing is a team activity. The day of the individual country doctor is dead. Even if an individual field auditor starts out as an individual he goes one of two directions -- he overworks and squirrels himself into failure or he builds up a team -- may only be a receptionist and an apprentice auditor but he is still building up a team. I have never seen individual auditors succeed over a long period. Failing to form or become part of a team, they eventually fade out or squirrel. The reason is simple enough. These rules apply: TO IMPROVE TECH RESULTS YOU MUST IMPROVE ADMINISTRATION. And I don't mean just writing better in folders. DEFINITION ADMINISTRATION consists of the formation and handling of the lines and terminals involved in production. Unless an auditor understands this fully, he will never insist on a Tech Sec, a Tech Establishment Officer, D of P, C/S, Examiner, Pages, Folder Admin and himself will begin to omit keeping a Folder Summary and then omit the session actions and then, with big loses, retire from it all. If I were an auditor and saw some of these things missing, I'd be liable to say, "Are you guys kidding? I thought we were here to audit pcs." Without the correct pattern of lines and terminals YOU DON'T GET RESULTS, you get headaches, mad neighbors and refunds. Auditing on lines, an auditor should regard himself as a highly skilled expert, a technical specialist whose work requires respect and service. And Case Supervising on lines, a Case Supervisor should consider himself a sort of Czar whose word is so law even the Exec Director thinks several times before he approaches -- duly servile of course and bowing the prescribed three times as he exits. 365 A Class XII on Flag is listened to by others with a hush even if he is only commenting on the weather. These are the stars of the team. Their worldwide reputation for smooth flubless auditing is an administrative result! Short of space, overloaded, short of admin personnel, turning out the highest well done hours in the world, Flag's Div IV produces because of an Admin system. The highest of these C/Ses and auditors goes to Cramming if he misplaces a comma or drops a TR 1. If the sessions' exams at Examiner drop from 90% F/N the whole place gets overhauled. Folders are Folder Error Summaried by an FES section. The Folder Summary is kept up each session (or Cramming). The folder is studied and C/Sed. The D of P assigns the sessions. The C/S is done correctly (or Cramming). The folder travels on its lines. The tests are done. In short it is a complex but constantly flowing pattern of moving pcs, folders and examinations interspersed with testing and interviews and re- registration. There is a right way to do it. RESULTS If an org has only 65% of its sessions F/N VGIs at Examiner the right answer is to organize the place. Why? Well, the first answer is that the third dynamic is stronger than the first dynamic. An auditor auditing alone is a first dynamic. The pc is a first dynamic. As it is the auditor plus pc that must be greater than the reactive mind, one can easily work the rest out. If the auditor is part of a functioning third dynamic, not just an individual, the auditor plus pc versus the bank is a LOT more than the bank. Another answer is that an auditor knows the pc, if only because of sessions, and personal opinion enters into it. That is not a pure technical view as a C/S's must be. Another answer is that an auditor in a group gets more auditing done. Individually practicing auditors often fail because nobody is taking care of the auditor as a person. Further they get loses. No one sends them to Cramming. When they get loses they often start squirreling. Then they really get loses. That ends them as auditors. An auditor working in a good on policy organization is given service. He does get sent to Cramming. He does keep his tech updated. He gets wins. When he doesn't he's put back on standard tech. So he happily keeps going and makes lots of happy people. So if I were auditing in a group I would insist as a condition of work that Div IV and Div V be good on policy divisions, fully organized with no nonsense. I know whereof I speak. As a part-time duty I work as a consulting C/S with a good IV and a good V. Sometimes I have had to take over the whole C/S line. When the organization bogs in any way I know the whole thing is heading toward 366 single-handing the lot. So I get the lines back in and get people to Cramming and get the F/N at Examiner ratio approaching 100% again. Thus, the advice you get about C/Sing is live-live-live, not canned theory. ORG WINS Being on administrative lines to all orgs, I can tell you point-blank that THEIR STATS DEPEND ON THEIR VOLUME AND QUALITY OF SERVICE. That isn't propaganda. It's pure fact. The F/N-no F/N at Examiner ratio tells you at once if Divs IV and V are organized and operating or if they are just fooling about. At 50% to 75% F/N at Examiner the administrative functions of Divs IV and V are stinking bad. C/S Series 25 is out. Cramming is out. Hidden data lines exist. HCO Bs, books and tapes are not used. The public, at that % of F/N, will stay away in droves. Registrars will go batty and adopt "Hot Prospect Systems". The staff will go low pay and the execs will be a perpetual dark shade of purple from yelling. The cash-bills ratio will be the subject of finance missions and the neighbors will be phoning the police. Why? Because an org is itself a technical delivery organization and 50% to 75% F/N at Examiner is an overt product. The Academy has already failed to apply student study tech and word clearing. Qual is a joke. There is no library of tech available and if available isn't read. The org as a tech service delivery unit is treating its public to a no- auditing situation and will get in trouble. REMEDY The way to remedy is to get on policy with tech organization. Put in a Qual with word clearing and a library and cramming. Put in the C/S Series 25 Tech lines. Tolerate NO out-tech or out-admin in folders. Dummy run the lines until they're in. Cram Cram Cram C/S and auditor and tech personnel flubs whenever they occur. Get the organization functioning. Your F/N at Examiner ratio will climb straight up to 90% 95% 98%. By actual test pcs will flood in, Reg lines will get easy, success stats soar. More auditors more C/Ses, more organization. A second, a third HGC. And the more thoroughly the admin lines are manned the better the tech lines work. 367 This conclusion came from actual inspections of orgs and studies of their stats. Orgs should be selling more training than processing. But why train if you can't interne them in a good Qual and HGC? They'll never amount to anything as auditors unless they work in an organization that is on tech and on policy. So you need an HGC. Tech, done in a proper administrative framework, works. Some orgs really don't believe they could ever attain the flubless auditing quality of Flag. But they can. It is even easy. It is even easier to attain flubless quality of auditing than any other kind. You put in a real on policy admin pattern in IV and V. You begin with a Qual Interne Course. You send to Cramming for any C/S or auditing error no matter how minute. The results come up. The errors cease. You're a success! If you do it. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971, 1972 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 368  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=30/8/71 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  STUDENT COMPLETIONS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 30 AUGUST 1971 Issue I (REPLACED by BTB 30 Aug 71RD) Remimeo STUDENT COMPLETIONS For statistical purposes a STUDENT COMPLETION must be PAID, must have passed EXAMINATION and must have an acceptable success story given by him to Success. Any quickie or incompetent completion falsifies the statistic and is subject to discipline. The completion list follows: 1. Student Hat counts 1. 2. Mini Course counts 1. 3. TR Course counts 2. 4. Theory portion of any classification course incl HDC counts 5. 5. Practical portion of any class incl HDC counts 5. 6. OK Interne to Audit as an Interne counts 5. 7. OK to Audit as an HGC Auditor counts 5. 8. OEC each Part counts 5. 9. Exec Cramming Course counts 1. 10. Course Super Mini Course counts 5. 11. Auditor Drills Course counts 5. 12. Supervisor Drills Course counts 5. 13. Int-Ext Pack or other such packs counts 1. 14. TR Course Super Course counts 2. 15. SO/WW ED 46R. Counts 5 for course and all drills. Any course whose value is unknown is to be queried of Training and Services Bureau CLO. For every 9 public points paid there can be 1 point added for any crew or staff completion. Retread courses count half. Penalties: Blown Academy Student 10 points. Blown or incomplete TR Student 5 points. 369 SH & AO The following points are valid for SHs and AOs in addition to the above which are also valid in these orgs. 16. Class V and VI 15 points. 17. Solo Course 10 points. 18. Clearing Course 5 points. 19. OT I 3 points. 20. OT II 3 points. 21. OT III 5 points. 22. OT III X 5 points. 23. OT IV 3 points. 24. OT V 3 points. 25. OT VI 3 points. 26. OT VII 3 points. 27. OT VIII 3 points (when released). 28. OT IX 3 points (when released). 29. OT X 3 points (when released). 30. Class VII 15 points. 31. Class VIII 15 points. 32. Class IX (HSST) 15 points. 33. Class X 5 points. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:sb.jh Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [This HCO B was revised four times by issues not written by LRH, the latest of which is BTB 30 August 1971 RD, Issue I, Revised 15 May 1975, Paid Completion Points -- Pc Completions, Student Completions and Internship Completions.] 370  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=30/8/71 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  PC COMPLETIONS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 30 AUGUST 1971 Issue II (REVISED -- see HCO B 30 Aug 71RC II Volume VIII -- 214) Remimeo PC COMPLETIONS For statistical purposes an Audited Completion must be PAID and have attested with an F/N VGIs and written a Success Story for the action. Any quickie or incompetent completion falsifies the statistic and is subject to fine or penalty. The Completions List follows: 1. Interiorization-Exteriorization Rundown. 1. 2. Life Repair. 1. 3. Student Rescue Intensive. 1. 4. Progress Pgm. 1. 5. Hubbard Consultant (HC) List (Data Series). 1. 6. Word Clearing Method One. 2. 7. C/S Series 54. (Pc Assessment Form and handling.) 2. 8. Drugs, Medicine, Alcohol Class VIII Remedy (3-way recall, secondaries, engrams). 1. 9. Pains Somatics Emotion each reading drug. 1. 10. Prior Assmt to Drugs. 1. 11. Dianetics Completion. 2 points. 12. ARC Str Wire Triple. 1. (No credit Singles.) 13. Each Expanded Grade. 2. (No credit Single or Triple Lower Grades.) 14. HCO B 24 July 69. 1 point. 15. Assists. 1/2 point. 16. Auditing Repair. 1/2 point. 17. GF Method 5 Handled if not part of a Repair. 1/2 point. 18. GF 40 Expanded fully handled, lists and engrams, by itself whether part of a program or not. 2 points. 19. C/S Series 53 handled to F/N on all items whether part of a pgm or not. 1 point. 20. Incidental RDs such as Money Process. 1/2 point. 21. L10 Full List of actions. 10 points. PENALTY 1 point loss for every percent below 90% F/N VGIs Examiner for the previous day. Example: 75% only F/N VGIs = 15 point loss. GAIN: Add one point for every percent above 90% F/N VGIs at Examiner. 371 For every 9 points made 1 point may be added for staff auditing. Student Co-Auditing: There are no points calculated or used for student co-auditing completions or for free public completions done by students or public as these can be part of student completion requirements. SH and AO 22. Power Set-up GF+40 Method 5 and Handle. 2 points. 23. POWER Single. 5 points. 24. POWER TRIPLE (when released). 10 points. 25. Complete your case items as per regular auditing as above. 26. Any OT Review. 1 point. 27. OT VII. 5 points. Any omitted or added RD to be given points on request from Tr & Serv Aide CLO. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:sb.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [This HCO B was revised by HCO B 30 August 1971 R, Issue II, Revised 16 November 1972, Pc Completions -- Revised, which was not written by LRH. This was then revised on 21 October 1973 and 23 October 1973 by LRH. These were revised by HCO B 30 August 1971RC, Issue II, Revised 6 February 1974, Pc Completions -- Second Revision, Volume VIII, page 214, which was added to by BTB 8 December 1974, Additional Completion Points. The two latter issues are replaced by BTB 30 August 1971 RD, Issue I, Revised 15 May 1975, Paid Completion Points -- Pc Completions, Student Completions and Internship Completions.] 372  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=31/8/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Word Clearing Series 16R CONFUSED IDEAS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 31 AUGUST 1971 REVISED Remimeo Word Clearing Series 16R CONFUSED IDEAS Whenever a person has a confused idea of something or believes there is some conflict of ideas IT IS ALWAYS TRUE THAT A MISUNDERSTOOD WORD EXISTS AT THE BOTTOM OF THAT CONFUSION. Example: "I just don't understand this idea of opposing forces. I think it all ought to be rewritten and...." Method 2 Word Clearer: "Is there any word there you don't understand?" READ! STUDENT: "Oh no, I understand all the words. It's ....... " "What word is this that's reading on the meter?" "Er... ah... Forces?" "Yes, that reads and blows down. Let's look it up." "Oh no, I know what it means. It's the idea that ....... " "Let's look it up!" "Well, all right. Let's see D... E... F... FO... FORCES. Here it is. 'That which changes the motion of a body on which it acts.'" WD CLEARER: "Use it in a sentence several times." Student does. "... er... ah. I've got it. Hell I thought it meant police brutality! Couldn't figure out why two police forces would fight!" Word Clearer: "Now how do you feel about this idea of opposing forces?" "Oh, let's see. Why that's clear enough. Just like I'd never read it before!" METER: F/N. Every green body of students will argue and fuss about ideas or confusions in the directions or material they are given to read. They will generate weird ideas and erroneous concepts of what the text says. They do wrong things and say the text said to. They ask strange ideas of their instructors. They clamor for "clarifications". AND AT THE BOTTOM OF ALL THIS IS SIMPLY MISUNDERSTOOD WORDS. There is not also misunderstood ideas. There is only the misunderstood word which breeds, then, huge towering wrong ideas. A MISUNDERSTOOD WORD BREEDS STRANGE IDEAS. 373 [GRAPHICS INSERTED] Confused Concepts Or Ideas Of Material Misunderstood Word Detectable Only By Meter Picture of A Student's Mind L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 374  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=1/9/71 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 57 A C/S AS A TRAINING OFFICER A PROGRAM FOR FLUBLESS AUDITING   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 1 SEPTEMBER 1971 Issue I Remimeo C/S Series 57 A C/S AS A TRAINING OFFICER A PROGRAM FOR FLUBLESS AUDITING It is wholly and entirely up to the C/S whether or not his auditors ever come to be FLUBLESS AUDITORS. Auditing flubs are the main things that make a C/S's job long and hard and the main thing that denies his pcs high results. For example -- with competent auditors I can C/S the day's folders in 2 1/2 hours. With green flubby auditors the same number of folders takes 6 1/2 hours. The answer plainly is to groove the auditors in until they are flubless. And this is what a competent C/S does. Because he has internes on his lines and because any group of auditors can be bettered, the training officer part of the C/S hat is one which is always worn. Also, if the Tech-Qual administrative set-up is nonextant or a confused mess, the errors in folders and various upsets react suppressively both on the C/S and auditors and they -- both C/S and auditors -- make mistakes. So the administrative lines and terminals must be there. Thus a C/S out of self-defense is not merely a training officer of auditors but of other Tech-Qual personnel as well. Officially this hat belongs with the other terminals. But to coordinate the operation, the C/S has to have a large amount of know-how about the lines and terminals of Tech and Qual. As it is the C/S who is directing the running of cases and as the lines and terminals exist only to obtain auditing results in volume with high quality, no C/S can afford to neglect his duties as a training officer. Otherwise he will promptly drown. The folder flow must be smooth with no flaps. The auditor-pc assignments must be smooth with no lost auditing time. The sessions must occur. The auditors who flub must be promptly handled. The Cramming Officer in Qual must know his business. The C/S depends on him to get the kinks out of the auditors' tech and its application. The processing must be paid for adequately or there will be no funds to hire enough terminals and, indeed, there would be no HGC at all. The C/S is trying to obtain Volume, Quality and Viability. By experience volume comes from the whole org working and the auditors auditing correctly without lost hours spent in fumbles and repairs. Quality comes from smooth Tech-Qual lines and hatted terminals and the auditors auditing flublessly. It is not that the C/S is in charge of the whole org. But every point where a C/S is having trouble is where an org terminal has broken down. Therefore a C/S has every right to INSIST upon hatted functioning terminals. The C/S has a definite effect upon the efficiency of an org's personnel. He can ensure the staff gets audited either on his lines or from Dept 13. And he can insist on quality staff staff auditing for it will help keep his own post going. 375 Tech works. It works splendidly. The materials are there. Read, understood and applied, FLUBLESS AUDITING occurs. It is so easy to C/S just for cases using standard actions. All puzzles come from FLUBS. The sequence of actions a C/S should take to attain Flubless Auditing could be listed more or less in this order. 1. Make sure his own tech is up to date and do part-time study or retread where needed. _______ 2. Make sure he has no misunderstood words the length and breadth of the subject. _______ Get Word Clearing Method 2 on every major tech writing, each HCO B or P/L if it comes to that. Then get Word Clearing Method 1 to full EP. _______ 3. Practice locating the bugs in "failed cases" or "dog cases" long in auditing until the C/S knows it was an application failure, an auditor failure or a former C/S failure. _______ 4. Study out the terminals and lines necessary IN YOUR ORG, physically going over them, to (a) Get a pc in. _______ (b) Get an auditor employed. _______ (c) Get a pc assigned to an auditor. _______ (d) Get auditor and pc together in an auditing room. _______ (e) Get the pc examined. _______ (f) Get the folder turned in for C/Sing. _______ (g) Get an auditor to Cramming and back. _______ (h) Get a pc to Ethics and handled. _______ (i) Get a D of P to interview pcs, muster auditors, do assignments and other D of P duties. _______ (j) Get a pc to attest. _______ (k) Get a pc to Success. _______ (l) Get folders FESed. _______ (m) Get folders stored and found. _______ (n) Get folders made up or neatly covered. _______ (o) Get supplies for auditors. _______ (p) Get an area for auditor admin. _______ (q) Get an area for pcs to wait. _______ (r) Get the various boards made and kept up. _______ (s) Get stats kept and reported. _______ (t) Get bonuses paid. _______ (u) Get pcs handled when adrift on lines. _______ (v) Get a Qual in. _______ (w) Do his own job. _______ (x) How to get and keep all this and any more points going all at once rapidly. _______ He will now know the scene and can achieve a more ideal scene 376 by insisting the Org Officer (emergency) or the HAS (permanently) handle. Now it all gets less confusing as one understands what is out when it is out. _______ 5. Set up a close fast line with the Cramming Officer so that auditors who flub are in actual fact rapidly straightened out and gotten back to auditing without great time loss. _______ 6. Fend off and refuse to give tech advice as such. KNOW WORD CLEARING SERIES 16 THOROUGHLY and get a great reality on it and insist that the Qual Sec and Cramming Officer know it, use it and hammer away with it. Otherwise such weird tech confusions will be floating about that even the C/S gets confused and begins to wonder if the material IS in the books and bulletins! _______ 7. Gather up a Tech and Admin Library for fast reference for personal use. _______ 8. Get in a system whereby every flub by an auditor, a D of P, a Div IV or V Admin personnel, a page, anyone that flubs as it affects the C/S in ANY way gets a Cramming chit with the exact reference to be crammed on. Keep a carbon of the chit, send the original to Cramming, get the chit back when done and marked off on the carbon. Keep the Admin of it simple but the execution of it TOTALLY effective. _______ 9. The Qual Sec, Cramming Officer and Interne Supervisor are the close technical links with the C/S. In technical matters the C/S is senior. Sometimes the C/S is sent to Cramming by the Qual Sec and should accept and do it gracefully. Sometimes there is a Senior C/S in the org (the Assistant Guardian, ED or some other senior exec may be an HSST or even a Class X). In such a case he has the right to cram or send any of these terminals (or any other terminal) to Cramming. Including any Senior C/S, and including any C/S for another Department or for crew or in the Guardian's Office, these terminals constitute the tech hierarchy of the org: Senior C/S, C/Ses, Qual Sec, Cramming Officer and the Interne Supervisor and they have to hold a hard technical line. The Tech Sec is mainly concerned with production and administration and a Tech Establishment Officer is concerned with establishing. It can happen that a Tech Sec or TEO are also very well trained technically and if so are part of this technical hierarchy but they are not necessarily so. Therefore there is a sort of ex-officio technical committee on the subject of technical matters composed generally of the Senior C/S, C/Ses, Qual Sec, Cramming Officer and Interne Supervisor that monitors the quality of HGC and Dept 10 auditing. The Director of Training can be advised concerning the results of his students after graduation in order to remedy his training and as such is a part of the Committee, as can be the Tech Sec. Most narrowly and most continually Tech quality is between the C/S and the Cramming Officer. More widely, the Senior C/S, Qual Sec and Interne Supervisor enter in. And in the widest sense, the Tech Sec, Tech Establishment Officer and Director of Training enter in. It is an error to suppose the C/S and auditors are the technical monitors of the org. They are the main technical personnel. But a C/S can waste tons of time by talking to or with auditors beyond an auditors' conference and can really get whizzing if he spends the same time with the Cramming Officer who then crams auditors and with the Interne Super who then persuades internes to function. Knowing who is as important in organization as knowing how. So hold some meetings small and large and thresh out the bugs. _______ 10. Missing materials is a C/S point of upset. "What is a Course" Policy Letter can be out on tech courses to a degree that you wouldn't believe. Not only no routing form or roll book but NO MATERIALS. 377 The Books, HCO Bs, tapes MUST be available. They exist. It is suppressive to run a course without them. Pubs Org, CLOs have them. Financial Planning can't deny this necessity as they're what their income comes from. Qual MUST have a complete and safeguarded library for use in Cramming actions. Under Omitted Materials would be omitted meters and at this writing there is no restriction on these and supply is abundant. The "no materials" gag is the last straw for a C/S. Future auditors won't have a clue and current auditors will have no way to find out. So the C/S must not permit "economy" or plain laziness or "we sent a despatch three months ago" to get in the road of materials. IT IS CHEAPER TO PUT SOMEBODY ON A PLANE WITH A CHEQUE TO BRING THEM BACK than to do without materials. So a C/S should definitely defend himself against a "no materials" blockage and handle it. _______ 11. No Study. When one has materials and particularly when one is getting new materials a breakdown can occur when the materials, especially new ones, aren't read. A technical person must keep up with the advances in technology. That is true of any profession. A primary failure of new technology is (you won't believe it but it is true) the materials aren't read before the process is tried! I have even caught Class IXs out on this, believe it or not, so don't think it can't happen. Process G is received. Auditors audit it. Process falls. Why? Auditors never read the bulletin first! SO BE SURE YOUR AUDITORS READ THE MATERIALS AND CHECK OUT BEFORE THEY DO THE PROCESS. Write C/Ses like this -- "Auditor to Cramming to check out on HCO B _______ . When attested, do the following 1. _______ ." Do this on new materials and, on new auditors, on any materials you believe he may goof. Why have the first 12 pcs on Process G go sour just because the auditor only glanced at the commands and missed the tech? Interiorization Rundowns are still in this category in some areas. The auditor doesn't study and Clay demo the pack before doing them. So they fail. Now and then Power hits the same snag. So, simple as it seems, get new materials read and checked out in Cramming as the first part of a C/S on them! And get new materials read. And keep up on them yourself. _______ 12. Hidden Data Line trouble can wreck an HGC (and the org and field). A "Hidden Data Line" is a pretense that certain data exists outside of HCO Bs, books and tapes. It can include "data in HCO Bs is conflicting" and "nowhere does it say how to _______ ". This is deadly and a C/S should work hard to stamp it out. THE CAUSES OF A HIDDEN DATA LINE OR IMAGINED CONFLICTS IS A FAILURE TO USE WORD 378 CLEARING METHODS TWO AND THREE ON COURSES AND A FAILURE TO USE AND ONLY USE METHOD TWO IN CRAMMING. A C/S can go straight up the wall trying to grapple with these omissions and eventually begin to believe that it takes 500 Cramming chits to make an auditor who still isn't made and that flubless auditing can't be done from HCO Bs, books and tapes. As soon as a C/S finds his Cramming orders getting too thick he should check (a) Is Method 2 (meter) Word Clearing used hard in Cramming as a first action? (b) Are Methods 2 and 3 Word Clearing in use constantly on tech courses? (c) Is Method 1 Word Clearing (full rundown) available and faultlessly done on every auditor? Get these points IN. Poof! The Hidden Data Line vanishes. (See Word Clearing Series 16.) Word Clearing has been around for years but people sometimes are themselves so fogged by misunderstood words that they don't hear you at all when you say USE WORD CLEARING! _______ 13. Invalidation kills auditors. So don't chew on them any harder than is necessary to get the job done. Get "To Cramming" to mean, "normal procedure even for Class XIIs. We had one student who every evening gasped with relief that he hadn't been sent to Cramming. We finally found out that he was really terrified he would be found out for false study stats! Only when an auditor refuses to go to Cramming do you begin to push. The auditor sent to Cramming to do an action must not do the action on another pc until he has been to Cramming on it. This can "hold up production" in somebody's mind. But how an auditor can produce anything while flubbing is someone else's misunderstood, not mine. He can't. Better five hours in Cramming and one good session than no Cramming and five goofed sessions. The real invalidation of an auditor is failing at tech. So don't let them fail. "Johnny, your TRs are too hard to hear. Get over to Cramming and get hearable" is perfectly acceptable. If it is correct. So Invalidation could be defined as (a) letting an auditor lose (b) correcting things he does right. That's about the extent of invalidation. _______ 14. Auditor morale depends not on PR (Public Relations) or phoney stats. It depends on actual, honest completions. A well trained auditor allowed to get completions will have high morale. Thus, a C/S must push an auditor toward (a) Flubless tech (b) Completions. You keep pushing and he'll make it. 379 You don't push or push on the wrong things and he won't. As to completions try to get auditors to do the whole program so something is completed. This is for the auditor not the pc. The Auditor's Code on a frequent change of auditors was written for pcs. But it also applies to auditors. Let them complete programs. Even if they spend half the day in Cramming. Don't yank them off cases. And don't let your D of P assign auditors to different cases or he'll soon have downtone apathetic auditors who never see what their auditing finally does for one particular pc. Auditor Morale has little to do with anything but the above two things. Also if you have those two things in as a C/S, you will see something new happen. Pcs will be around slapping auditors on the back and cheering the org and the place becomes a very happy place. So work for auditor morale with pushing them relentlessly toward flubless tech and toward completions. _______ The above actions are numbered. If a C/S were to work to get these in, one by one, and if he then went over them again and again, he would wind up about the most complimented upstat C/S anywhere around. These are the giant points to get in while plugging along each day C/Sing the usual and handling the noise. The way to get out of cope is to organize. And these fourteen points give a sequence of organizational steps that lift one out of cope and into a smooth productive time of it. The org would become very prosperous. The staff would be very happy. The field would be delighted. Just remember that when you reach an average 700 well done auditing hours, you better have a new C/S in training and persuade him to follow himself these 14 points in a new and necessary additional HGC. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:sb.nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 380  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=2/9/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Word Clearing Series 17 WORDS AND POSTS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 2 SEPTEMBER 1971 Remimeo Word Clearing Series 17 WORDS AND POSTS Those who do not want their posts generally do not know what their posts are. The reason they do not know what their posts are is a host of misunderstood basic words connected with that post. Put a person on a meter: Have the person read some of the material relating to his post or hat, beginning with the most basic material about it and starting at the very top of the first page, including even the heading and issue numbers. Watch the meter carefully. Halt the person at each read and whether he says he knows the meaning or not, if it read, have him look it up in a good (big) dictionary. Have him use the word in sentences of his own invention. Make him do this as long as it is bringing the TA down. If you get into trouble with him go back and find the misunderstood you missed. Keep hunting and keep working at it and his misunderstood words will blow and his inability to understand the post will blow. EXPLANATION Failed posts and duties trace back to misunderstood words. Until you see it you won't believe it. One student who had studied his post for a third of a year was given Method 2 on its materials. It took 15 hours of Method 2 work, protests, blows, upsets to finally discover that he did not know what POST meant! OR what the words in the title meant. Another person studied half a year to be an administrator. Yet when he was given his personnel orders appointing him, and Method 2 was done on them, in the first 50 words of the personnel order there were 13 individual misunderstood words each one of which related to the post and were simple English. A similar ratio continued throughout the personnel order. He was about to fail with a fanfare. Behind post failure the explanation IS misunderstood words. Psychosis (evil intention) is the only other reason for failure but even this can be handled by auditing today. And even psychosis lessens when misunderstood words are handled. SUCCESSES It is not difficult to use Method 2 Word Clearing. One must be able to handle ARC Breaks, Problems and withholds and read a meter. One must have a very big dictionary available when little ones fail. One must be persistent and not buy explanations or let the person run away. And the Successes one has are fantastic! LRH:sb.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright $c 1971 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 381  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=4/9/71 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Word Clearing Series 19 ALTERATIONS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 4 SEPTEMBER 1971 Issue II Remimeo Word Clearing Series 19 ALTERATIONS There is a basic law in Word Clearing: AT THE BOTTOM OF ALL ALTERATION OF MEANING OR ACTION IS A MISUNDERSTOOD WORD. This law at once explains why communication, ideas or application become falsified, twisted and corrupted. This law is of great use in Word Clearing: A. It indicates who has to be word cleared FAST, at once, NOW, before duties go off the rails any further. B. It detects the area just before which there is a misunderstood word. A is useful to the administrator. Knowing it and knowing Word Clearing and being able to do it himself or get it done, he can avoid wholesale dismissals, frantic transfers, general inefficiency and organizational strain. B is very useful to the Word Clearer. Example of B. A person can do everything on an order except "File the Folders" which he insists on delivering to a wrong room. Look over the order and find where in it it talks about filing folders. Just above or beside that will be a misunderstood word. Locate it, get it identified, defined and used in sentences. The person can suddenly file folders! Just BEFORE or WITH the point a person begins to alter will be found a misunderstood word. Thus 1. Discover what a person alters. 2. Find what came just before that. 3. Find the misunderstood word. 4. Get it looked up. 5. Get it used in sentences as long as it moves a meter tone arm. 6. End off on F/N VGIs. The ability to do it straight will have been returned. It is very magical. LRH:sb.rd Copyright $c 1971 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 382  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=4/9/71 Volnum=0 Issue=3 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Word Clearing Series 20 SIMPLE WORDS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 4 SEPTEMBER 1971 Issue III Remimeo Word Clearing Series 20 SIMPLE WORDS You might suppose at once that it is the BIG words or the technical words which are most misunderstood. This is NOT the case. On actual test, it was English simple words and NOT Dianetics and Scientology words which prevented understanding. For some reason Dianetics and Scientology words are more easily grasped than simple English. Words like "a", "the", "exist", "such" and other "everybody knows" words show up with great frequency when doing a Method 2 Word Clearing. They read. It takes a BIG dictionary to define these simple words fully. This is another oddity. The small dictionaries also suppose everybody knows. It is almost incredible to see that a university graduate has gone through years and years of study of complex subjects and yet does not know what "or" or "by" or "an" means. It has to be seen to be believed. Yet when cleaned up his whole education turns from a solid mass of question marks to a clean useful view. A test of schoolchildren in Johannesburg once showed that Intelligence DECREASED with each new year of school! The answer to the puzzle was simply that each year they added a few dozen more crushing misunderstood words onto an already confused vocabulary that no one ever got them to look up. Stupidity is the effect of misunderstood words. In those areas which give Man the most trouble you will find the most alteration of fact, the most confused and conflicting ideas and of course the greatest number of misunderstood words. Take "economics" for example. The subject of psychology began its texts by saying they did not know what the word means. So the subject itself never arrived. Professor Wundt of Leipzig University in 1879 perverted the term. It really means just "a study (ology) of the soul (psyche)". But Wundt, working under the eye of Bismarck, the greatest of German military fascists, at the height of German war ambitions, had to deny Man had a soul. So there went the whole subject! Men were thereafter animals (it is all right to kill animals) and Man had no soul, so the word psychology could no longer be defined. THE EARLIEST MISUNDERSTOOD WORD IN A SUBJECT IS A KEY TO LATER MISUNDERSTOOD WORDS IN THAT SUBJECT. "HCO B" (Hubbard Communications Office Bulletin), "Remimeo" (Orgs which receive this must mimeograph it again and distribute it to staff), "TR" (Training Drill), 383 "Issue I" (first issue of that date), are the commonest misunderstoods. Because they occur at the beginning of an HCO B! Then come words like "a", "the" and other simple English as the next words that often read. In studying a foreign language it is often found that the grammar words of one's own language that tell about the grammar in the foreign language are basic to not being able to learn the foreign language. The test of whether the person understands a word is "does it read on the meter as a fall when he reads the word in the material being cleared". That a person says he knows the meaning is not acceptable. Have him look it up no matter how simple the word is. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:sb.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 384  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=6/9/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Word Clearing Series 21 CORRECT SEQUENCE QUALIFICATIONS OF WORD CLEARERS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 6 SEPTEMBER 1971 Remimeo Word Clearing Series 21 CORRECT SEQUENCE QUALIFICATIONS OF WORD CLEARERS The principal methods of word clearing are numbered No. 1 for the full in- session rundown, No. 2 for the metered action of clearing up words in specific materials and No. 3 for looking up words seen and not understood by the student or reader. This is correct sequence for doing the three types of word clearing. By doing No. 1 in full session, using the list for assessment, one obtains the basic word and meaning errors of the past. By getting these out of the way, it is now possible to clean up current materials much more rapidly with Method 2, where the person is put on a meter and reads the material to another who is watching the meter and catching each read. With Method 1 out of the way, Method 2 becomes more rapid. Method 3 will then be done by the person himself because he now knows better. No. 2 and No. 3 can be used on and on one or the other. If you do it backwards, beginning with Method No. 3, much more time is consumed. If Method No. 2 is used without No. 1 being done, much more work has to be done to clean up an existing piece of study material or text. So the correct sequence is No. 1, No. 2 and then No. 3. This does not mean you cannot start with No. 3 or No. 2. It just means it is much faster to do them in correct sequence. PURPOSE CLEARING When purpose of the post is to be cleared it is done after Method No. 1 in general and Method No. 2 has been done on the duties and texts of the post. With all such material handled with word clearing it is time then to do a Purpose Clearing of the person's job or situation in life. PROGRAM Thus a general program could be laid down as 1. Handle all ARC Breaks, present time problems and withholds, or set up the case with a Progress Program. 2. Method No. 1 Word Clearing. 3. Method No. 2 Word Clearing on the materials or duties the person has. 4. Purpose Clearing of the purpose of the post. 385 (In choosing the materials to be cleared in No. 3 above choose the texts, handbooks or materials most closely related to the post and most basic to the post.) (In choosing the post, if the person is not employed remember that "student", "housewife" and even "a human being" are posts.) WD CLEARING WD CLEARERS When there is no qualified word clearer to word clear others, the program is changed for the word clearer to: 1. Choose 2 word clearers who then work on each other. 2. Any Progress Program for each one. 3. Word Clear the Word Clearing Series by Method 2. 4. Check out on the auditing required for Method 1. 5. Do Method No. 1 on each other. 6. Do Purpose Clearing on each other. This greatly reduces any errors in application. (Note: A "Progress Program" or a "Repair Program" is a Scientology auditing program to clean up upsets in life.) ("ARC Break" means A-Affinity, R-Reality, C-Communication, a break in any one of the three which has caused upset in the past.) (A Class III Academy Auditor qualification is required to do Method No. 1 as the action requires assessing and the handling of ARC Breaks, problems and withholds, for which a Class III is trained. Anyone who is able to handle a meter is qualified to do Method No. 2. Any person can do Method No. 3.) (Purpose Clearing also requires a Class III Academy Auditor.) (By "meter" throughout this series is meant an "E-Meter" which means an "electro-psychometer", an instrument which measures emotional reaction by tiny electrical impulses generated by thought.) L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 386  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=7/9/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 58 PROGRAMMING CASES BACKWARDS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 7 SEPTEMBER 1971 Remimeo C/S Series 58 PROGRAMMING CASES BACKWARDS When you see a case that has struggled along through 200 hours of processing without much gain you sometimes see a C/S has only recently ordered, or has not ordered at all as yet, an Interiorization RD check and a Green Form No. 40 Expanded. That would be programming backwards. The tools of auditing are the Grade Chart Processes and the numerous correction lists. Like a gardener, a C/S has the choice of numerous tools to raise a flower. If you were to see a gardener digging holes with the lawn mower and cutting grass with a spade, you would say he needed to be checked out on the use of his tools, what each is for. Similarly, running Power on someone who needs Dianetics, doing a life repair on someone who is ready for R6EW, would be a misuse of tools. Similarly, going on auditing someone on Dianetics who desperately needs his ruds put in or an Interiorization Rundown is wasting auditing and messing up a preclear. Let me give you some examples I have seen recently: A. Case audited through many major actions since his Int RD. Auditor and C/S in despair. Pc not progressing. A C/S 53 disclosed the Int RD was faulty and its repair was also faulty. Int Rundown was handled. Case began to run. Months of auditing had been wasted. Needed had been a C/S 53 where out Int would have shown. B. After 200 or more hours of no change in his personality graph (Oxford Capacity Analysis) the pc came up with the withhold that he was a homosexual and also that he did not know what "Scientology" meant. About 2 years of auditing had been wasted. Needed had been Word Clearing and rudiments. C. After scores of hours of no-win auditing and no graph change it was finally decided to run a GF 40X and found the person practiced witchcraft! D. After a year of auditing on major grades all wasted it was finally found that the person had had a leg injury he was trying to cure that required only a simple Dianetic assist. Today that would be a C/S 54. He had never had a Pc Assessment Form. E. After racing from POWER to OT III without doing any real auditing or having any change, it was found on a GF 40X that the whole world had been unreal and the person could not begin to face the idea of looking at pictures or the bunk and had not been able to since her first drug experiences. Needed had been Objective Processes, CCHs, Op Pro by Dup, etc which get a drug addict to look and be aware. All these are simple if flagrant errors in ordering the right program actions. In order to be able to say what should be done on the case, one has to have three things: 1. Data about the case. 387 2. A knowledge of what lists are available. 3. Auditors who can do the actions required. From a C/S point of view, all these things are under the C/S's control. DATA In the Class VIII materials the 7 Resistive Cases are described. The full lot of them are now found in GF 40X. There are numerous other lists for assessment. If a C/S really doesn't know his lists he can order them all, Method 5 and take his choice of symptoms. Also a C/S can have the pc simply asked questions. From this data a C/S knows why the case is not running well and can order the actions to remedy it. If nothing is wrong, complete the earliest incomplete grade on the Grade Chart. KNOWLEDGE A C/S who is well Word Cleared on his materials and has studied on the courses knows what things hang a case up more than what other things. This gives one the knowledge necessary to choose what lists. Case no case gain then it's GF 40X. And to keep from auditing over an out Int RD there is C/S 53. And for chronic aches and pains there is C/S 54. And for "might be anything" there's a GF. What lists and actions that can be done are for is very easy to sort out. AUDITORS If a C/S's auditors aren't flubless or expert one needs to get in a Cramming and needs to get hired and interned lots of new auditors. C/S Series 57, "A C/S as a Training Officer", solves a lot of this. And a Tech Establishment Officer is vital to keep it solved. Then auditors, the numbers and quality of, are not on the C/S's plate as a continual problem. Scientologists want to audit. They will go on auditing as long as you make them audit well enough and C/S for them well enough to keep them winning on pcs. SUMMARY So the tools of the C/S are 1. Data from pcs. 2. Knowledge of list uses. 3. Knowledge of the Grade Chart. 4. Auditors. 5. The organization of delivery. LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 388  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=8/9/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  BIRTH CONTROL PILLS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 8 SEPTEMBER 1971 Remimeo BIRTH CONTROL PILLS It has been thought that Birth Control Pills brought on dizziness and side effects and got in the road of auditing. It has now been observed that where these effects occurred and the woman A. Changed Brands B. Changed Strength or amount or C. Both A and B the condition vanished. This information is given by the Medical Officer. Therefore 1. There is no regulation or rule which states that a woman may not take Birth Control Pills and 2. There are apparently no side effects affecting auditing and 3. Where side effects do exist one should consult a doctor so that brand or amount or both can be changed. Nothing in this HCO B recommends or prevents or prescribes Birth Control Pills and the information is simply passed on from medical authority. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 389  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=13/9/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Word Clearing Series 23 TROUBLE SHOOTING   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 13 SEPTEMBER 1971 Remimeo Word Clearing Series 23 TROUBLE SHOOTING In Word Clearing the troubles are actually very few. However there are a few. It is possible for an auditor or student doing word clearing on another to get misunderstood words himself unless he also looks at the definitions and understands them at the same time he is clearing them on the other person. This requires no extra step. In fact it would be rather hard not to also see the definition of the word. A person trying to "blow" (leave) and refusing further Word Clearing almost always has a HUGE misunderstood on some word not yet located. The correct action is to get him back and FIND AND CLEAR THE WORD. Not getting a good result using Methods 1, 2 or 3 is cured by using the Word Clearing Correction List, HCO B 21 July 71, Revised 9 August 71. This Correction List applies to all methods of word clearing. For instance, if Method 2 goes sour and the student "knew all the words anyway" or "doesn't understand it any better" or is critical or demonstrates any other unfavorable reactions which do not win through, there is always Word Clearing Correction List. This list is done by a Class III or above auditor. It is quite miraculous. Example: Student badly bogged after Method 2 by his twin. Handling: A Class III auditor does the Word Clearing Correction List on him. The Correction List is handled as per HCO B 14 Mar 71, "F/N Everything". In other words, one takes all reads on it to Floating Needle. Any other list called for by reads on the Correction List is taken to F/N and when that called-for list F/Ns then one considers that the Word Clearing Correction List line has F/Ned. (Correction List reads on 4. List Error. The auditor takes a list called L4B which corrects lists and makes every read on "L4B" F/N. Then "4. List Error" is marked "F/N".) The technology of handling a Word Clearing Correction List is all covered in the general materials of auditing. Not knowing how to use a Meter can cause trouble. A special Course in using an E-Meter is available. The E-Meter Drill Book gives all the drills. It does not take long to learn. Also E-Meters are abundantly available today. Learning to be a Class III or preferably a Class IV Academy Auditor is not difficult IF one uses word clearing! All word clearing is done under the discipline of The Auditor's Code. One's "TRs" (TR = Training drills for auditing) can be straightened out on a TR Course on which one learns to confront, to speak so one can be heard, to acknowledge, to be able to repeat commands and to handle originations by the student. 390 Troubles in word clearing, then can be listed as coming from lack of training. So anyone doing word clearing should organize himself to (1) Do a TR Course, (2) Learn to use and acquire an E-Meter, (3) Learn the Auditor's Code and, (4) If not one already, learn to be an Academy Class III Auditor. Knowing how to do 1 to 3 above is essential to do Method 2 Word Clearing. And the skills under (1) to (3) are very easy to acquire. Further, it is not all that difficult to become a Class III Auditor. People sometimes think only someone who wants to be a professional auditor studies in the Academy, a false impression. One can't imagine how a father or businessman or mother or clerk or official could succeed without knowing the basics of human reaction and how to handle them. Someone who is a Class III or Class IV knows how. The real professional usually becomes a Class VI and the real experts are the VIIIs, IXs and Xs. It's a matter of how expert you want to be. A Flag Ship Class XII could turn a severe mental case from raving lunacy to not only sane but bright and normal in about 8 or 9 hours and a normal person to a genius in 15 to 20 hours. But here we are dealing with the whole range of the human mind. In word clearing Method 2 one certainly should know his "TRs", his Auditor's Code and his Meter. And for Method 1 it takes a Class III Academy Auditor. Almost all troubles will be found to stem from an omission of these requirements AND not using Word Clearing on the materials one is studying to achieve these skills. Very few troubles actually will be encountered if this HCO B is followed. Word Clearing IS a precision technology and there IS something to know about it as it has never before been known. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 391  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=14/9/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 59 DIANETIC LIST ERRORS   Remimeo Also Dn Text  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 14 SEPTEMBER 1971 Remimeo Also Dn Text C/S Series 59 DIANETIC LIST ERRORS It can happen that a Dianetic list of somatics, pains, emotions and attitudes can act as a list under the meaning of the Laws of Listing and Nulling as per HCO B 1 August 68. The most violent session ARC Brks occur because of list errors under the meaning of Listing and Nulling. Other session ARC Brks even under withholds are not as violent as those occurring because of listing errors. Therefore when a violent or even a "total-apathy-won't-answer" session upset has occurred in Dianetics, one must suspect that the preclear is reacting under the Laws of Listing and Nulling and that he conceives such an error to have been made. The repair action is to assess the prepared list which corrects listing errors. This is L4B -- HCO B 15 Dec 68 amended to 18 March 71. It is used "On Dianetics Lists _______ " as the start of each of its questions when employed for this purpose. When a pc has not done well on Dianetics and when no other reason can be found the C/S should suspect some listing error and order an L4B to be done "On Dianetic lists _______ " at the start of each question. Each read obtained on the list is carried Earlier Similar to F/N as per HCO B 14 Mar 71 "F/N Everything" or, preferably the list is found in the folder and properly handled in accordance with what read on L4B. ALL Dianetic Lists can be carried to an item that blows down and F/Ns. This does not mean the item found is now wholly clean. Even though it F/Ned it can be run by recall, by secondaries and by engrams as found in Class VIII materials. It is usually run by engrams, triple, R3R. A C/S must be alert to the fact that (a) Extreme upsets and deep apathies are almost always list errors. (b) That a Dianetic List can be conceived to be a formal list and can behave that way. (c) L4B is the correction list used in such cases. Very few Dianetic lists behave this way but when they do they must be handled as above. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 392  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=14/9/71 Volnum=0 Issue=3 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  WORD CLEARING C/S NO. 2   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 14 SEPTEMBER 1971 Issue III Remimeo WORD CLEARING C/S NO. 2 __________________________________ ___________ _____________________________ Pc Grade Date __________________________________ Auditor Class _____________________________ Auditor _____________________________ Session Grade C/S Comments _________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ WORD CLEARING METHOD NO. 2 COMMANDS USED (Pc Reading the materials, auditor watching meter for reads.) 1. What was the word you just read. 2. Look it up in the dictionary. PC LOOKS IT UP. AUDITOR ALSO UNDERSTANDS MEANING IN DICTIONARY. 3. Use it in sentences of your own. 4. Reread the passage in the material. ________________________________ C/S for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 393  C/S for L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=14/9/71 Volnum=0 Issue=4 Rev=0 rDate=1/10/71 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  POST PURPOSE CLEARING C/S FORM 1R   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 14 SEPTEMBER 1971 Issue IV REVISED 1 OCTOBER 1971 Remimeo POST PURPOSE CLEARING C/S FORM 1R __________________________________ ___________ _____________________________ Pc Grade Date __________________________________ Auditor Class _____________________________ Auditor _____________________________ Session Grade C/S Comments _________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ IT IS UNDERSTOOD THAT BEFORE THIS SESSION PC WILL HAVE HAD WD CLEAR Method No. 1 and also Wd Clear 2 on Hats. C/S INSTRUCTIONS 1. 2WC "What is your attention on?" If TA High or Low send to have C/S 53 done. 2. Fly all ruds, each one E/S to F/N. (Use "Suppress" on no reads and "false read" if a read is said to be not right or said before and carry it E/S to F/N.) 3. 2WC "How do you feel about being a member of this organization?" If sad run "Have you had an ARC Brk with this organization?" E/S to F/N. If not really know, "Have you had a problem with this organization?" E/S to F/N. If nattery or critical in any way, run "What have you done in this organization? What have you withheld in this organization?" Alternate repetitive to F/N Cog VGIs. If you had to use any of these ruds about the organization, again ask 2-way comm "How do you feel about being a member of this organization?" to F/N. 4. 2-way comm pc's post: "TELL ME ABOUT YOUR POST." Be alert for out Ruds. 5. 2-w comm "What is your post?" (Not necessarily to F/N, but if confusions show up, refer to the pc's hat folder. Check for "Any misunderstandings on your post." If this reads have Method 2 Word Clearing done on pc's hat or subject of his post. In this event or if any trouble has shown up end off and send folder to C/S and do post purpose later.) 6. 2WC "What opportunities would you have on your post?" TO F/N. If no F/N, ask what the pc isn't telling you and run that to an F/N, as with a W/H. Then return to opportunity question, and run it to F/N, even with E/S. 7. "How does your job align with what you would like to do?" (2-Way Comm.) If any conflict -- go E/S. TO F/N. 394 8. "What do you imagine the purposes of your post are?" TO F/N. 9. "How does this purpose tie in with the purpose of your Division?" TO F/N. 10. "How does your purpose tie in with the purpose of your Org?" TO F/N. Clean up any conflicts encountered -- clear the word or go E/S. 11. "If your post was not done, what would happen to the Org?" 2-way comm. TO F/N. 12. "What is the purpose of your post?" 2-way comm. TO F/N. 13. Thank pc and send to Pc Examiner. ________________________________ (Name of C/S) Class __________________________ L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 395  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=15/9/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 60 THE WORST TANGLE   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 15 SEPTEMBER 1971 Remimeo C/S Series 60 THE WORST TANGLE Sometimes a C/S gets a terrible tangle handed to him as follows. 1. INTERIORIZATION RUNDOWN IS UNDONE OR MESSED UP. 2. FAULTY LISTS HAVE BEEN DONE. 3. THE PC IS IN A HEAVY ARC BRK WITH PTPs AND W/Hs. Now each one of these three things "must be done first". Auditing cannot be done with Int messed up except to handle the Int RD. Auditing cannot be done over bad lists without repairing the lists. Auditing cannot be done over out ruds without putting the ruds in. So WHAT does the C/S do? There is fortunately a different degree of upset in these three things. Int RD trouble is worse than list trouble is worse than out ruds. Therefore the correct C/S would be to 1. Repair Int 2. Repair Lists 3. Put in Ruds. 1. Repair Int RD is done by using L3B on each flow. And (on Flag) by dating to blow and locating to blow. 2. Lists are repaired with L4B on each list, preferably with the list available and preferably with the actual list repaired (such as added to if incomplete or correct item found and given to pc). 3. And if the pc also had out ruds THESE ARE NOW PUT IN WITH "Have you been audited over an (ARC Brk, PTP, w/h)?" as the pc has been. It will all come out all right if properly done. Very few pcs get that messed up. But when they do even they can be untangled. If a lot of engrams were also run on top of that and these are also in the mess, repair them last as a fourth action. And don't forget to send auditors responsible to Cramming and report C/Ses who get a case that snarled up. C/S Series 53 is written with the above sequence of handling. But it omits ARC Brks (as these don't raise or lower TA out of normal range). And C/S Series 53 as it is designed only for high or low TA does not cover the trick of putting in the ruds as "Were you audited over an (ARC Brk, PTP, w/h)?" as it purposely has to omit ARC Brks. Hope this helps. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 396  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=17/9/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Word Clearing Series 24 LIBRARY   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 17 SEPTEMBER 1971 Remimeo Word Clearing Series 24 LIBRARY You will begin to get an idea of how much library you will need when you have done a large number of word clearings. The important thing is to realize that a library is necessary. In an org this will be in Department 14 under the Librarian. The greatest demand will be for dictionaries of many kinds. First there is the consideration of just English dictionaries. Several, including large ones, should be to hand. Those that use big words to define words keep a pc chasing around and around and are of course poor dictionaries. Often one dictionary gives a better definition than another. So an assortment of English dictionaries is a first requirement. Then come technical dictionaries or texts like engineering, physics, medical, chemistry, mechanics, seamanship, aviation, astronomy, military, etc, etc. Then come philosophical, psychiatric and religious dictionaries if they can be found. Foreign language dictionaries Latin, Greek, French, etc are a must. An auditor doing word clearing can come up with some remarkable demands. Texts or dictionaries covering the subject given on the assessment list (Word Clearing Series 8RR) are a basic starter. I can see a word clearing auditor poking about in old mouldy bookshops and coming up with triumph -- "Ah, look! Priceless. A slang dictionary on oil fields published in 1932! Priceless!" If you get too stopped and are in a major city, you could end the session and send the pc to the local library. But if so have him write the definition down. It is not recommended but can be done. The best solution is to have a good library covering the assessed subjects. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 397  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=22/9/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 61 THE THREE GOLDEN RULES OF THE C/S HANDLING AUDITORS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 22 SEPTEMBER 1971 Remimeo C/S Series 61 THE THREE GOLDEN RULES OF THE C/S HANDLING AUDITORS There are three firm rules in handling auditors which make the difference between good auditors and poor auditors or even having auditors or no auditors at all. 1. NEVER FAIL TO FIND AND POINT OUT AN ACTUAL GOOF AND SEND THE AUDITOR TO CRAMMING. 2. NEVER INVALIDATE OR HARASS AN AUDITOR FOR A CORRECT ACTION OR WHEN NO TECHNICAL GOOF HAS OCCURRED. 3. ALWAYS RECOGNIZE AND ACKNOWLEDGE A TECHNICALLY PERFECT SESSION. By reversing these three things a C/S can wreck and blow every auditor in the place. By always doing these three things correctly the C/S winds up with splendid auditors. An auditor who knows he goofed and yet gets a well done doesn't think the C/S is a good fellow. He holds the C/S in contempt and his auditing worsens. An auditor who didn't goof and yet is told he did becomes bitter or hopeless and begins to hate the C/S. The test of a C/S in the auditor's eyes is "Is he spot on?" meaning is the C/S accurate in giving the right program, the right C/S, spotting the goof and ordering Cramming, and being well enough trained to see and commend a well done. You never get Bad Indicators in an auditor or student when you state the truth. You only get Bad Indicators when your statement is not true. "PR" (Public Relations cheery falsehoods) has nothing to do with getting good indicators. Good indicators in auditors are made with TRUTH. "You goofed, go to Cramming, do TRs 101 to 104 until you cease to alter commands." "Well done by Exams. Practice Handwriting so I don't take so long reading your worksheets." "This F/N VGIs at session end and the Bad Exam Report do not agree. Is there any way this report was falsified? Is there any goof you didn't write down?" or 398 "Very well done" on a very well done totally ON Tech, ON Admin and Correct Auditor's C/S session. Auditors work well even for a bad tempered C/S when that C/S is always "Spot on" with program, C/S, Auditor's grade or censure of auditor and TO CRAMMING. Auditors like a businesslike accurate C/S. A "good fellow" C/S who "lets it slide" and says nothing becomes a very bad fellow indeed in auditors' eyes. A C/S who doesn't recognize and who invalidates good auditing is looked on as a suppressive even when it's just ignorance. The Golden Rules of C/Sing are 1. Never fail to find and point out an actual goof and send the auditor to Cramming. 2. Never invalidate or harass an auditor for a correct action or when no technical goof has occurred. 3. Always recognize and acknowledge a technically perfect session. Only those C/Ses who follow these Golden Rules are truly loved by their auditors. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 399  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=24/9/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  INTERIORIZATION RUNDOWN   URGENT Remimeo Interiorization Pack  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 24 SEPTEMBER 1971 Remimeo Interiorization Pack URGENT INTERIORIZATION RUNDOWN It usually happens that an Interiorization Rundown (also known as Int-Ext RD for Interiorization-Exteriorization Rundown) is -- 1. Done when not necessary. 2. Is flubbed in R3R. 3. Is Overrun. UNNECESSARY The words "Went In" and "Go In" MUST be said to the pc and cleared on the meter. If there is needle action, one runs an Int RD as per the Int Rundown Pack. If there aren't any reads one does NOT do an Int Rundown on the pc as it is unnecessary and classifies as "running an unreading item". When this test is omitted you get an unnecessary Int RD being done on a pc. This will eventually have to be repaired. FLUBBED R3R When the auditor does not do flubless auditing errors occur in the auditing itself. These will hang up an Int RD. OVERRUN It usually happens that an Int RD is overrun. It goes flat on Secondary F2, let us say. The auditor keeps on going past the win. This will hang up the Rundown. One of the ways an overrun occurs is the pc goes exterior during it. Yet the auditor keeps on. Another way is pc has a big cog, big win. Auditor keeps going on with the RD. REASON FOR ERRORS The Int RD is not understood as a REMEDY. It is not something you do on all pcs. Pc goes Exterior in auditing. Later his TA goes high. Then you do an Int RD. You test Int for read as above. If it BDs you do an Int RD. You just don't do one because a pc goes exterior. 400 One reason unnecessary Int RDs get done is that the Registrar sells one. That makes the Reg a C/S. So the C/S and auditor run it. Maybe it wasn't needed. So if it wasn't needed it will eventually have to be repaired. HEADACHES Headaches are a symptom (not every headache is) of a needed or an incorrect Int RD. CORRECTION DRILL The following is the Correction Drill for an Int RD. Ninety percent of the pcs run on Int need it. REQUIREMENTS An auditor before being allowed to go near a pc Int RD Correction must have: 1. Word Clear 2 the Int RD Pack. 2. Must have good TRs. 3. Must be good with a meter. 4. Must know and use the Auditor's Code. 5. MUST DO THIS DRILL ON A DOLL UNTIL HE IS FLAWLESS. Then he can be trusted to do an Int RD Correction. This is the drill (written by a Class XII Auditor for use on Flag): Drill -- Int Ext Repair No. 1 FAILED INT/EXT RD REPAIR DATE TO BLOW -- LOCATE TO BLOW 1. By C/S or prepared list read, Int appears overrun. 2. Auditor: "We're going to take a look at the subject of going into things and your Int RD." 3. Auditor: "What was the first time in your auditing that you were willing to go into things?" 4. Auditor establishes by pc answer to above and any further 2wc if (a) a flat point exists in or as a result of auditing (or training), (b) the pc feels the Int RD is unflat, (c) the pc has misunderstoods on the RD, or (d) the pc never had any trouble with going in and out of things or being audited after Exterior. The pc and auditor are satisfied with what they establish above. 5. If (a) flat point, auditor establishes what the point was. If (b) unflat, the auditor does an L3B "On your Int RD". If it does turn out on the L3B that the Int RD was overrun or unnecessary, the auditor proceeds per this drill. If (c) misunderstoods, the auditor clears them up with the pc and then finds out if it was overrun, unflat or unnecessary and handles per this drill. If (d) unnecessary, the auditor indicates it was an unnecessary action and gets an F/N. 401 6. The Int RD was overrun and the flat point has been established per Step 5. The auditor tells the pc, "We're going to date that point in years, months, etc, ago until something blows off -- some mass or energy, etc. I want you to tell me as soon as that happens. Alright?" 7. If the pc is confused about "blow" the auditor can do a demo by putting his hand on the pc's arm and taking it away suddenly. 8. When the pc understands what's expected of him, the auditor establishes the order of magnitude by asking the pc, "Was it years or months ago?" 9. The auditor gets the years, months, days, hours, minutes, seconds and fractions of seconds ago to a point when something blows and F/Ns. If the pc gives up on this only then does the auditor meter date the flat point to a blow-F/N. 10. If a big BD occurs and the auditor suspects a blow but the pc will not originate it, the auditor can ask the pc if it blew. 11. If no blow occurs the auditor verifies each part of the date and corrects where necessary to a blow-F/N. If still no blow-F/N the auditor then checks for an earlier flat point. If there is one, the auditor dates that point to a blow-F/N. If still no blow-F/N the auditor does an L3B "On your Int RD" and handles fully. 12. When the date has gone to a blow-F/N and the F/N has been indicated the auditor tells the pc, "Now we're going to spot the exact location where that flat point occurred, until something blows off. I want you to tell me when that happens. Alright?" The auditor is getting the pt phys. univ. location. 13. The auditor clears the words stars, planet, galaxy, location, point, if this is the first time Date Locate is being done on the pc. 14. When the pc understands what's expected of him the auditor begins the Locate Steps. 15. The auditor says, "Point to that location." The pc points with his finger until he is satisfied he has the exact direction. Then the auditor goes down the rest of the steps to a blow-F/N. Distance? Exact? What Galaxy? What Star? What Planet? What Country? What City? What Street? What House? Position on Street? What room? Distance from front of house? Where in the room? How far from each wall? How far off the floor? How far from the ceiling? 16. If, while locating, the pc starts running the incident or gives too much "scene" the auditor has the pc point again then continues from where he left off on the Locate Steps. 402 17. If at some point on these steps the location turns out to be in the middle of the ocean or in a field, etc, the auditor uses available landmarks or reference points to get the location (i.e., distance from nearest point of land? or distance from the big rock?) down to a blow-F/N. 18. If no blow-F/N, the auditor verifies each part of the Locate Step and corrects any necessary to a blow-F/N. 19. If the auditor suspects a blow but the pc doesn't originate it, the auditor asks, "Did something blow?" If the auditor suspects he's gone past a blow he can check "Did it blow previously?" If so and no F/N the auditor rehabs by asking the pc how long ago that happened and gets the F/N. 20. If no blow after verifying the location, or after checking for an earlier location blow, the auditor then has to do an L3B "On your Int RD" and handle fully. NOTE: A blow is a definite manifestation and the pc must say "something blew" or "it disappeared" or "it's gone" or "it vanished", not "I feel lighter". This is a highly precise action to be done smoothly with good TRs. Its results are phenomenal. L. RON HUBBARD Founder RH:nt.jh Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 403  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=25/9/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=2 rDate=4/4/74 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  TONE SCALE IN FULL   Remimeo PR Hats D of P Hats Auditors  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex Remimeo PR Hats HCO BULLETIN OF 25 SEPTEMBER 1971RA D of P Hats Auditors REVISED 4 APRIL 1974 TONE SCALE IN FULL TONE SCALE EXPANDED KNOW TO MYSTERY SCALE SERENITY OF BEINGNESS 40.0 KNOW POSTULATES 30.0 NOT KNOW GAMES 22.0 KNOW ABOUT ACTION 20.0 LOOK EXHILARATION 8.0 PLUS EMOTION AESTHETIC 6.0 ENTHUSIASM 4.0 CHEERFULNESS 3.5 STRONG INTEREST 3.3 CONSERVATISM 3.0 MILD INTEREST 2.9 CONTENTED 2.8 DISINTERESTED 2.6 BOREDOM 2.5 MONOTONY 2.4 ANTAGONISM 2.0 MINUS EMOTION HOSTILITY 1.9 PAIN 1.8 ANGER 1.5 HATE 1.4 RESENTMENT 1.3 NO SYMPATHY 1.2 UNEXPRESSED RESENTMENT 1.15 COVERT HOSTILITY 1.1 ANXIETY 1.02 FEAR 1.0 DESPAIR .98 TERROR .96 NUMB .94 SYMPATHY .9 PROPITIATION -- (HIGHER TONED -- SELECTIVELY GIVES) .8 GRIEF .5 MAKING AMENDS -- (PROPITIATION -- CAN'T W/H ANYTHING) .375 UNDESERVING .3 SELF-ABASEMENT .2 VICTIM .1 HOPELESS .07 APATHY .05 USELESS .03 DYING .01 BODY DEATH 0.0 FAILURE 0.0 PITY -0.1 SHAME -- (BEING OTHER BODIES) -0.2 ACCOUNTABLE -0.7 BLAME -- (PUNISHING OTHER BODIES) -1.0 REGRET -- (RESPONSIBILITY AS BLAME) -1.3 CONTROLLING BODIES -1.5 EFFORT PROTECTING BODIES -2.2 OWNING BODIES -3.0 THINK APPROVAL FROM BODIES -3.5 NEEDING BODIES -4.0 SYMBOLS WORSHIPPING BODIES -5.0 EAT SACRIFICE -6.0 SEX HIDING -8.0 MYSTERY BEING OBJECTS -10.0 WAIT BEING NOTHING -20.0 UNCONSCIOUS CAN'T HIDE -30.0 TOTAL FAILURE -40.0 UNKNOWABLE LRH:ams.rd Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder 404  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=28/9/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 62 KNOW BEFORE YOU GO   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 28 SEPTEMBER 1971 Remimeo (corrected and reissued) C/S Series 62 KNOW BEFORE YOU GO A C/S may and should know exactly what is wrong with a case. When he "knows" by hunches or intuition and does not bother to confirm or make a wider effort, he can miss the case entirely. Example: C/S says to himself -- I know what's wrong with Joe. His wife. So I'll C/S "O/W on your wife". Some of the time the C/S will be right. This gives him a win and confirms him in sloppy C/Sing. He does not bother to know before he C/Ses. A C/S who gets a low percentage of cracked cases and a low percent of F/N VGIs at Examiner usually fails to "know before he goes". He just goes, which is to say he just writes programs and C/Ses without finding out enough about the case. A skilled C/S may very well be able to figure out exactly what's wrong with the case. That's his job. But how does he find out anything about the case at all? The answer is very simple. So simple it gets missed. THE C/S GETS DATA ON THE CASE. How does he do this? The broadest, most used answer to how to know is prepared lists. These have all sorts of questions on them that read or don't read. There are lots of these lists beginning with the famous PC Assessment Form. There are all sorts of lists. An end product of any list is DATA ON THE PC ONE USES TO PROGRAM AND C/S THE CASE. The next answer to how to get data is lists prepared by the C/S himself and which are assessed by the Auditor. Another answer is 2-way comm on questions written by the C/S. "What do you consider hasn't been handled on your case?" is a jewel which gives you the hidden standard to List and Null and run Who or what would have _______ to BD F/N Item and O/W on the item found. But there are dozens more. "How do you feel about your family?" "R Factor: The C/S is concerned about your saying your case sags after wins in auditing. Could you tell me exactly what happens and what your history has been on this?" There is no limit to such questions. And, if taken from what the pc says to Examiner or from auditors' comments on Worksheets, they will usually F/N. But mainly they give data. When regular actions fail, there is always the D of P. "D of P to Interview Richard Roe and find out what he's trying to do in session. Also how he looks, mannerisms, etc." Data, Data, Data. Now you have a picture of this case. 405 COMBINED ACTION Usually, by prepared lists issued or from C/S prepared lists, the C/S finds and gets handled by the auditor in the same session much of what is wrong. This combines finding out with handling. Any prepared list carried to F/N on each read (Method 3) or the indicated action done will give case gain. Maybe it's all the case gain one could ask for. But such reads even if F/Ned and the text in the Worksheet give the C/S new data about this case. BROAD SHOOTING Even if he now KNOWS, the C/S does not narrowly shoot at one target. He gives alternatives as well in his C/S. Example: C/S knows pc is concerned about F/Ns. He does not necessarily just write "Prepcheck F/Ns". Instead the C/S writes "Assess Auditors, Auditing, Dianetics, Scientology, F/Ns, Processing, false reads. Prepcheck each reading item, taking largest read first." This gives a broader band, more chance of hitting the button needed. There are many ways to do this. Example: You "know" it is a misdefined word. You don't C/S "Find the misdefined word". You write, "Assess Method 3 and Handle the Word Clearing Correction List". For you see, the session might also have been run over an out rud. EVALUATION To abruptly C/S everything the pc has just said is a Q and A. But worse, it can lead to evaluation. LITTLE FLAGS Pc Remarks are like little Flags that may signal a much deeper deposit of aberration. Only the little flag shows. "I don't like women," can uncover a whole background. "I keep getting this pain in my side" opens the door to a whole chain of operations and one to be done next week! But by the broad rule, the C/S doesn't dive at it. He says "Pc has pain in side. 1. C/S 54." Not "List the somatics in his side". But a whole coverage of accidents, illnesses. One will also have a side pain as a result. "Appendicitis Operation" is enough to give anyone a pain in the side if never audited out! TAGGING CASES A C/S who sees a case is thick foldered and not well tags the case "Resistive". There are 7 resistive cases listed in the Class VIII material. For this the C/S has "GF40 Expanded Method 3" and then handles the lists and engrams indicated in it in his next If this doesn't handle, the case is in an out Ethics situation that should be looked into. The C/S mentally tags the easy ones and the tough ones. The tough ones he plays on the Resistive Cases side. The C/S can also find an auditor considers a fast case a bad case when it is just a fast case. 406 PRIMARY RECORD The primary record is the pc's folder. When the case does not run well it can be assumed that the case is (a) Resistive (b) Errors have been made in auditing. These two assumptions are valid in all cases which do not easily resolve. They are both valid because the case, being resistive, was running poorly, was hard to audit and C/S earlier. From the folder, from prepared lists, from C/S's own additions to prepared lists, from C/S's own prepared lists, from 2wc on questions and from D of P Interviews one can get ENOUGH DATA TO INTELLIGENTLY PROGRAM AND C/S A CASE. All this may seem very obvious. BUT, in word clearing the most Common C/S error has been to fail to order a Word Clearing Correction List done. Instead one reads, "Correct the last word found". This misses that the whole thing may be being done over a withhold or ARC Break. It might be another word entirely. So a C/S who does this risks the wrong target. He is not C/Sing broadly enough. Also one sees a repair or life program consisting of two or three special processes and without any lists at all. One also sees a program which seeks to handle several things the C/S "knew" were wrong followed by "8. C/S 53, 9. GF 40X, 10. C/S 54." Having gone, this program then seeks to find out. It's quite backwards. Thus the C/S who goes before he knows is going to have an awful lot of no F/Ns at the Examiner. The watchword is KNOW BEFORE YOU GO. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 407  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=30/9/71 Volnum=0 Issue=6 Rev=0 rDate=19/4/74 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  CCHs 5, 6 & 7   Remimeo HQS Course HQS Course Supers  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 30 SEPTEMBER 1971 Remimeo Issue VI HQS Course Amended & Reissued 19 April 1974 HQS Course (Only change is in signature & Supers commands of CCH 7.) CCHs 5, 6 & 7 (Taken verbatim from HCO B 11 June 1957 for use on the HQS Course.) NUMBER: CCH 5 NAME: Location by Contact. COMMANDS: "Touch that (indicated object)." "Thank you." POSITION: Auditor and preclear may be seated where the preclear is very unable, in which case they are seated at a table which has a number of objects scattered on its surface. Or auditor and preclear may be ambulant, with the auditor in manual contact with the preclear as is necessary to face him toward and guide him to the indicated object. PURPOSE: The purpose of the process is to give the preclear orientation and havingness and to improve his perception. TRAINING STRESS: Training stress is upon gentleness, ARC and the raising of the preclear's certainty that he has touched the indicated object. It should be noticed that this can be run on blind people. HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard from Locational Processing in 1957. NUMBER: CCH 6 NAME: Body-Room Contact. COMMANDS: "Touch your (body part)." "Thank you." "Touch that (indicated room object)." "Thank you." POSITION: Auditor and preclear move about together as needed, the auditor enforcing the commands by manual contact using the preclear's hands to touch objects and touch body parts. PURPOSE: To establish the orientation and increase the havingness of the preclear and to give him in particular a reality on his own body. TRAINING STRESS: Training stress is upon using only those body parts which are not embarrassing to the preclear as it will be found that the preclear ordinarily has very little reality on various parts of his body. Impossible commands should not be given to the preclear in any case. HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in 1957 in Washington, D.C., as a lower step than Body-Room Show Me. 408 NUMBER: CCH 7 NAME: Contact by Duplication. COMMANDS: "Touch that table." "Thank you. "Touch your (body part)." "Thank you." "Touch that table." "Thank you." "Touch your (same body part)." "Thank you." "Touch that table." "Thank you." "Touch your (same body part). "Thank you," etc, in that order. POSITION: Auditor may be seated. Preclear should be walking. Usually auditor standing by to manually enforce the commands. PURPOSE: Process is used to heighten perception, orient the preclear and raise the preclear's havingness. Control of attention as in all these "contact" processes naturally takes the attention units out of the bank which itself has been controlling the preclear's attention. TRAINING STRESS: Training stress is on precision of command and motion, with each command in its unit of time, all commands perfectly duplicated. Preclear to continue to run process even though he dopes off. Good ARC with the preclear, not picking one body part which is aberrated at first but flattening some non-aberrated body part before aberrated body part is tackled. HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in 1957 in Washington, D.C., as a lower level process than Opening Procedure by Duplication, or Show Me by Duplication. All contact processes have been developed out of the Pre-Logics. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:pe.ntm.rd Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 409  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=2/10/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 63 C/SING FOR NEW AUDITORS OR VETERANS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 2 OCTOBER 1971 Remimeo C/S Series 63 C/SING FOR NEW AUDITORS OR VETERANS There is a considerable difference between C/Sing for internes and new auditors and C/Sing for veterans. This shows up mainly in C/Sing prepared lists. For an interne or new auditor or one who is not very experienced or expert, the rule is that a C/S gives as little thinking to do as possible in the session. It is enough for such an auditor to do the actions. It is too much to also ask him to use judgment or work something out while auditing. A veteran on the other hand knows the tools so well that he can also figure out what to do. Example: C/S for non-veteran: 1. Assess GF Method 5 and return to C/S. C/S for a veteran: 1. Assess GF Method 5 and Handle. It is quite a trick to assess a whole list, then take the biggest reads and handle. It is quite beyond an auditor who is still worrying about his TRs or how you run a meter. In an effort to speed up lines or escape work, a C/S can err badly in this. It becomes mysterious why Word Clearing Correction List ceases to work, why F/Ns are few at the Examiner. Giving an inexperienced auditor the responsibility for assessing a list and also handling it is in fact asking him to audit and to a faint degree C/S in the chair. It is quite beyond a green auditor. Given that he knows his Tech, most of a C/S's troubles come from (a) Asking green auditors to follow C/Ses for which they have not studied the HCO Bs or on which they have not been crammed, (b) C/Sing for green auditors to decide something in session or combine actions such as assessing and handling without a new C/S in between, (c) Not sending the auditor (green or veteran) to Cramming for every goof, (d) Having no Cramming. It takes a while to make an auditor. 410 The C/S is responsible for all actions in the session. He has only himself to blame if he is asking someone to C/S for him in the chair. It is easier to plan out and write up the needed GF actions (or any other list) from the Method 5 reads than it is to correct a messed-up handling. It does not save any time at all but more than likely makes new problems for the C/S. It is very easy to have even a green auditor assess some prepared list. One can even now say, "Take the list just assessed and do 2wc on each item I have marked. Carry each E/S to an F/N before leaving it." The C/S simply puts a dash ahead of each item that read in the assessment. The C/S can also number the items in different order than the list (because of better programming or bigger reads) and have each one handled to F/N. An L3B can be ordered "Method 5" and then the C/S can get it back and precisely order what's to be done with its reads. And in what sequence. This is true of any prepared list. The only small hitch is that a C/S has to be there and available so as not to stall the session. Even so, in the long run it is faster because less mistakes are made. Assess -- send to C/S -- handle. Instead of "Assess and Handle". This even applies to a C/S 53 or C/S 54 or White Form or GF 40X. Any prepared list. Perhaps this will greatly improve your F/N VGI ratio. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:mes.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 411  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=5/10/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 64 F/Ning AUDITORS   Remimeo Qual Hats Tech Estab Officers  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 5 OCTOBER 1971 Remimeo Qual Hats Tech Estab C/S Series 64 Officers F/Ning AUDITORS Students who study well are said to be F/Ning students. An auditor who is auditing well could be said to be F/Ning the whole time. When an auditor goofs or is having a rough time because of his own TRs and misunderstood words and lack of data, he is not F/Ning. A C/S who lets an auditor struggle along without insisting on a Cramming being in existence and without sending an auditor to Cramming on each goof is actually condemning the auditor to a miserable time. When an auditor's production is low and when he is making goofs, he is not an F/Ning auditor. This shows up heavily in the Exams of his pcs. These Exams will drop away from F/N VGIs. An auditor should be sent to Cramming when his production is low or he goofs in order to get his TRs, misunderstood words and lack of data remedied. Cramming should be carried out until he is F/N VGIs. EVERY AUDITOR LEAVING CRAMMING SHOULD GO THROUGH THE EXAMINER. The Exam report with TA and needle state and indicators should be done exactly like a pc report. Compliance reports on the Cramming cycle should have the Exam report attached so the C/S can see if the fault was remedied. If it was, then it will be F/N GIs. This also puts Cramming on its toes. An auditor, just crammed, who doesn't F/N VGI should be hauled straight back into Cramming for the cycle is incomplete or invalidative or faulty in some way. Cramming Officers who win on auditors and students are F/Ning Cramming Officers. C/Ses who send auditors to a good Cramming for every goof will wind up as F/Ning C/Ses. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:sb.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 412  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=6/10/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  INTENSIVES ADDED POINTS SYSTEM FOR PCS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 6 OCTOBER 1971 Remimeo INTENSIVES ADDED POINTS SYSTEM FOR PCS (Reference LRH ED 153 Int, HCO PL29 Aug 71, "Org Conditions", HCO PL 28 Sept 71, "Selling and Delivering Auditing", and LRH ED 145R Int.) An org selling one-week 12 1/2 hour Intensives should use this point system. ALL POINTS GIVEN IN HCO B 30 Aug 71, Issue II, are valid. FOR EVERY PREPAID 12 1/2 HOUR INTENSIVE DELIVERED IN ONE WEEK -- 5 POINTS. This is in addition to rundown points. What is achieved during the 1 wk 12 1/2 hour Intensive is added. Example: 1 12 1/2 hour Intensive delivered in 1 wk 5 Included Progress Pgm with a success story 1 Included Life Repair with a success story 1 Completion Points = 7 Example: 2 12 1/2 hour Intensives one week each = 10 C/S Series 54 and Handling with a success story = 2 Completion Points = 12 Randomly scheduled 12 1/2 hrs of Auditing not given in one week but spread out or not delivered has no Intensive points beyond those given in HCO B 30 Aug 71, Issue II, "Pc Completions". Penalties of 30 Aug 71 still apply regardless of the 12 1/2 hour Intensive but even if no F/N occurred in the whole Intensive 5 points would be gained if it were given in one week as well as the no F/N penalties. It pays best to give the pc everything the C/S can, in as many hours as possible. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:mes.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 413  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=16/10/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  FORCING A PC   Remimeo HQS Checksheet (Public Course) HQS Supervisor Checksheet  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 16 OCTOBER 1971 Remimeo HQS Checksheet (Public Course) REVISED 12 OCTOBER 1969 HQS Supervisor (Edited and Reissued for HQS Course) Checksheet FORCING A PC Forcing a pc to go on being audited when the pc is refusing or not wishing to go on upsets the pc and his case and will give the pc a heavy loss. There is no excuse for it. It invalidates the pc's cause. The correct action is to either find out why he doesn't want to go on or send the pc to a Scientology Review. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:rs.pe.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 414  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=21/10/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  ASSISTS IN SCIENTOLOGY   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 21 OCTOBER 1971 REISSUED 21 SEPTEMBER 1974 (Only change is signature) Remimeo (Taken from HQS Booklet Sect I, edited from ABILITY 73, "Assists in Scientology", by L. Ron Hubbard. Edited and reissued for use on the HQS Co-Audit.) ASSISTS IN SCIENTOLOGY DEFINITION: AN ASSIST: AN ACTION UNDERTAKEN BY A MINISTER TO ASSIST THE SPIRIT TO CONFRONT PHYSICAL DIFFICULTIES. An assist is not normally done in a formal session. The way the term has been used is a very simple activity to relieve an immediate troublesome difficulty. An assist is much more specifically and definitely anything which is done to alleviate a present-time discomfort. An assist could happen almost anywhere. At the beginning of a session, no matter how formally this session is constituted, you are running an assist. You have an auditing room. You have a preclear, and you are the auditor. You know all these things, but the preclear doesn't. Don't call it a formal session. Tell the preclear that it is an assist and that you are not intending anything very strenuous. In rendering an assist you should tell the preclear that "this is just an assist" to try and ease the pain in his hand a little, after which you are going to stop. The handling of an assist as an auditor is different than the handling of a formal session since the factor of control is notably slackened, sometimes almost completely missing. One of the factors in assists is that an assist has as a large part of its anatomy, "trying to help". Just remember that you are only trying to help and don't get your heart broken by the fact that the fellow's broken spine doesn't heal instantly. Another factor is that an assist is differentiated and defined as addressing the game someone knows he is playing. What techniques would comprise an assist? Anything that would help. And what are these? One of the easiest ones to render is Locational Processing. You tell the person, "Look at that chair. Look at that ceiling. Look at that floor. Look at that hand" (the auditor pointing to the objects), when he has an injured hand and the pain will diminish. This is a very easy assist. For example, a person has a bad shoulder. You touch his hand of the same arm and say, "Close your eyes and look at my fingers." Make sure that he keeps his eyes closed. You then touch him on the elbow and say, "Look at my fingers." Do this anywhere on his body. Just touch him and say, "Look at my fingers." This is a communication process which eases his attention over from a concentration upon the injury to something else which is quite near the injury and thus doesn't result in too much of a shock. It reduces havingness but it is positive and gets positive results. It can be done by an untrained person. You can teach this assist to anybody. You say, "If somebody has a bruise, injury, a burn, a cut, the way to handle this is to tell the person to close his eyes, and then you touch the area near and distant from the vicinity of the injured area, asking them, with their eyes closed, to look at your fingers. You contact them this way many times. They will experience sudden pains in the area, and you will discover that the 'psychic trauma' has been discharged." 415 You will find that most people do not have any upset about physical contact. Most people think that this is the thing to do. Say you wanted to render an assist on somebody who had a very indefinite difficulty. That is the hardest one to render an assist on. The person has a pain but he cannot say where. He doesn't know what has happened to him. He just feels bad. Use Locational Processing as such. You will find out that this process will work when other processes fail. An assist carries with it a certain responsibility. If you give an assist casually to somebody out in the public and do not shove a calling card in his pocket, you are making an error. The reason for this is that he will not know from whom and where help came. An auditor goes through life and he casts his shadow upon many people and they have really no cognizance of what has happened at all if he is rendering an assist. He says, "Do this, do that" -- maybe he wins, or maybe he loses because this is the type of session least calculated to procure orderly results. But in the main these people have been helped. They don't know really by what, except some word that the auditor kept saying. They don't even know that he is an auditor. They don't know anything about it at all. Show a person where he can obtain further assistance, and by whom the assistance was given. Be yourself. Be positive. Be professional and definite. Have a calling card and make sure the card is easily enough understood. Don't ask them for permission. Just do it. No reason to wander around and give them funny notions. If you are going to help some stranger out, help him out. Don't explain to him or any bystander, otherwise you are likely to stand there explaining, waiting for somebody's permission. Don't bother with that. You act as though you are the one in charge and you will be in charge. And this is part and parcel of the knowledge of how to do an assist. You have got to be the person in charge. This has to be so good, as far as you are concerned, that you overcome the informality of the session to a very marked degree. If you do it extremely well, the assist will amount to auditing. Say, for example, there is a big accident and a crowd of people are pressing around. The police are trying to push the people back. Well, push the people back and then push the policeman back. Say, "Officer, keep these people at a distance." Then you lean over the victim and snap him back to rights. If you are enough THERE, everybody else will realize that you are the ONE that is THERE. Therefore, such things as panic, worry, wonder, upset, looking dreamily into the far distance, wondering what is wrong or what should be done, are no part of your make-up if you are rendering an assist. Cool, calm and collected should be the keynote of your attitude. Realize that to take control of any given situation it is only necessary to be there more than anybody else. There is no necromancy (magic; conjuration of the spirits of the dead in order to predict the future) involved. Just BE there. The others aren't. And if you are there enough, then somebody else will pull himself out of it and go on living. Understand that an auditor when rendering an assist must make up with presence what he lacks in surroundings and agreements. It all comes under the heading of willingness to be there and willingness to control people. One of the ways of convincing people of beingness and of being there is to exercise control -- positive, undeniable Tone 40 exercise of control. Start to control the situation with high enough ARC, enough presence and factuality -- there won't be anybody present that won't step back and let you control the situation. You are entitled to it in the first place because of senior "know- how". The control of body attention or thought comprises the majority of your knowledge. The majority in Scientology simply points in this direction. The observable thing is control of attention, objects and thoughts. When you have good confidence of being able to handle these, and when you positively know how to do these, then you can make sure that everybody else knows you can do this, and you make them realize this by doing it. You have all of these things available in rendering an assist. You might never think of a riot as being a situation which necessitated an assist, or an assist as applicable to a riot, but a riot is simply a psychosomatic momentary injury or traumatic condition on the third dynamic. Could you settle a riot? Well, if 416 you can settle a riot, you can certainly settle one person who is in a riot. The antithesis of any pain, disturbance or tumult is order. The thing which controls tumult is order; and, conversely, the thing which controls order is tumult. You need only bring order into a confused situation and bring confusion into an orderly situation to control everything in the field of motion, action and objects. This is a fantastic simplicity and one which takes some grasping. Conceive as order, merely a fixed position, idea and attitude. A policeman knows what he is supposed to do. Maybe he will put on a tourniquet or maybe he won't. Keep the people away and stop everything is his idea of how it should be. Now you can aid or abet the order he is creating, or cancel the order by creating a confusion which he cannot handle. Of the two, the first is the best in that situation. You aid and abet and cap the order he is creating. If you were to accuse him of having a confused accident scene, which is by now not at all confused, and ask him to straighten it out, you would channel his attention in the direction it is already gone, and so you control his attention. Remember, those people are still moving a little bit; they are still breathing. There is still a tiny bit of motion going on. If you were to ask him something on the order of "Can't we have it a little quieter and more orderly here?", he would at once perceive that there was far too much confusion and motion, and he would simply come under your direction because you have simply channeled his attention in the direction it was already going. Therefore, you have taken control. If you ever want to overset a fixed order, create a confusion. If you want to overset a confusion, create a fixed order. Pick out of the scene those beings in the scene whose attention is channeled in the direction you want attention to go, and you aid and abet that attention which already exists. Or, where you have too many fixed positions and fixed ideas to overcome, you simply take those turbulent individuals in the scene who are creating the confusion against those fixed ideas and channels and you make their confusion much more confused, at the same time yourself imposing another order in another direction. The mechanics of taking over any confused scene are simply the mechanics of trying to get a preclear to see through the morass of cross purposes, commands, ideas, and environments in which he has lived. And whether that applies to the third dynamic or otherwise, the laws are still there and it tells you then that the imposition of order on a preclear comes foremost in an assist. In an assist you always count on the fact that the thetan himself would, if he could, do the right thing. If you work on that postulate you will never be wrong. Get the idea that it is something else trying to do the wrong thing. The keynote of a thetan is order. Where you are giving an assist to one person, you put things in the environment into an orderly state as the first step, unless you are trying to stop a pumping artery -- but here you would use First Aid. You should understand that First Aid always precedes an assist. You should look the situation over from the standpoint of how much First Aid is required. Maybe you will find somebody with a temperature of 106 degrees. It may very well be that he needs to lie down and be covered up, and though antibiotics are much overrated, he might be better off with a shot of one of these than with an assist at that time. Auditing will not shut off a pumping artery, but a tourniquet will. If you are going into the zone of accidents, you are going to be in the vicinity of a great deal of destruction and chaos, and you are very foolish not to have your Red Cross First Aid Certificate. You may often have to find some method of controlling, handling and directing personnel who get in your way before you can render an assist. You might just as well realize that an assist requires that you control the entire environment and personnel associated with the assist if necessary. An assist is auditing on several dynamics. It is, therefore, much harder to do than auditing in a formal room as it requires presence. You must bring yourself to face the fact that you have to give enough presence and enough control to enough dynamics to bring the environment into a compliance with your postulate. If you postulate that somebody 417 is going to pick up his bed and walk, then you have to be willing to move and be capable of moving around the people who are going to watch him pick up his bed and walk. A good example of an assist would be when somebody is washing dishes in the kitchen. There is a horrendous crash and the person comes down all over the sink, hits the floor and as she is going down, she grabs the butcher knife as it falls. You go in and say, "Well, let me fix that up." One of the first things you would have to do is to wind some bandage around the hand to stop the bleeding. Part of the First Aid would be to pick up the dishes and put them back on the sink, sweep the pieces together into a more orderly semblance. This is the first symptom of control. She becomes introverted into the cut to the point that she wouldn't particularly notice what you were doing. But you relieve the anxiety that all her blood is pouring out; your first attention to the case is attention to the environment. Next you would make her sit down. To remove her from the scene of the accident is not as desirable as auditing her there. That is directly contrary, perhaps, to what you believe, but it is true. That is why you bring a little order into the environment. You position her and then you are ready for techniques. It is quite remarkable for you have manifested order in a much wider sphere than a cut hand in order to bring about a healing of the cut hand. If you understand that your responsibility always extends much wider than the immediate zone of commotion, you never miss. If you bring order to the wider environment you also bring it to the narrower environment. If you bring it into the narrow environment, you also bring it to the wider environment. It is a gradient scale of how much order you can bring. In processing, you have to control or direct attention, objects, person, or thoughts of the injured person. If you are really good on the subject of assists, you will direct an additional thing: his knowingness. You can control a man's knowingness rather easily, but it is hard to see it. About the first thing that you can observe about somebody is his person. You are trying to straighten it out. Don't think even though you have this person sitting down that you have straightened it out, because it is still messed up. But there is something that you can straighten out easily -- and that is his attention. If you could heighten his attention and his knowingness at the same time, you would really be in wonderful circumstances. You always shift and direct his attention, hence Locational Processing. Because he is injured you are not going to move his person around. You have got his attention. Don't try to shift his thoughts around at first because they are dispersed and chaotic. This leaves you his attention only. If someone is in terrible condition and he is really writhing around, and you want to render an assist, you don't wait until he stops writhing. He is liable to stop writhing dead. What you do with him is to direct his attention. You tell him to "Shut your eyes and look at my fingers." You press your fingers hard enough so that he can't help but put his attention on them. In this wise you can always have a successful assist, because assists all come under the heading of control. The beingness of the person and his presence makes the control possible. So part of control is always presence, identity, person, the one who takes charge and has things under control. When you are able to control his attention, his body and thoughts, then he will be in session and you are no longer doing an assist. Assists dominantly require that you direct the attention of the preclear and dispose his person one way or the other and eventually take over control of his thoughts on the subject. But by the time you have all these three in line, you are no longer doing an assist. So what you really do is do an assist up to the time the person can handle the incident or pain, put him in a more favorable environment and give him auditing. So the assist is what you do on the street, and auditing is what you do in the auditing room when he comes to you after your assist has been successful. LRH:nt.jh Copyright $c 1958, 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder 418  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=31/5/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=21/10/71 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 39R STANDARD 12 1/2 HOUR INTENSIVE PROGRAMS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 31 MAY 1971R REVISED 21 OCTOBER 1971 Remimeo C/S Series 39R STANDARD 12 1/2 HOUR INTENSIVE PROGRAMS The sale of 12 1/2 hour Intensives modifies earlier versions of Advance Programs (Grade Chart) since a C/S now needs everything he can get a pc audited on. It is not now a question of selling the public anything with a name. You just sell 12 1/2 hour Intensives. The C/S decides what to run and runs all he can as lengthily as he can. Refunds come from not enough auditing. Gains come from auditing in large blocks of hours such ss 1 to 6 12 1/2 hr Intensives, always delivered at 12 1/2 hrs per week or weekend. SAMPLE PROGRESS PROGRAM Repair Program. (Can include GF.) Life Repair C/S Series 53 (Int Repair or Int RD wherever indicated and if reading.) GF 40X Revised Method 3 Dianetic C/S 1 Engram Handling of, R3R Triple GF 40X Revised. ADVANCE PROGRAM C/S 54 (omit running things already run in GF 40X) Dianetics R3R Triple to Completion (Any Ruds or repair needed during Dianetic actions.) ARC St Wire Triple Grade Zero Expanded Triple (or Ex Single if you don't have the Triple processes in) Grade I Expanded Triple (or Ex Single if you don't have the Triple processes in) Grade II Expanded Triple (or Ex Single if you don't have the Triple processes in) Grade III Expanded Triple (or Ex Single if you don't have the Triple processes in) Grade IV Expanded Triple (or Ex Single if you don't have the Triple processes in) (Any repairs above at any place during above, using GF, etc.) Power Set-up: Life Ruds and G Form Power Triple Va R6EW Clearing Course 419 OT I OT II OT III to attest OT VII OT III Expanded to attest L-10 (when released) OT IV OT V OT VI Rehab OT VII Any higher OT grade. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=22/10/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  EXTERIORIZATION   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 22 OCTOBER 1971 REISSUED 19 SEPTEMBER 1974 (Only change is signature) Remimeo EXTERIORIZATION Exteriorization is defined as the act of moving out of the body with or without full perception. It is the fact of this act which proves that the individual is not a body but an individual. This discovery in 1952 proved beyond any question the existence of a thetan, that the individual was a thetan, not a body, and disproved that man was an animal, and that he was a spiritual being timeless and deathless. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 420  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=24/10/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  FALSE TA   Remimeo Add to E-Meter Books Studies, Checksheets  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 24 OCTOBER 1971 Remimeo Add to E-Meter Books Studies, Checksheets FALSE TA Some pcs have a very difficult time in auditing due solely to can (electrode) outnesses. Some auditors have heavy losses because they do not realize the troubles that can come from electrodes and thus remedy them. TA USE The TA must be between 2 and 3 for a correct F/N. When the TA is reading falsely a pc can be butchered. Example: Auditor talking the TA down. It gets to "3.1" by his meter. So he gets the pc to talk a bit more to get the TA between 2 and 3 and F/N. The TA suddenly rises to 3.8. Pc and Auditor go desperate. What has happened is that the TA was a false read. It was really reading 2.9 and F/Ning but for reasons given below it read "3.1". Thus the auditor overran the F/N and by keeping on invalidated the release, pulled the pc's attention out of session and demanded more than the pc had to give. Example: Auditor 2 way communicating with pc to get the TA up from "1.8". The TA suddenly sinks to 1.6, pc goes into apathy. What happened was a missed F/N. For reasons covered below the TA at 1.8 was false and was really at 2.1 and F/Ning. Example: Pc being asked for an earlier similar incident because TA is at "4.0". Pc can't get one, gets desperate, TA goes to 5.0. For reasons given below the TA was at 3.0 but was reading falsely at "4.0". Some cases get upset at the very idea of F/N when these mistakes are made. More than one case has missed all his wins for a year because of a false TA. So it is very important to know how a false TA comes about and how to avoid it. A properly set up meter with cans (electrodes) fitted to a pc who is holding them properly IS ALWAYS CORRECT. However, totally false Tone Arm readings can exist and an auditor must know now these come about. TRIM A meter can be improperly trimmed (not set at 2.0 with the trim knob) and can give a false TA position. Further, when a meter is not left on a minute or two before trimming, it can drift in the session and give a slightly false TA. The trim can be quietly checked in mid-session by snapping out the jack where the cord goes into the box and putting the TA on 2, seeing if the needle is now on SET. If not, the trim knob can be moved to adjust it. The jack is quietly slipped back in. All without distracting the pc. 421 DISCHARGED A cadmium cell meter discharges very suddenly when it does go flat. In mid-session the meter can run out of battery. The TA will cease to act well and may go very false. The remedy is to keep a meter charged at least one hour for every 10 of auditing for 240 AC volt charging current, or 2 hours for every 10 of auditing on a 110 AC volt charging current. A meter lasts much longer than this in practice but the above is very safe. Before each session snap the knob over to TEST. The needle should hit hard on the right side of the face. It can even bounce. This guarantees lots of charge in the battery and no chance of a meter going flat in session. If the needle doesn't snap to the right hard or if it doesn't quite get there on TEST, then that meter will go flat in mid-session and give false TA and no reads or TA on hot subjects. ONE HAND ELECTRODE A single hand electrode with two terminals separated by a rubber works. BUT it always gives a falsely high TA. A Solo auditor who does not know this can get a release point and go half mad wondering why he is F/Ning at 4.0! The answer is to make a "single hand" electrode out of two small cans (about 3 3/4 inches by 2 1/8 inches or 9 1/2 cm by 5 1/2 cm) (or even smaller for a very small-handed pc). Glue a thin circle of foam rubber solidly to the bottom of one can so it reaches out alightly around the bottom. (Don't glue it up the sides.) Put the alligator jaw clips one to each can. Now put the can bottoms together and hold them in one hand. Mark the TA (1) -- meaning one hand (such as 3.75 (1)). Now take the cans one in each hand and mark the TA (2) -- meaning two hands (such as 3.0 (2)). Audit with them in one hand. Keep your worksheet with (1) marks (such as 3.5 (1)). Check at start and middle and end by taking a can in each hand and putting down the 2 can read (such as 2.5 (2)). It is too much trouble to totally change cans and the distraction can change the TA read. This two small can arrangement is not quite accurate. It gives a lower TA than big cans. But the difference is slight. It can scare you with a 1.9 when trim is 2.0 and real TA is 2.0. If this happens check with big cans. (As an added tip a solo auditor usually keeps the back of his hand on his leg while solo auditing. The small 1/2 volt current gives a tingle to the leg that is distracting when one's hand is moist. Put a piece of foam rubber in a plastic sack. Lay the sack on the leg, put your hand on this pad. It insulates the area and is very comfortable.) MOIST HANDS When a pc's hands sweat a lot you will get a low TA. Contrary to 19th Century superstition the meter does not work on sweat. Very sweaty hands as found on nervous persons give a false TA. It goes low. Many "low TA cases" are just sweaty hand cases. Paper handkerchiefs (Kleenex) are a standard item for an auditing room -- for grief charges and burning eyes, etc. These should be available. If the TA is low, check if the pc's hands are wet. If so, have him wipe them and get a new read. It is usually found that the 1.6 was really 2.0. Or the 1.6 was really 1.8 and the trim was 1.8 = 2.0. 422 Have the pc wipe hands, check and correct trim before you by-pass all a "low TA's" F/Ns! TAs can go low. Invalidation of the pc, lousy TRs can drive one low. If so the TA comes back up on repair. But don't brand a case a low TA case until you make sure his hands are dried and the meter trimmed. Also, very small cans or cans too small for the pc can give a slightly low reading. DRY HANDS Some pcs have extremely dry hands, usually from industrial chemicals such as chlorine in dishwater or skin scale. This can give a wildly high TA. The pc can be worried to death with high TA repairs when in fact he just doesn't have contact with the electrode. Metal foot plates connected to the meter and the pc barefooted in session will usually handle. A quick test is have the pc put the cans under his armpits and you'll see if it's his calloused or chemically dried-out hands. ARTHRITIC HANDS A rare pc is so crippled with arthritis that he doesn't make contact fully with the cans. This gives a high TA. Use foot plates or wide wrist straps and you'll get a right read. SLACK GRIP Sometimes a rare pc lets his hands go slack on the cans, particularly if they are the wrong size cans, too big. This gives a mysterious "high TA". It is false. The TA will come down only to 3.2 and F/N and of course an overrun then really gives a high TA. And the pc goes a bit frantic and begins to believe things don't erase or release. Keep the pc's hands in sight. Check the pc's grip. Get smaller cans. CAN SIZE The most common fault is wrong can size. For a normal or large-handed pc the can size is about 4 7/8 inches by 2 5/8 inches or 12 1/2 cm by 7 cm. This can be altered as big as 4 1/2 inches by 3 inches diameter or 11 cm by 8 cm. This is Standard. This can is too large for people with small hands. These should use a can 3 3/4 inches by 2 1/8 inches or 9 cm by 5 cm diameter or thereabouts. A small child would be lost even with that can. So a small 35 mm film can could be used. This is 2 inches long by 1 3/16 inches diameter or 5 cm by 3 cm. This works but watch it as these cans are aluminum. They do work but test for true read with a slightly larger can and then trim to adjust for the aluminum if any different. Cans of course should be STEEL with a thin tin plating. Regular soup cans. Can size to match the pc avoids slack can grip or tiring the hands into going slack, giving the auditor 3.2 F/Ns and trouble. 423 COLD PC A pc who is too cold sometimes has a falsely high TA. Wrap him in a blanket or get a warmer auditing room. The auditing environment is the responsibility of the auditor. LATE AT NIGHT Between 2 and 3 AM or late at night a pc's TA may be very high. The time depends on when he sleeps usually. This TA will be found normal in regular hours. RINGS Rings on the pc's hands must always be removed. They don't influence TA but they give a false Rockslam. FLOATING TA Many an auditor before now has gone a bit mad trying to handle a floating TA. They are not very common and are startling. What happens is the pc is so released the needle can't be gotten onto the dial. The needle is swinging wider than the meter dial both ways from center and appears to lay first on one side then the other. The TA can't be moved fast enough to keep the extreme floating needle on the dial. This gives a false TA of sorts as it can't be read. Some auditors seeing it for the first time have even sent the pc out of the room so they could "adjust" the meter or get another one! Thus the very highest state of release can be invalidated as where is the TA? RUSTY CORRODED CANS You'd think soup was very expensive the way some auditors hold onto old cans. Corroded cans can falsify TA. Get new ones now and then. TIGHT SHOES And then there was the vain lady who wore shoes too small for her feet. She removed them every session. The session went well each time. Then she put on her agonizing shoes and went to the Examiner and the C/Ses and auditors all went mad trying to find out why every Exam had a high TA. Tight shoes. The E-Meter is accurate. It is a lovely instrument. You have to fit the pc to it. Good luck. LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [This HCO B is added to by HCO B 12 November 1971 R, Revised 6 March 1973, False TA Addition, Volume VII -- 438; HCO B 15 February 1972, False TA Addition 2, Volume VIII -- 24; and HCO B 18 February 1972, False TA Addition 3, Volume VIII -- 26.] 424  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=25/10/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  DRUG DRYING OUT   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 25 OCTOBER 1971 Remimeo DRUG DRYING OUT It occasionally happens that someone is still on drugs when he or she requires drug processing. This sets up a very rough problem. DRUGS PREVENT ANY CASE GAIN. If the person is still on drugs, processing will have little effect. He will not cease to be a drug addict. The drugs trap him. When the world went druggie (about 1960), this problem of drying out became one of the first order. It was not just a problem to us. All pre- Scientology efforts failed -- and had been failing for all Man's history. But relatively small numbers had been involved. After 1960 the problem became planet-wide. Our first organization to handle this was Los Angeles. They made the person cease to take drugs for 6 weeks, then audited the drugs out. Most of these cases stayed stable and thereafter had case gain and were no longer condemned to an eternity of disability. However, some were unable to stop taking drugs. What is called WITHDRAWAL SYMPTOMS set in. These are the body and mental reactions to no longer taking drugs. They are ghastly. No torturer ever set up anything worse. The patient had this problem then: A. Stay on drugs and be trapped and suffering from here on out. B. Try to come off the drugs and be so agonizingly ill meanwhile that he couldn't stand it. This was a dead if you do, dead if you don't sort of problem. Medicine did not solve it adequately. Psychotherapy was impossible. Two approaches now exist to this withdrawal problem. 1. Light objective (look outward, take attention off body) processes ease the gradual withdrawal and make it possible. 2. Nutritionist experiments indicate that vitamins assist the withdrawal. Objective processes are covered elsewhere in this material. VITAMIN THERAPY According to world-renowned nutritionist Adelle Davis, vitamin therapy has had success in handling Withdrawal Symptoms. Instead of just telling the person to break off drugs with all that suffering and 425 danger of failure, the patient is given heavy doses of vitamins. The data is repeated here for information. DRUG BOMB ONE DOSE 1,000 mg of niacin amide (not nicotinic acid as it is severely toxic in such amounts). This for any mental disturbance. 500 milligrams of magnesium carbonate (to make the Vitamin C effective). 2,000 milligrams of Vitamin C. 25 milligrams of B6. 200 milligrams of B Complex. 100 milligrams of pantothenic acid. ADMINISTRATION The bomb is given four times a day, roughly every six hours. It is given in a mild preparation that furnishes intestinal flora such as yoghurt. GREAT CAUTION must be used to give the dose in such a way that the vitamins will not corrode the stomach. If this is neglected the patient can be given a false duodenal (upper intestine) ulcer and will be unable to continue the treatment. Druggies are usually in terrible physical condition anyway. Thus all the above would have to be in "enteric coated" capsules, meaning an intestinal shielding must be on the pills so they gradually dissolve and don't hit the sensitive upper stomach hard enough to corrode it. Thus milk with powdered amino acids in it would have to be given to wash the pills down. In testing these recommendations stomach corrosion from the bomb was the main barrier noted. If the bomb is given without any cushion the patient can (a) feel too full after eating (b) have a stomach ache (c) have a burning sensation (d) the exterior of the stomach can get sore. These are all stomach ulcer symptoms. If such symptoms turn on, end off the vitamins. Aluminum hydroxide tablets chewed up and swallowed in milk each time the symptoms start will ease the stomach. Amino acids, intestinal flora and milk must then be given until the stomach gets better. Shots, with a needle, especially of Vitamin C can be too painful. Not the needle, that's nothing; but the vitamin itself. Such medication is in a crude state of research, mainly because of the violent hostility earlier exerted against vitamin people by the American Medical Association and other reactionaries to anything beneficial or new. It is hoped that the stomach corrosion factor can be lessened by new preparations which do the same thing but less violently. I am not particularly advocating the use of the Drug Bomb but as a pioneer in this area of research I feel that any data of value on the subject of drug withdrawal should be widely published. 426 The difficulties and agonies of withdrawal are the primary failure point in trying to salvage a being from the insanity of drugs. SUMMARY People who have been on drugs do not make case gain until the drugs are handled in processing. Processing such as Dianetics is not effective when done on a person who is taking drugs. Withdrawal from drugs sometimes sets up a violent physical reaction too painful or depressing to be continued and the person goes back on drugs. Anyone on drugs or who has taken drugs is doomed as a being -- just like that. He or she will cave right on in and finish up in the ash can from here on out. Only processing by Dianetics and Scientology can handle the effects of drugs fully. No other technology, medical or biochemical, has ever helped -- we have thousands of cases to prove this completely. The primary barrier to processing is getting the person off drugs and keeping him off until he can be fully audited. Then he will be very okay. Two means to do this are known -- A. Light objective processes while "drying out" and B. Nutritional therapy. A and B can be combined. Neither A nor B will fully handle drugs. The person on vitamins if not processed will relapse. Vitamins are not drugs. They are nutrition. A person can be processed while on them. By close application of these principles the person can be salvaged. And having been salvaged can go on up to greater freedom and ability. He won't make it otherwise by any other known technology. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 427  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=25/10/71 Volnum=0 Issue=3 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  AUDITOR FAILURE TO UNDERSTAND   HQS Course  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 25 OCTOBER 1971 HQS Course Issue III AUDITOR FAILURE TO UNDERSTAND (Edited from HCOB 17 Oct 1962 for use on the HQS Course) If a pc says something and the auditor falls to understand what the pc said or meant, the correct response is: "I did not (hear you) (understand what was said) (get that last)." To do anything else is not only bad form, it can amount to a heavy ARC break. INVALIDATION To say "You did not speak loud enough _______ " or any other use of "you" is an invalidation. The pc is also thrown out of session by having responsibility hung on him or her. The Auditor is responsible for the session. Therefore the auditor has to assume responsibility for all comm breakdowns in it. EVALUATION Far more serious than invalidation above, is the accidental evaluation which may occur when the auditor repeats what the pc said. NEVER repeat anything a pc says after him, no matter why. Repeating not only does not show the pc you heard but makes him feel you're a circuit. The highest advance of 19th Century Psychology was a machine to drive people crazy. All it did was repeat after the person everything the person said. Children also do this to annoy. But that isn't the main reason you do not repeat what the pc said after the pc. If you say it wrong the pc is thrown into heavy protest. The pc must correct the wrongness and hangs up right there. It may take an hour to dig the pc out of it. Further, don't gesture to find out. To say, pointing, "You mean this item, then," is not only an evaluation but a nearly hypnotic command, and the pc feels he must reject very strongly. Don't tell the pc what the pc said and don't gesture to find what the pc meant. Just get the pc to say it again or get the pc to point it out again. That's the correct action. SUMMARY A very high percentage of ARC breaks occur because of a failure to understand the pc. Don't prove you didn't with gestures or erroneous repeats. Just audit, please. LRH:dr.rd.pe.rd Copyright $c 1962, 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED FOUNDER 428  L. RON HUBBARD FOUNDER   Type = 11 iDate=29/10/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=14/5/74 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  INT RUNDOWN CORRECTION LIST REVISED   Remimeo Auditors Class IV & Above C/Ses Int R/D Checksheet  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 29 OCTOBER 1971R REVISED 14 MAY 1974 Remimeo Auditors Class IV & Above C/Ses Int R/D INT RUNDOWN CORRECTION LIST Checksheet REVISED PC _________________________________________ DATE _____________________________ PC GRADE _____________________ AUDITOR ________________________________________ The purpose of this list is to correct an unflat, overrun or otherwise messed up Int R/D which now has the pc's TA either high or low. The list is used: (a) When a repair list with the subject of INT-EXT on it reads, and the Int R/D has already been done or corrected and the TA is high or low. (b) When a bog occurs in the Int R/D itself. (c) If the pc is upset after the Int R/D, and/or TA has gone high or low. Assess this list once through noting reads (Method 5). Take all reads to F/N or get the reading item fully repaired to F/N. This list is laid out in the sequence the reads are to be handled. Suppress and False can be used as needed to take a question to F/N. Handle each read to F/N, do not go on to another question leaving one that has not F/N'ed. R-FACTOR. We are going to do an assessment concerning your Int R/D. (If pc does not understand this R-Factor clear up what the Int R/D was as he may not have recognized it.) 1. THE INT R/D WAS ALREADY FLAT. _______ Indicate it. Date/Locate. 2. THE INT R/D WAS OVERRUN. _______ Indicate it. D/L the flat point. 3. THE INT RUNDOWN WAS ALREADY FLAT AND NEED NOT HAVE BEEN RUN. _______ Indicate it. If no F/N, D/L it. 4. THE INT R/D CORRECTION LIST WAS OVERDONE. _______ Indicate it. If no F/N, D/L the point he felt his Int R/D was repaired. 5. THE INT R/D IS UNFLAT. _______ Find out what chain/flow is unflat, repair with an L3RD. Verify the remaining flows and chains. 429 6. SOME PART OF THE INT R/D WAS MISRUN. _______ Indicate it. Find out what, handle with an L3RD on any messed up chains/engrams. 7. ON THE INT R/D A CHAIN OR INCIDENT WAS LEFT UNFLAT. _______ Indicate it. Find out which one(s), handle with an L3RD. 8. YOU DIDN'T RUN GO IN. _______ Sort it out. Find out what he did run. Handle any confusions. If it is established that he didn't run "Go In" and the R/D is not already flat or unnecessary, handle the remaining reads on the correction list. Then check "Go In" and "Went In" for read. If either read run the Int R/D properly. Do not run if "Go In" or "Went In" don't read. 9. YOU CAN'T GET IN. _______ If so, L&N to BD F/N item "Who or what was afraid to go into things?" Then "What did (item found) do?" "What did (item found) withhold?" to F/N and a blow. 10. YOU WERE CONFUSED ABOUT SOMETHING. _______ Indicate it. Find out what. Sort it out fully. 11. A WORD WAS MISUNDERSTOOD. _______ Indicate it. Find out which one. Clear it to F/N. 12. YOU WERE THINKING OF LEAVING DURING INT. _______ Indicate it. 2wc E/Sim to F/N. 13. YOU WERE LEAVING A POST. _______ Indicate it. 2wc E/Sim to F/N. 14. YOU WERE TRYING TO GET A POST. _______ Indicate it. 2wc E/Sim to F/N. 15. ANYTHING TO DO WITH JAILS. _______ 2wc E/Sim to F/N. 16. ARE YOU WANTED ANYWHERE. _______ 2wc E/Sim to F/N. 17. YOU ARE AFRAID THAT IF YOU GET OUT YOU WILL CAUSE DAMAGE. _______ 2wc E/Sim to F/N. 18. LETTING YOU OUT WOULD BE AN OVERT. _______ 2wc E/Sim to F/N. 19. YOU FAILED TO GET OUT IN AN EARLIER RELIGION OR PRACTICE. _______ Indicate it. 2wc E/Sim to F/N. Note for C/S to handle earlier practices on pgm. 430 20. YOU HAD AN OUT LIST. _______ Indicate it. Find out what it is and handle with an L4BR. 21. THE R/D WAS DONE OVER AN ARC BRK _______ , PROBLEM _______ , W/H _______ , OVERT _______ . _______ Indicate and handle each reading one to F/N. 22. THE R/D WAS DONE OVER SOME OTHER BPC. _______ Indicate it. Find out what it is and handle to F/N. 23. THERE WERE AUDITOR ERRORS. _______ Indicate it. Sort it out and clean up BPC. Use L3RD if engram errors or L1C as necessary. 24. THERE WERE ERRORS ON ENGRAMS. _______ Indicate it. Handle with L3RD. 25. YOU ARE WORRIED BECAUSE INTERIORIZATION CONTINUES TO READ. _______ Indicate it. 2wc E/Sim to F/N. 26. YOU ARE CONCERNED BECAUSE YOU HAVE TO BE REVIEWED. _______ Indicate it. 2wc E/Sim to F/N. 27. YOU JUST MOVE BACK INTO THE BODY AND PUSH AGAINST IT. _______ Indicate it. 2wc on doing this E/Sim to F/N. 28. THERE IS SOMETHING ELSE WRONG. _______ Indicate it. Find out what it is and handle. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:ntm.rd Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 431  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=30/10/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  TRIPLE GRADES vs EXPANDED   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 30 OCTOBER 1971 Remimeo TRIPLE GRADES vs EXPANDED On 12 1/2 hour intensives, cease to run Triple Lower Grades. They are not true lower grades and pcs seldom make the factual EP. Advance Programs should contain Expanded Lower Grades, Triple. QUICKIE LOWER GRADES (also called "Triple Grades") means one F/N for each of three flows or 3 F/Ns per grade. There are not just 3 F/Ns per grade. There are dozens of F/Ns. Also, do not rob Expanded Lower Grades of processes in order to do Repair Programs or "Special Intensives". Follow the Grade Chart. If you need extra processes use The Book of Case Remedies and those Creation of Human Ability processes not used in standard rundowns. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 432  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=3/11/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Auditor Admin Series 15 C/S Series 66 AUDITOR'S WORKSHEETS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 3 NOVEMBER 1971 Remimeo Re-issued 6 November 1972 as Auditor Admin Series 15 C/S Series 66 AUDITOR'S WORKSHEETS A very fast way for a C/S to do himself in is to fall to insist on GOOD LEGIBLE HANDWRITING. When a C/S has auditors who can't write well and rapidly, he gets misunderstood words when he tries to read the worksheets. One temporary solution is to make the auditor block print the word in red above each hard to read word. Some auditors go to an extreme of block printing the whole W/S. The more permanent solution is to have Auditors in Cramming practice writing WELL and CLEARLY no matter how slowly and then, maintaining the same clarity, speed it up. The auditor after many such practice sessions winds up writing clearly and fast. This can be increased until an auditor can write clearly as fast as people talk. The occasional headaches a C/S might get are not from the restim of the case he's studying but are from the words on W/Ses he can't make out. If a C/S does not insist on both block print clarification and auditor writing practice, he will wind up not reading worksheets and may even get foggy about certain cases. A remedy is to go back to the first folders not understood and get the words clarified and then keep this C/S Series HCO B IN. L. RON HUBBARD Founder PS: In the 19th Century secretaries wrote beautiful copperplate longhand faster than a man could talk. So don't say it can't be done. LRH:nt.kjm.rd Copyright $c 1971, 1972 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 433  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=10/11/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=21/9/74 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Word Clearing Series 25R Tape Course Series 6R TAPES, HOW TO USE   URGENT Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 10 NOVEMBER 1971R REVISED 21 SEPTEMBER 1974 Remimeo URGENT Word Clearing Series 25R Tape Course Series 6R TAPES, HOW TO USE (Reissued 23 November 1971 verbatim additionally as a Tape Course Series HCO B.) FOREWORD The most appalling ignorance has existed on the use of magnetic recording tapes. It is therefore of the greatest possible importance that the subject of tape use be grasped and gotten rapidly into effect. Probably half the technology of admin and tech exists only on tape. Tapes, incorrectly used, can be the source of endless misunderstoods. Because tapes have been almost uniformly misused in the past, these misunderstoods have added up to a general misunderstood on the subject of tapes themselves. Students have been known to copy down the whole tape so they could study it. This is a complete waste of time and misuse of student study hours. Some orgs even played advanced study tapes to the public. European orgs have even played translation quality tapes (usually not auditorium quality) of OEC Volumes as raw public lectures! (And lost their audience through lack of quality and inaudible and strange words.) Casual staff briefing tapes, not okay for release, of very bad quality, have been played to staffs of other orgs and the public. There is no end to the abuses. Therefore, for the benefit of understanding words alone, it is VITAL that tapes be properly used and not abused. TYPES OF TAPES There are four classes of tapes. These are: 1. Course study tapes. 2. Public lecture tapes. 3. Briefing tapes. 4. Model performance tapes. 434 COURSE STUDY TAPES Tapes made for courses are of two varieties: (a) English, usually by LRH. (b) Translations, done by translators. They are FOR COURSE USE. This is what the org sells -- training on Tech or Admin. These tapes appear on checksheets and are done at the points of checksheets where they are called for, and are done by Method 2 for tapes or Method 3 for tapes as required. The foreign language tape courses are done from a special tape checksheet and are done exactly as laid down by Method 2 or Method 3. None of these tapes are all written out by the student and then studied. This is a waste of time. Further, such tapes are NOT played straight through with the student making notes of any misunderstood words "to look up later". This will blank out the tape content on the student's mind and knock out the student. So to play a course tape straight through to any student is to risk a stupidity and a blow. IT IS NOT DONE. It does not matter whether the student takes notes of misunderstoods or not. A COURSE TAPE IS NOT PLAYED STRAIGHT THROUGH. Only the earphone, foot pedal start-stop control procedures are used. A course tape is NEVER PLAYED TO A GROUP OF STUDENTS. When played to more than one student, some student is going to get a misunderstood and there goes a blank student. Two students don't even listen to a tape even on Method 2 Tape Word Clearing! One has the meter and foot pedal and the other the earphones. The word clearer stops at each read. He does not otherwise listen. Course tape quality must be good. All the words must be hearable and not inaudible. They must not be slurred or hard to make out. The earphones and tape player used must be high fidelity -- just any old earphones won't do. The tape player "playing head" across which the tape passes must be clean -- done by a cotton swab on a toothpick and cleaning fluid. The tape coating comes off on the playing head and after a time the sound is badly blurred. Using a course tape any other way is now FORBIDDEN. Tests have shown that violations of this are the reason for student failures and blows and out- Ethics. It goes without saying that the general handling of tape players and tapes must be well learned and practiced by Course Supervisors and students. PUBLIC LECTURE TAPES The probable reason stats fall after tape congresses is the misunderstood word. Congresses seldom use really high fidelity equipment. Further, tape copying is often done by outside firms and the tape copies themselves may be of poor quality. The combination is deadly. 435 We looked for the reason for stat drops after tape congresses and this is the only explanation which has come forth. Doingness congresses that are mainly seminars have been very successful. (By doingness is meant TRs -- training drills -- and other ACTIONS.) The relay of data to a public whose vocabulary is usually inadequate is not likely to win, as it hits their faulty vocabulary for one thing and uses new words for another. You can show somebody how to do things far better than you can tell him. This then extends into Div 6 Introductory Actions as well. The relay of data comes AFTER the demonstration in action terms. The possibility of possible bad playing speakers, possible low tape copy quality, the barriers of languages not learned in the first place and the introduction of new mental concepts combine into a hurdle that makes tape or film public presentation adventurous. Listening to public type tapes, by using foot pedal start-stop tape players, is being put in a special public course category. Raw public tape and film presentations are however a must to keep the flavor and meaning of Dianetics and Scientology. So ensure excellent quality tapes and equipment are used with correct tapes for that public and you will have success. BRIEFING TAPES These are not to be confused with Special Briefing Course Tapes. A briefing tape is done to brief or debrief missionaires or to record a conference or to record special instructions to a person or group. It can then be used for reference or to settle any dispute. It can also be used to inform a staff or several staffs. A briefing tape is then a tape designed for a special and informed audience. If the tape quality is good and the audience is already a familiar or trained audience, a briefing tape can be played ONLY TO THE AUDIENCE FOR WHICH IT WAS INTENDED. To do otherwise is to risk misunderstood words and non-comprehension of what it is all about in general. "Ron's Journals" were staff briefing tapes. They began to be used for public. While they were not without success, one could no longer brief staffs on this line and the line was therefore cut. One could not make them with a security that they would be played to staffs. An isolated briefing to a single executive on "these are our future hopes" has been thereafter used as a staff briefing of many orgs ss "these are your orders". Any tape is designed for a specific public. Briefing tapes are especially subject to abuse by being played to wrong publics. Any briefing tape which contains specific orders and plans which could be misunderstood should be played only to the individuals concerned with a stop- start foot pedal and Method 3 Word Clearing, not going past any misunderstood. After a person has been briefed verbally, it is very revelatory to then Word Clear 2 the tape made at the same time. It will often be found that misunderstood words lead to potential alter-is in the actions required. Tape in this instance is an enormous help in assisting and clarifying briefings. 436 A group can be briefed if thereafter each is Word Cleared Method 3 or 2 on the tape afterwards, using standard tape word clearing. Needless to say such tapes must be of good quality. MODEL PERFORMANCE TAPES Tapes exist which give a standard of performance. In Dianetic and Scientology Auditing student auditors have never been known to achieve a high standard of session presence and Communication (and accordingly high results) without the careful study of tapes made of similar sessions by high level auditors. A student musician is unlikely to achieve professional performance level unless he has heard a professional play. It would take a film or live demonstration to communicate a high standard of performance in a purely action subject. For instance for centuries no one believed that Robin Hood could split his first target arrow with a second until a new generation worked on it and a few painfully recovered the lost art of archery and then demonstrated how it was done for others to see. Tapes and films serve a vital purpose in maintaining a performance standard. As these tapes and films show HOW it is done and the ATMOSPHERE and RHYTHM of ACTION they are not subject to word clearing. CONCLUSION Tape and film training is vital, valuable and has its role. But like showing a child how to open a book and read, there is exact technology in USING tapes and films. The first thing one must realize is that the use of tape and film is itself a technical subject that must be studied and learned. One does not naturally know it. The failures of universities to make educated and civilized men is because their own professors know nothing of misunderstood words and so lectured happily on and on to a snoring student body. One professor of physics used to open the classroom windows wide in freezing winter "to keep his students from going to sleep in HIS class". And then stood on the platform and defined nothing as he rambled on. All it did for his class was give them coughs between snores! The handling and use of tape and film in training and administration IS a subject. By failing to know it and use that information, one can block the road for himself and all others to being learned and being free. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.jh Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [In the original issue, the paragraph in this type style on the previous page read, "Raw public tape and film presentations are now ruled out and action- demonstration presentations are being substituted."] 437  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=12/11/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=1 rDate=6/3/73 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  FALSE TA ADDITION   Remimeo Add to E-Meter Books Studies Checksheets  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 12 NOVEMBER 1971R (Revised 6 March 73. Only change is addition of the word "cold" -- first para.) Remimeo Add to E-Meter Books Studies Checksheets FALSE TA ADDITION (Refers and adds to HCO B 24 Oct 1971 "False TA") COLD CANS Regardless of can size, cold E-Meter electrodes tend to give a much higher Tone Arm reading particularly on some pcs. Until the cans warm up, the reading is generally false and is false in the direction of high. A chilled pc almost always has a high TA until he or she gets warm. Just throwing a coat over the pc's shoulders can bring down a TA in a cool room. But some pcs are "cool blooded" and the shock of ice-cold cans can drive the TA up and it takes a while to drift down. This has a great effect on Examinations where the cans are used very briefly. A practice which gets around this is for the auditor or examiner to hold the cans briefly until they are warm and then give them to the pc. A variation is for the auditor or examiner to put the cans under his armpits while setting up. This warms them. There are probably many other ways to warm up cans to body temperature. FOOTPLATES Tests show that footplates do not give exactly the same read as hand-held electrodes on pcs who have nothing wrong with their hands. This is probably due to body imbalances. Cans held under the armpits or under knees (not advised as there sometimes is a tiny electrical sting) give varied reads from hand-held cans. Where full weight rests on the footplates the read is also varied. To all practical purposes the differences can be neglected unless they give trouble in getting F/Ns. One should simply be alert in using footplates and find out the differences in new problems of false TA or no F/Ns develop and handle any such trouble when it occurs. A person used to going barefoot for instance would have foot calluses and would give a false footplate TA. PCS WHO FALSIFY Some pcs (rare) take mistaken pride in being able to push the TA up by straining or tensing. By just moving into the body the TA can be sent up by an otherwise exterior pc. Some pcs also take a road out by "getting an F/N at will". They have various tricks that do this, the main one being to "think of something else" and get an F/N. Any of these (rare) pcs are manifesting out-of-sessionness. They aren't in session. The definition on of In session is "interested in own case and willing to talk to the auditor". Remedy that and they cease such tricks. Usually they aren't being run on what they are interested in or have comm blocks or withholds or no confidence. They are easy to detect and easy to handle. LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971, 1973 by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder 438  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=20/11/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  HAS SPECIALIST AUDITING PROGRAM (Revised)   Remimeo Div IV HGC Div V Dept 13  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 20 NOVEMBER 1971 (REVISED -- see HCO B 20 Nov 71R Volume VIII -- 50) Remimeo (Revises HCO BULLETIN OF 20 AUGUST 1971 Div IV HGC Issue I) Div V Dept 13 HAS SPECIALIST AUDITING PROGRAM (Revised) (Reference HCO PL 20 Aug 71, Issue I, "HAS TROUBLES") (This Program has been revised to improve results and stability.) The HAS (HCO Area Secretary), any HCO Executive Secretary, HCO Cope Officer, HCO Org Officer, Tech Establishment Officer, any HAS Deputy OR any Executive or Divisional Head or staff member who shows a tendency to transfer or unstabilize staff members or who fails to hat others, must be processed especially in order to be totally stable on post. The HAS and Establishment Officers are peculiarly subject to efforts to unstabilize them. These require the Program to be done in any case whether stable or not. Executives or staff members who show signs of obsessive transfer of the staff or org are also greatly benefited. The HAS Specialist Rundown consists of processes which increase the ability to hold a position. THE RUNDOWN MAY ONLY BE DONE WHEN NO EXISTING AUDITING PROGRAM IS ONLY PARTIALLY DONE. COMPLETE THE EXISTING CYCLE FIRST. HAS SPECIALIST PGM Action 1. Do C/S Series 53 and handle. _______ Action 2. GF Method 5 Handle. _______ Action 3. TR COURSE to full EP. _______ Action 4. ADMIN TRs OR UPPER INDOC if ADMIN TRs not available. _______ Action 5. GF40XR Method 3. _______ Action 6. C/S Series 54 and handle. (Includes GF40 engrams.) _______ Action 7. CCHs. (Run or verify and rehab.) _______ Action 8. Hold It Still. (HCO B 23 July 71, Version B.) (Run or verify and rehab.) _______ Action 9. Start-Change-Stop (SCS) on an object. (Run or verify and rehab.) _______ Action 10. Start-Change-Stop. (Run or verify and rehab.) _______ 439 Action 11. Op Pro By Dup (Book and Bottle). (Run or verify and rehab.) _______ Action 12. Effort Processing. _______ Action 13. Rising Scale. _______ Action 14. Verify Int RD, run if not run in No. 1 or date to blow locate to blow if not done. _______ Action 15. Fly all ruds and overts recently. _______ Action 16. Program for further auditing in own org on Grade Chart. _______ Caution: Do not repeat Processes already done on the pc. PACK: HCO B 20 Nov 71 (Revising HCO B 20 Aug 71, Issue II, Checklist) is auditor's checksheet for the above, giving all materials. It is done by Tr and Serv Aide. Packs can be locally assembled or procured from CLO A/CS-2. Most of these materials occur in Level I PABs SHSBC. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.sb.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 440  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=20/11/71 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Tape Course Series 1 COURSE TRANSLATION TO TAPE   CenOCon  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 20 NOVEMBER 1971 Issue II REISSUED 23 OCTOBER 1974 (Only change is signature) CenOCon Tape Course Series 1 COURSE TRANSLATION TO TAPE (HCO Policy Letter of 16 November 1970 Revised and Reissued as an HCO Bulletin. Changes in this type style.) Translating Dianetic, Scientology study materials into foreign languages is inexpensively and effectively done by using "sight" (instantaneous) translation of bulletins, policy letters and tapes onto tapes. The tape original is made, a copy master is made and thereafter copies can be run off for courses which can be attended by students, using only excellent tape copies and excellent reproduction equipment, and listened to with high fidelity earphones. Word Clearing Technology is used to prevent the student losing interest because of misunderstood words. The tape players used must be equipped with a foot pedal start-stop control. The voice of the "sight" translator should be clear and the diction should be sharp and the tone should not be monotonous. A "sight" translator is one equally good in 2 languages who can hear one language and speak the translation into the other language without hesitation. (They are employed in the UN.) The material copied onto tapes can also be broken down into smaller reels for independent study. By taking exact notes of the "auditing commands" and important rules the student will have the texts he needs for later reference. The exact rundown of this is given: In translating the materials of a course from a textbook or materials in one language to another, the following steps are taken. PRIMARY TARGETS: 1. A person fully competent in both the languages and their cultures is found and retained. 2. The materials to be translated are made available. 3. A tape recorder which can be started and stopped easily without leaving clicks on the tape is procured. (Not a dictation machine.) 4. An adequate supply of regular recording tape is made available. 5. Other materials such as paper and ball-points are made available. 6. A quiet place where interruptions and outside noises will not ruin the tapes is found and the person is set up there. 7. A person knowledgeable in the subject and the language in which the original is written is retained and assists the translator. 441 OPERATING TARGETS: 1. The translator (using Word Clearing Technology and a dictionary to clear up any misunderstoods) rapidly reads or goes through the materials to get a general grasp of the subject. 2. The technical assistant who knows the subject and the original language now goes through the materials with the translator. Every technical word or phrase or cultural idiom is underlined. 3. While underlining, the two persons decide on the correct translation of the technical word or phrase. 4. As these are decided, they are written down on note paper with a complete definition. 5. Each word, phrase and definition is translated into the language and written down on a separate sheet of paper. 6. The translated words, phrases and definitions will become a mimeographed glossary for the eventual student. 7. Each section and paragraph in the material is numbered. 8. With this glossary to hand, the translator now begins direct translation of the text onto tape. The number of the tape and its materials is given at the beginning of each tape used or new chapter begun. 9. The translator must be sure to read the materials in an interested voice and not let any hesitation or note of mystery creep in. The translator is actually lecturing and must sound so. 10. When the materials are complete, good production masters are copied off of the master tape. The master tape is set aside and not used further. 11. The production master is now cut into chapter lengths which are numbered the same as the book chapters. 12. Several sets of the Chapter Copies are now made and put in their boxes. Both tracks can be used. Even 4 tracks (not stereo) can be used. 13. The glossary in both the original language and the translated language is printed up along with course directions (which are described in another technical paper). The checksheet and course rules are also translated and printed in the local language. 14. The course is boxed in sets with the glossary and course directions. Following this system one can rapidly produce sets of materials without the delays always experienced in printing as well as with cost reduction. The tapes are listened to on individual tape players equipped with earphones and a foot pedal start-stop control (so the student's hands are free for taking notes and looking up words in the dictionary, etc). Learning rate in an aural society is much higher than in a society accustomed to print. Even an illiterate person or a slow reader can be taught such a means. A dictionary in the translated language must also be available in a classroom. The quality of the translator's voice and clear diction are highly desirable. LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971, 1974 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 442  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=21/11/71 Volnum=0 Issue=1 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Tape Course Series 2 DIANETICS AND SCIENTOLOGY IN OTHER LANGUAGES   IMPORTANT Remimeo (Translate into the various Languages) Staff Supervisors  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 21 NOVEMBER 1971 Issue I Remimeo (Translate into the IMPORTANT various Languages) Staff Tape Course Series 2 Supervisors DIANETICS AND SCIENTOLOGY IN OTHER LANGUAGES (HCO Policy Letter of 11 May 1971 Reissued as an HCO Bulletin) Tapes and book translations of Dianetics and Scientology are being made into other languages than English. It is necessary to know the MINIMUM materials an org in a non-English speaking country would need to function. It is not enough to have one book published. It creates a demand for services. The demand for service must be met. An HAS Course in the language is not enough since it is not income producing. Thus the org could not survive financially. It must survive financially to deliver the service. Even in a total socialism the service would have to be given. Giving service depends on an org having the means of training auditors who can audit well and establishing the organization. Then the org could audit preclears as well as train more auditors. If the auditors who are trained can audit well, they will produce excellent results and public repute will spread. An org must produce to survive. By production is meant training auditors who can audit, auditing pcs to a good result and making money, or in a total socialism, obtaining adequate support in ratio to production. If an org just teaches an HAS Course or tests people, it will not be able to survive for it will not be able to obtain enough funds or support. For this it is vital to train lots of auditors and audit lots of pcs. Without its staff knowing the basic data of organization, the org will have difficulties in giving service. The technology of administration is important. Thus we get the MINIMUM materials in the language vital to an org's survival: PRINTED MATERIAL The book DIANETICS: THE MODERN SCIENCE OF MENTAL HEALTH printed with hard covers in the language is vital. When members of the public read it and take an HAS Course they want training or processing or both. This book placed in bookstores, advertised in magazines, and sold by Field Staff Members and the org itself not only reaches the public but also in hardcover form pays for its own distribution. As a paperback it does not pay for itself. 443 To this add testing materials printed in the language for intelligence and personality testing and their marking directions. RECORDED TAPES Recorded tapes and tape players in the org to play to individuals in classes is the easiest form in which to deliver data. From such tapes students may take notes. As time goes on the tapes will be transcribed and the material printed or mimeographed. (This is not to be done by the individual orgs.) It will be found however that tapes will always be necessary even when some is printed as the volume of data is very great. Students should not be permitted to print copies of their notes and sell them as time has shown that such notes are not accurate enough and spread errors that show up in training and auditing failures. In reviewing, a student must be sent back to the original, not to his notes, so he can correct his notes and get the data accurately. Nearly all no-results are traced to altered data or poor training of the student, which amounts to the same thing. The MINIMUM list of tapes is: 1. Mini Course Supervisor Hat 2. HAS Course 3. HDC Course 4. Academy Courses Levels 0 to IV 5. Original Thesis 6. Notes on the Lectures 7. Hat of a Scientologist 8. Staff Status I 9. Staff Status II 10. A Translated Org Bd Given these bare essentials and teaching them well and using them will give an org sufficient survival to deliver results. If every bit of the above is known and used by a staff they will not have too much trouble. Set up and functioning and solvent, an org can then think about further materials. Class VI, a Class VII, a Class VIII and a Class IX Course materials on tape should exist in a Saint Hill org in the language of that country. For the org itself a Volume Zero of the OEC Course should exist on tape. 444 After that the full Course Supervisor's Course should exist. Then further books such as Dianetics '55!, Science of Survival and The Creation of Human Ability should come out as tape and then in published hardcover form. The full OEC should now be acquired on tape. The full Study Tapes should be to hand. The org will now be ready to use all the FEBC series and the FEBC tapes. The hardest idea for an org staff to get is the idea of production in terms of auditors trained who can audit, pcs audited to excellent results and money or support produced to keep the staff members and the org solvent. Because of this it is best for 2 or more bilingual executives to attain full FEBC training. However, with the above minimum materials fully studied and in use, an org can survive until it is ready to prosper. Note, at this writing many are working hard to complete the listed materials. They are not yet available in all languages. There is only one other type of item needed by an org and that is the E- Meter. Supplies of these must be arranged for. A country running in very high volume will probably manufacture its own meters against an exact prototype under existing international patents. ON SOURCE It will be found in all countries where Dianetics and Scientology and orgs have been successful that a key part of the success was keeping the subject "on source". The public at once distrusts persons or groups who alter the materials or "use some of them" or attribute them to others. This is quite factual and the public is right. All great and lasting successes have been made by orgs that were on source and whose materials were straight and correct and used that way. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 445  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=21/11/71 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=1 rDate=23/10/74 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Tape Course Series 3R TEACHING A TAPE COURSE  Type = 12 iDate=21/11/71 Issue=0 Rev=2 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Remimeo Supervisors  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 21 NOVEMBER 1971R Issue II Remimeo REVISED 23 OCTOBER 1974 Supervisors Cancels BTB 21 November 1971RA (Revisions in this type style) Tape Course Series 3R TEACHING A TAPE COURSE (HCO Policy Letter of 6 December 1970, Issue II, Revised and Reissued as an HCOB. Changes in this type style.) The instruction of students by tape is done by individual tape playbacks equipped with earphones and a foot pedal start-stop control. It is imperative that the earphone quality be of the highest, and the tape copy have very good sound quality. Otherwise students go to sleep over misunderstood words. The individual tape player method is used because (a) it can handle a large or small number of students, (b) it works where there is a trickle of students starting at different times, (c) it works where students studying subjects different from each other are using the same classroom. it takes more tape players and must be earphone equipped but it prevents students going past misunderstoods as can occur if they are all listening to a group tape play. The foot controlled start-stop pedal is necessary so the student can use his hands freely to take notes and look up words in the dictionary. It also enables the tape to be stopped instantly without the time lag it takes to reach for and push a finger button -- thus going past the place where the stop is desired. RULES & DESCRIPTION Only the Glossary, course rules and checksheets, with course description are translated into the language being used for teaching and mimeographed or printed into small booklets. The description must include how to handle tape players and caution against machine or tape damage and inadvertent erasure of a tape. (To guard against actual erasure it is wisest to tape over the record button or preferably, to have the recording unit disengaged. Also, it is sometimes possible to buy, at cheaper prices, playback units only (tape machines in which the recording unit hasn't been installed). They must however be of good quality. ENROLLMENT Enrollment is done no matter how informal the course is. A waiver of accident or damage holding the school not responsible, must be signed by the student and, if a minor, by his parents or guardian on any tape course. An enrollment invoice showing full course payment must be in the hands of the supervisor, giving the date of enrollment, home address and local address. 446 A roll book has every student's name, address and the course enrolled in and date. This must not be omitted as it is the only permanent record and is often resorted to to prove contentions. FILES A student file system must exist. A folder with the student's name on it and which will receive his completed checksheets, exam results, etc, must be made up at once. CHECKSHEET A checksheet for the course must exist, breaking the course down into small easily attained segments of Theory and Practical. It must be in the student's language. It has blanks opposite each segment so that a student checkout can be initialed with date by the person checking him out. NOTEBOOKS A student is expected to keep a notebook from his tape listening. This should be neat and complete. The student never copies out the whole tape. He takes exact verbatim notes of any Process Commands or Lists and notes down also the important technical rules. A sample notebook should be provided. A student should leave frequent spaces so he can enter new notes on a second and third play of the materials. CHECKOUT Where only tapes exist and a checkout is required students check each other out from the actual tape, not from their notes. "Give me an example," is the keynote of such a checkout. (a) What is the _______ , (b) Give me an example. PRACTICAL Each area of the course has demonstration and practical drills. These drills must be written up and must match the basic personal skills required by the materials. CLAY TABLE Clay table training is a vital part of the Course curriculum. The materials must be available. And clay, not just modeling clay, can be used. Flat surfaces must be provided. The description of clay table training must be part of early checksheets in the school. DEFINITIONS A student is drilled and does clay table on the glossary after he has been through the course once. 447 CHECKSHEET SEQUENCE The student is required to go in sequence through the entire checksheet. HCO PL of 31 August 1974, Issue II, "Fast Flow Training Reinstated", applies to Translated Tape Courses. The checksheet is arranged double-spaced for Tape Counter Reading, date and initial in the first of the three columns. For example: "Tape Counter ____________ Reading Column Retread Retrain ______________ 1. Chapter III -- The Goal of Man _______ _______ _______ COURSE COMPLETION See HCO PL 31 August 1974, Issue II, "Fast Flow Training Reinstated". PROGRESS BOARD A student's progress is posted on a "progress board". SLOW STUDENTS Any student falling asleep or being very slow is handled with Word Clearing which is the subject of the Word Clearing Series Bulletins and later issues in these Tape Course Series Bulletins. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 448  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=25/11/71 Volnum=0 Issue=2 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  RESISTIVE CASES FORMER THERAPY   Remimeo GF-40X Checksheet  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 25 NOVEMBER 1971 Issue II REISSUED 21 SEPTEMBER 1974 Remimeo (Only change is signature) GF-40X Checksheet (HCO Bulletin of 23 September 1968, a Class VIII Confidential Bulletin edited and reissued for information of Auditors handling GF-40. NOTE: This does not cancel or replace HCOB 23 Sept 1968 which contains further vital data for the Class VIII Auditor.) RESISTIVE CASES FORMER THERAPY Hypnotism, "psycho" analysis, "psychiatry" and other implant type therapies often key in and jam the track. These characters here, on any other planet and on the whole track dramatize implanting. The "therapy" involved would be a temporary relief brought by suggestion. The wrong data of the "science" itself operates as a whole track lie. Getting well or able depends on establishing truth. These "scientific" lies are alterations of actual laws. We often note electronics men have a rough case time. This traces to the lies Man uses for his "electrical science". As the subject is based on false assumptions, it itself tends to aberrate. Therefore we get out of the road any former "therapy". We can rehab any moment of release in it, handle any overrun, etc. We also do a New Style Remedy B to get old therapies spotted and run back. The only cases which hang up are: 1. Unaudited cases (lies about grades, etc). 2. Drug cases (who seek in processing the delusions or madness which exhilarated them on drugs). 3. Former therapy cases. (In this or past lives.) 4. Out of valence cases. 5. Cases who continue to commit overts on Scn. 6. Cases "audited" with their ruds or grades out. 7. Seriously physically ill cases (where the illness makes too much PTP in PT). Of all these the former therapy case is apt to be the roughest as any auditing session can be reactively mistaken for the "treatment". The next roughest is the drug case as a false exteriorization often occurs on an enforced basis and may go into restim. 449 Some drug takers go plowing back into early implants and drug therapies so the two get crossed up on a case. To isolate the reason for a highly resistive case or high TA you can assess the above 7 items and get a clue. Don't limit it to this lifetime. And don't do it so as to key the person in hard on things he wasn't in. And don't do it unless the case is very hard to get a gain on. Engram running of a crude sort can be found hundreds, thousands or billions of years ago and consists if it appears, of an overrun. They didn't know much about it and overran them badly. Implants, psychoanalysis, psychiatry, hypnotism get all snarled up with sex as these birds would commonly (and do) stage insane sex scenes. They violate the children and wives of officials even today to produce a degrade and to make a scene so insane that the "patient" if he remembers it really thinks he is insane. And if he tries to tell anybody (or if she tries to tell her husband) it's a prompt mess, so these "practitioners" hide their activities in this fashion. The trouble with such former "therapies" and electric shock, etc, is that it: (a) groups track by the command of the practitioner (b) sends the pc to the start of track WAY back and sticks him there out of PT. The keynote of piloting through messes like this is to (A) Know what kind of a mess it is and (B) Don't EVER force a pc back track or into anything he doesn't want to confront easily. Drugs force the person back into these messes and stick him. One of these former therapy or drug messes is only hard to untangle because they are full of incredibles. The pc doesn't accept them or just try to see what's in them. The basic rule in any case is Reality is proportional to the amount of charge removed and so Reality can be increased simply by removing charge. These surges of the needle as well as the BDs of the TA are "charge coming off". Anything eventually resolves if the pc just keeps on getting charge off. The earliest charge is the most important. Charge off the exact grades is the most valuable. But ANY charge off will make it, even on former "therapies". L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.bh.rd Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 450  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=5/12/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  END PHENOMENA   IMPORTANT Remimeo Class VII Auditors All Auditors Class VII Course C/Ses Class IV Checksheet  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 5 DECEMBER 1971 REISSUED 21 SEPTEMBER 1974 (Only change is signature) Remimeo Class VII Auditors All Auditors Class VII Course IMPORTANT C/Ses Class IV Checksheet END PHENOMENA Feeding the pc the End Phenomena of a process or action is illegal and very out-tech. Example: Auditor asks pc "Since the last session did (stating the E/P) ?" Or "In this session did (stating the E/P) ?" This is evaluating for the pc. The pc has to make it himself then he truly makes it. The correct way to check to see if a pc has made an E/P (rare as pcs usually tell their auditor their cogs, etc) would be to ask "Did anything occur?" or "Since your last session did anything occur?" If the pc then states the E/P or words to that effect, with F/N and VGIs, the process can be terminated or if necessary, rehabbed and terminated. If the pc does not state the E/P the auditor then knows to continue the process. These actions apply very definitely to Power Processing -- where earlier HCOBs state the auditor can check to find out if the E/P occurred between sessions. Usually sessions aren't ended before F/N, VGIs and E/P on a process. It's easier on the C/S, auditor and pc to complete a cycle of action in the one session. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd.jh Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 451  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=9/12/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  PTS RUNDOWN   Remimeo Class IV Okay to Audit Requires WC 2 * Rate Clay TRs 4000-9 4000-10  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex Remimeo HCO BULLETIN OF 9 DECEMBER 1971 Class IV Okay to Audit Requires WC 2 * Rate Clay TRs 4000-9 4000-10 PTS RUNDOWN CASES One remaining problem in cases was "PTS phenomena". P.T.S. means Potential Trouble Source. When someone is suppressed he becomes a Potential Trouble Source. There are numerous HCOBs and P/Ls on this subject. All of them are true observations and predictions. The cause of ROLLERCOASTER is PTS. Rollercoaster means a slump after a gain. Pcs who do not hold their gains are PTS. S and Ds (for Search and Discovery) was the earlier approach. These are still valid and "3 S&Ds" as a rundown is used in the PTS Rundown without change. Now with the PTS Rundown, the handling of this common and all too frequent case condition can be handled. WHO DOES IT Hopefully it can be done by Class IVs who are also HDCs, HGC Okays to Audits. For an auditor who is not HDC Class IV Okay to Audit HGC by competent Interneship to attempt a PTS Rundown would be very risky for the pc as it needs exact listing, exact TRs, exact metering, exact Code keeping and very honest auditing and competent C/Sing. DEVELOPMENT Earlier discovery and development of the PTS theory is extensively covered. The recent wrap-up came about through my OT research in November 1971. The principal breakthrough was realizing one should NOT invalidate having known certain people before. This is similar to the past life discovery in 1950. Some people thinking this was "unpopular" frowned on it. Some others were only famous characters so flagrantly that past lives were easily invalidated. But people who don't go past track in Dianetics don't recover. Even running them as "imaginary" as in Science of Survival advices suddenly breaks through for a stalled Dianetic Case. In this same way with young men and girls using "I knew you when you were _______ " for 2D advantage tended to invalidate having known certain individuals before this life. But now it turns out that the ONLY PTS situation that is serious and lasting and can cause a rollercoaster comes from having known the person before this life. Possibly in the last life or earlier lives one knew persons before that life too. This however shows up in the 3 S and Ds. BREAKDOWN There are only four points of breakdown of the PTS Rundown. 1. Improperly audited. Auditor not able to always do a correct list, TRs out, 452 metering out, poor R3R, just plain untrained or not totally familiar with this Rundown. 2. Pc not completely set up. Like: Has TA trouble but no C/S 53 done, is a no change case but no GF 40R done, old auditing not repaired by a GF and proper programming or no C/S 54 or too tired or too ill for the R3R. 3. The Rundown not fully and completely done, but chopped or left incomplete (pc will still rollercoaster). 4. People who "can't run engrams" -- which means a druggie who hasn't had a full Drug Rundown. There is nothing especially tricky about the auditing of the PTS Rundown except that all auditing should be of flubless quality and when the PTS RD is flubbed by bad lists or poor R3R or out TRs or poor metering it really IS a mess. The RD is so powerful that errors in C/Sing and auditing it are especially rough. Currently sick pcs should not be run on the PTS Rundown as a standard practice. It IS what they need BUT you can easily overwhelm a sick pc with engram running. The time to run a PTS RD is when the pc is set up and when it is noted the pc rollercoasters, not when he collapses with a temperature. Rollercoaster can also be caused by a bad Interiorization RD or Int repair, out lists, bypassed charge of other descriptions. These should be gotten rid of before a PTS RD is attempted. BEHAVIOR OF RD Valence shifts occur rapidly and frequently in PTS RDs and should be noted on the Worksheet. The R3R can sometimes be a bit of a long haul on a basic incident. Be sure with an L3B. But get an erasure of basic no matter how hard you have to work at it. In the PTS RD incidents can "develop". Missing pieces can appear. A whole new slant can occur on the subject when one goes to F2 after finishing F1. Chronic somatics are likely to appear and be handled on this Rundown. And case conditions not previously remedied by other means can be remedied by this Rundown. END PHENOMENA There is a point where the pc is absolutely sure he knew the person before this life. This is NOT the EP. A pc can exteriorize on this RD. That is NOT the EP (but requires an Int RD if none has been done before going on). THE EP IS A PC WHO IS GETTING AND KEEPING CASE GAINS AND NEVER AGAIN ROLLERCOASTERS. PARTS There are four parts to the RD. (a) Present and past S&Ds. Collect them up, handle each valid item with R3R Triple, ARC Brk, PTP, w/h and overts each triple. If no S&Ds exist do "3 S&Ds" and R3R and Ruds as above. If no folder, get the pc to tell you any past S&D items. (b) 2WC who the pc has known this lifetime who has troubled or worried him. Include father, mother, wife or wives (husband), brothers, sisters, aunts, uncles, grandparents, lovers. Treat any that read as likely. Ask if the pc has known person before this life. If read, R3R Triple, Ruds & Overts Triple. (c) 2WC Ask the pc who he has been after this life. Get various names. Ask if known before. Any that so read, R3R Triple, Ruds & Overts Triple. (d) 2WC Ask pc places and planets known before this lifetime. Get some. R3R Triple, Ruds & Overts Triple. 453 That is the extent of the Rundown. FLOWS You cannot use Flow 1 as any old direction to or from pc. To do this fouls it up. Flow 1 is to the pc. Flow 2 is pc to the person (or place). Flow 3 is the person (or place) to others. If you did F1 R3R as "Locate a time you knew _______ " you might get to the pc, pc to the person or the person to others. You would not get a clean motivator F1. This would leave the PTS chain partially run. This is also true of the ruds. RE-DOs If the pc does not recover, then reasons for failure 1 to 4 above should be checked into. Then the lists and R3R should be handled with L4B and L3B. Then an overlooked item or person or place should be scouted for and handled. There is no question of the validity of the Rundown. It might have missed. "True love" might have been passed over as unlikely but such obsessive attraction is always based on having known (and probably done in) the other person. Then the true EP will be attained where it only appeared to be before. THE COMMANDS See 3 S&Ds HCO Bs 13 January 1968, "S&Ds", 19 Jan 68, 16 Aug 69, 14 Jan 68, 28 Nov 67, 10 Nov 67, 9 Nov 67. The commands and actions of doing 3 S&Ds are DRILL TR 4000-9 & TR 4000-10 3 S&Ds. HCO B 9 Oct 71, Issue VI. The following R3R commands are used in every case. Put the person or place in the blank: F1. Locate a time when _______ did something to you. R3R. F2. Locate a time when you did something to _______ . R3R. F3. Locate a time when _______ did something to others. R3R. RUDS 1. Did _______ ARC Brk you? ARCU CDEINR. E/S to F/N. 2. Did you ARC Brk _______ ? ARCU CDEINR. E/S to F/N. 3. Did _______ ARC Brk others? ARCU CDEINR. E/S to F/N. ALWAYS DO A FRESH ARCU CDEINR ON EACH E/S. 4. Did _______ give you a problem? E/S to F/N. 5. Did you give _______ a problem? E/S to F/N. 6. Did _______ give others problems? E/S to F/N. 7. Did you withhold anything from _______ ? E/S to F/N. 8. Did _______ withhold anything from you? E/S to F/N. 9. Did _______ withhold anything from others? E/S to F/N. 454 10. Did _______ commit an overt (harmful act) on you? E/S to F/N. 11. Did you commit an overt (harmful act) on _______ ? E/S to F/N. 12. Did _______ commit an overt on others? E/S to F/N. AUDITOR'S LIST OF ITEMS TO BE RUN (a) Old S&Ds ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________ New S&Ds ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________ (b) 2WC reading items ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________ (c) 2WC after these items ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________ (d) Places and Planets ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________ Added Items for PTS ________________________________ Redo ________________________________ ________________________________ ________________________________ LRH:nt.bh Copyright $c 1971 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [This HCO B is added to by HCO B 20 January 1972, PTS RD Addition, Volume VIII, page 19. It was revised by HCO B 9 December 1971R, Revised 15 October 1974, PTS Rundown Volume VIII, page 330, which is revised by HCO B 9 December 1971 RA, Revised 21 October 1974, PTS Rundown, Volume VIII, page 338.] 455  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=16/12/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=2 rDate=19/9/74 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 35RA INTERIORIZATION ERRORS   Remimeo Int RD Checksheet  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 16 DECEMBER 1971RA REVISED 19 SEPTEMBER 1974 Remimeo Int RD Checksheet C/S Series 35RA All changes are in this type style. INTERIORIZATION ERRORS (References: HCO B 11 Apr 71RA "L3RD" HCO B 27 Mar 71 "Dianetic Erasure") Almost all the errors in an Interiorization Rundown are Dianetic errors. Most are very ordinary, even corny. IT IS VITAL TO CORRECT AN INT RD ERROR AS A FIRST ACTION. There is one Int RD error that is not a purely Dianetic error and that is the error doing anything else at all before an Int RD is done properly or an Int RD error is fully corrected. The Int RD error may be simply that "Went In" and "Go In" did not read on the meter yet Int was run. This classifies as "running an unreading item". Or the Int RD could have been overrun. It goes flat on Secondary F2, let us say. The Auditor keeps on going past the win. This will hang up the Rundown. One of the ways an overrun occurs is the pc goes exterior during it. Yet the Auditor keeps on. Another way is pc has a big cog, big win. Auditor keeps going on with the RD. When a pc is exteriorized by auditing and is then audited further without being given an Interiorization Rundown, his TA will go high or low and he may be very upset. Heavy masses may come in and he may also get ill. Int RD errors also may go back to earlier Dianetic errors. A number of unflat incidents invite the overrun of these if they also occur on a Dianetic chain. To clean up a balled-up Int RD chain or incident one may have to find and clean up the Dianetic error it is sitting on during the clean-up of the Int RD error. Int RD errors, goofs, etc, are handled by using an Int RD Correction List Revised, HCO B 29 Oct 71R. Auditors who can't run ordinary R3R with great success should not be let near an Interiorization RD as their lack of smoothness in handling Dianetics will wreck the Int RD. CLASS IV, HDC AUDITORS An excellent Class IV HDC Auditor can easily repair a messed-up Interiorization Rundown after a folder study and by use of an Int RD Correction List Revised, HCO B 29 Oct 71R. A Class IV HDC Auditor with an excellent Dianetic Record of wins can be given an Int RD to do or to correct IF HE IS STARRATED ON THE INT PACK AND THE TWO-WAY COMM PACK. 456 REPAIR Wherever you see a TA high and a pc in trouble your first suspicions should be: 1. Audited past Ext in Auditing without an Int RD being done. 2. Int RD botched by being unnecessary ("went in" didn't read) or overrun or Auditor goofs in the session. 3. A previously messed-up Dianetic action has gotten fouled up with the Int RD. 4. The Int Command was improperly cleared (such as "means go in and out again" "means trapped" "meant leaving" etc). 5. Firefights and worries over the high or low TA have ensued after an Int ball-up has occurred. 6. Some major action like grades or items of Power have been run twice. 7. A C/S has hopefully kept on getting the pc audited without detecting the real reason as a flubbed Int RD. PERCENTAGES The percent of misrun Int RDs is high, many being unnecessary or overrun. The liability of leaving them unrepaired is high. Reasons for high TA are averaging out close to 100% as an unrun or a flubbed and unrepaired Int RD. EXT IN SESSION When a pc Exteriorizes in session it is the End Phenomena for that process or action. One gently ends off in any case. Then if after the fact of going exterior in auditing, a pc's TA goes high, then you do the Int RD. You test Int for a read (test "went in" and "go in" per HCO B 24 Sept 71, "Interiorization Rundown") and if it reads you do an Int RD. You just don't do one because a pc goes exterior. Maybe it wasn't needed. So if it wasn't needed it will eventually have to be repaired. If even years after an Int RD the pc has a high TA or a low TA then Int trouble is at once suspected and the original Int RD and any repair of it is suspect and must be handled. The Int RD Correction List Revised, HCO B 29 Oct 71 R, has been designed to straighten out Int RDs. L3RD handles the Dianetic errors. Where Int RD Correction Lists have been done and the pc still has headaches, the C/S handles with AESPs (listed separately) that would make him interiorize. There is no real trick to either running a correct Int RD or repairing a flubbed one. The whole clue is whether or not the Auditor can audit plain ordinary garden variety R3R. So when ANY Auditor audits a pc past Exterior and the pc's TA goes high he should be checked out fully on the Int RD Checksheet so he won't continue to commit the error. 457 And when ANYONE is going to run an Int RD he must: A. Be an expert Dianetic Auditor and Class IV. B. Be Starrated on all the Int RD Pack. And when any C/S is confronted with high TAs or low TAs and doesn't handle at once by getting an Int RD properly run or properly repaired he must be rechecked on the Dianetics Pack and the Int RD Pack. DN C/S 1 A very careful Dianetic C/S 1 must be done on a previously unindoctrinated pc before he is run on an Int RD. Otherwise it's all too new. A C/S 1 isn't auditing. The pc who can't do what the Auditor says or can't correct an erroneous action is lost. A fully safe pc would be one who when he goes Ext in Auditing is made to do an HDC at once before he even gets any ruds put in and not audited again until he is an HDC. He'd be a pc who was relatively safe. A pc who does what an inexpert Auditor says without question can really get fouled up! Uneducated pcs require really flawless topnotch Auditors. The Auditor who can audit an uneducated pc is a jewel. He really has to know his business. Because the pc does whatever he says. And if he says wrongly, then there goes the session. Ever notice pc corrections in a worksheet? "I think you by-passed an F/N." "This feels overrun." "I had Grade I last year." Such Auditors are not fully enough trained to handle wholly green pcs! SIMPLICITY Honest fellows, it's as easy to run an Int RD as it is to run "an ear pain". It isn't even mysterious or tough. IT IS ONLY VERY IMPORTANT TO DETECT WHEN IT NEEDS TO BE DONE OR REPAIRED. There are no mysteries. Some Auditors have got me feeling like I'm trying to teach them to chew soft bread! L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971, 1974 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 458  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=17/12/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 23R INTERIORIZATION SUMMARY   Remimeo Int RD Checksheet  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 17 DECEMBER 1971 (HCOB 2 December 1970 Revised) (REVISED -- see HCO B 17 Dec 71R Volume VIII -- 279) Remimeo Int RD Checksheet C/S Series 23R INTERIORIZATION SUMMARY (Revised and updated to include 1971 Int HCOBs) All changes are in this type. INTERIORIZATION CAN BE BADLY MISRUN. The following HCOBs cover Interiorization Rundowns. HCOB 5 Mar 1971 Exteriorization and High TA HCOB 11 April 1970 Auditing Past Exterior HCOB 6 May 1970 Blows, Auditing Past Exterior HCOB 30 May 1970 Interiorization Intensive 2-Way Comm HCOB 10 July 1970 Interiorization Intensive Goof HCOB 20 Aug 1970 Exteriorization Rundown Musts HCOB 24 Sept 1971 Urgent -- Interiorization Rundown HCOB 29 Oct 1971 Int Rundown Correction List Revised HCOB 16 Dec 1971 C/S Series 35 R (Revised) Interiorization Errors HCOB 17 Dec 1971 C/S Series 23 R (this HCOB) The examination of Interiorization Rundowns done in the field discloses that some auditors engaged in running it have not been fully checked out on it. HCO PL 26 Aug 1965 gives the correct way to do a starrate checkout. Clay demos must also be correctly done. These are covered in HCOB 11 Oct 1967 and HCOB 30 Oct 1970. These HCOBs on Int Rundown, Starrates and Clay Demos plus HCO PL 20 July 1970, Issue III, 2-WC as below, make the necessary pack for checking out an auditor before letting him near an Int Rundown. And all Interiorization materials as above MUST BE CHECKED OUT STARRATE AND IN CLAY before a C/S permits one of his auditors to run it on a pc. QUADS CANCELLED Note that Flow 0 of the Int RD is not now run. Refer HCOB 15 July 71 "Quads Cancelled". UNNECESSARY The words "Went in" and "Go in" MUST be said to the pc and cleared on the meter. If there is needle action, one runs an Int RD as per the Int Rundown Pack If there aren't any reads one does NOT do an Int Rundown on the pc as it is unnecessary and classifies as "running an unreading item". When this test is omitted you get an unnecessary Int RD being done on a pc. This will eventually have to be repaired. 459 FLUBBED R3R When the Auditor does not do flubless auditing, errors occur in the auditing itself. These will hang up an Int RD. OVERRUN It usually happens that an Int RD is overrun. It goes flat on Secondary F2, let us say. The auditor keeps on going past the win. This will hang up the Rundown. One of the ways an overrun occurs is the pc goes exterior during it. Yet the auditor keeps on. Another way is pc has a big cog, big win. Auditor keeps going on with the RD. REPAIR OF INT If even years after an Int RD the pc has a high TA or a low TA, then Int trouble is at once suspected and the original Int RD and any repair of it is suspected and must be handled by HCOB 29 Oct 71, Int RD Correction List Revised. TWO-WAY COMM There is a two-way comm step that follows a day or so after an Interiorization Rundown. An auditor doing this step, preferably the same auditor, MUST BE CHECKED OUT ON TWO-WAY COMM. No C/S should permit any auditor to do any 2-way comm until the auditor has been checked out on HCO PL 20 July 1970, Issue III, "Two-Way Comm Checksheet". One can obtain these tapes easily from Pubs (as the Sea Org has recently forced in this line and quality and delivery). Pending such tapes one can certainly get the rest of the materials on the checksheet done by the auditor and let him do 2-way comm while being very watchful as a C/S. C/SING INT The correcting of an Interiorization Rundown is far harder than making sure that auditors can do the usual in the first place. Nearly all a C/S's hard work comes from auditors not well trained on courses (indifferent courses) and failing to check auditors out well on the materials before permitting them to deliver a new rundown. The correction of Int is hard since until it is complete, other auditing is inadvisable. One, however, gets the Int Rundown done. INT IS A REMEDY The Int RD is not understood as a REMEDY. It is not something you do on all pcs. Pc goes Exterior in auditing. Later his TA goes high. Then you do an Int RD. You test Int for read as above. If it BDs you do an Int RD. You just don't do one because a pc goes exterior. One reason unnecessary Int RDs get done is that the Registrar sells one. That makes the Reg a C/S. So the C/S and auditor run it. Maybe it wasn't needed. 460 So if it wasn't needed it will eventually have to be repaired, with an Int RD Correction List Revised, HCOB 29 Oct 1971. The Interiorization Rundown is a REMEDY designed to permit the pc to be further audited after he has gone exterior. The Int Rundown is NOT meant to be sold or passed off as a method of exteriorizing a pc. This is very important. It is general auditing on usual Dianetics and Scientology actions that brings about Exteriorization. When the pc goes or is found to be exterior one then orders the Interiorization Rundown. Otherwise the TA will misbehave. The rundown is a REMEDY USED AFTER EXTERIORIZATION HAS OCCURRED BY REASON OF GENERAL AUDITING. Anxiety to get exterior will prompt a pc to buy and a Registrar to sell an Interiorization Rundown. It is in effect just more auditing as far as the Registrar is concerned. When a pc has gone exterior the Registrar can insist on his buying enough hours for the remedy. The Int Rundown stabilizes the exteriorization and makes it possible to audit the pc further. DISABILITY If an auditor can't smoothly audit a rundown as simple as an Int Rundown, then he is exposed as being unable to run standard Dianetics and should be cleared of his misunderstoods and overts and retrained. The only real trouble one gets into on an Int Rundown stems from the inability of the auditor to run a smooth, good TRed R3R session. Pcs are not hard to run on it. C/S WINS A C/S cannot win at all if he is continually having to make up for flubby auditing by the auditor. Therefore the C/S must be very sure his auditors are fully checked out on things they are to run before running them. If there is no Qual Staff Training Officer or no cramming, a C/S can fully afford to do the training and cramming himself. Otherwise he will lose far more than that time in C/Sing for auditors not checked out. By the skill of his auditors you know the C/S. Not by his unusual solutions after flubs. The Int Rundown is too easy to do to have any trouble -- the trouble comes when the auditors are not checked out beforehand, starrate and in clay on new things they are to run. Updated and issued By order of L. RON HUBBARD by Training & Services Bureau for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:BW:mes.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 461  Updated and issued By order of L. RON HUBBARD by Training & Services Bureau for L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=19/12/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 71 D OF P OPERATES BY OCAs   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 19 DECEMBER 1971 Remimeo C/S Series 71 D OF P OPERATES BY OCAs A Director of Processing is a director of PROCESSING of cases. All his functions are involved with this. He MUST understand his title and what its duties involve. It is his job to get people PROCESSED. To do this he has to KNOW (a) what people there are to be processed, (b) how much processing they will need, (c) what facilities can be maintained and expanded to get processing done and (d) to see that the processing is paid for and occurs. The D of P does not have to be a C/S or to know C/Sing. ALL HE HAS TO KNOW OF TECH IS HOW TO READ AN OCA, IQ, APTITUDE AND OTHER TESTS. He does not even have to open a folder. If all he ever looked at was a pc's OCA (Oxford Capacity Analysis or by some other name) the D of P would win every time. If the D of P considered his job as "To raise OCAs with paid for processing and to be sure the pc is happier" he would be performing his duties. To raise OCAs one has to know how to "read" an OCA. That's easy. It says how right on its border. Unacceptable, Needing Improvement, Desirable, etc. An OCA with any point on the left side of the graph in low or undesirable range means the pc is out of valence. Any low point on the right side of the graph means the pc is crazy. If the graph is not in the desirable range and the pc happy and looking better, the HGC has not done its job yet. The D of P goes wholly on the idea of MORE AUDITING when he wants to raise a graph or IQ. It's not up to the D of P what is audited only that auditing is done. The C/S, if he knows his business, will say what is audited. The D of P just knows MORE AUDITING. A D of P can tell by the OCA improvement and improvement of TONE and APPEARANCE of the pc and what the pc says in an interview whether the required high quality result has been achieved. If it has not, then it's MORE AUDITING. The REGISTRAR can have very similar functions as to graphs and where there is no D of P the REGISTRAR must do these things. A D of P who has a backlog is a dog. It means he isn't getting auditors or recruiting Academy students or getting people to Auditor Interne and isn't BEING by DEFINITION a D of P. 462 If there is an "ARC Broken field" look at the D of P. He didn't see that the OCA was raised and that the pc was happy before he left the org. A good D of P has a potential processing line of EVERY OCA EVER GIVEN BY THE ORG. He is in the business of raising graphs and making people happy with their auditing IN PAID VOLUME. If his HGC isn't turning out 700 well done hours a week, he's failing. If he is, he's a success. If he turns out more, a second HGC is needed. The traffic cop is the D of P. He has to know what traffic he will have and what traffic he does have. He can be defeated by a poor registrar, a poor C/S and a poor Qual. Therefore he has the right to demand these people get hatted. But he only has the right if he himself is hatted and doing his job. Given that he can demand Comm Evs. If a D of P exists, knows his job and does it an org will become prosperous. The first thing he has to know is the meaning of his TITLE. The second thing is that his job is getting OCA graphs raised IN PAID FOR VOLUME. (By current US rates a D of P should be running at least a $17,000 cash gross of auditing through an HGC each week to be considered a competent D of P.) Any "field ARC Breaks" is a direct reflection on the D of P. He didn't raise graphs and see people were happy before leaving. During periods when the post of D of P was empty or "not on the org board" or not filled, the org has slumped. The post is very important. It is also a very simple, direct post. Its duties are covered in C/S Series 25 along with others. But his use of the OCA is not listed there. Procurement of auditors is currently the weakest point of a D of P's duties. Without this he cannot deliver volume. I have known Ds of P to train auditors themselves to have auditors and others to train Academy Graduates after the course to have quality. There are no limits on what a D of P can do -- So long as he is DIRECTING PROCESSING and RAISING OCAs in paid volume. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 463  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=20/12/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  C/S Series 72 USE OF CORRECTION LISTS   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 20 DECEMBER 1971 Remimeo C/S Series 72 USE OF CORRECTION LISTS A current survey shows that the weakest point in C/Sing done in orgs is failure to use Prepared Lists for Case Correction. There are some other points. For some reason C/Ses are being inventive instead of following the C/S Series and doing standard repairs and grades. Probably the failure to use Prepared Correction Lists derails the use of standard actions. There are very few actions which do not have their own Correction Lists. THERE IS NOTHING IN DIANETICS AND SCIENTOLOGY AS MIRACULOUSLY WORKABLE AS CORRECTION LISTS. The only things which prevent the list from working are (a) AUDITOR'S METERING (b) AUDITOR'S TRs. METERING When the auditor's meter is habitually placed where he cannot see (1) The meter needle, (2) The worksheet and (3) The pc WITH ONE DIRECTED LOOK, then he misses reads. All three have to be seen at once. The faults are i) Eyesight poor ii) Glasses rims obscure one while looking at another iii) Position of the meter. It is a Standard Cramming action to look into these points WHENEVER A CORRECTION LIST IS SAID TO BE BLANK. For example a GF is done by Auditor A on Monday. It is done again by Auditor B on Tuesday. Reads are found by B. This means Auditor A is missing reads. THIS IS FAR MORE COMMON THAN BELIEVED. TRs When an auditor can't be heard or is overwhelming the pc the list won't be valid. 464 An auditor's TRs show up more quickly on a Correction List than anything else. A pc ARC Broken by TRs 0 to IV will not read properly on a Correction List. NUMBERS OF LISTS The number of Correction Lists is large. It is unthinkable to do Word Clearing without ever using a WC Corr List. Yet we find folders with bogged Word Clearing sessions where the list was never used. There is the Green Form for general case upset, the Green Green Form for Solo, L1C for ARC Brks over a period, L3B for Dianetic bogs, L4B for listing and nulling goofs, Int RD Corr List for Int-Ext corrections, a Power Corr List for Power, GF 40R for resistive cases, C/S 53 and Hi Low TA for TA misbehavior, L7 for Clearing Course, and others. C/Ses trying to "solve cases" without using Correction Lists is like trying to repair flat tires without puncture patches -- it just CAN'T BE DONE. THE PRIMARY TOOL OF A C/S IS PREPARED CORRECTION LISTS. It is not inventive ways of "solving cases". METHOD OF USE Where you have inexpert auditors you always order Method 5, which is just a full rapid assessment. Then the C/S sorts out the reads and C/Ses what to do as very well covered on the lists themselves and the C/S Series. Then the auditor does the C/S. A Green Form is always done this way. It will bog on any other method like 3. There are different methods of handling lists. L1C is always done Method 3, carrying each read as it is found Earlier Similar to F/N. A GF 40R is done Method 3 and then the engrams are run for each read where engrams are indicated. It's up to a C/S to use Correction Lists, to coach his auditors into proper list use and to get corrected any misuse. A C/S who can't or doesn't use Prepared Correction Lists isn't a C/S at all but a "person puzzled about cases". Correction Lists, standard programs and the Grade Chart and Grade Commands and materials. These are the tools of the C/S. There are NO others. A C/S is one who uses these things. He is Supervising that they are used when they are supposed to be. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 465  L. RON HUBBARD Founder   Type = 11 iDate=23/12/71 Volnum=0 Issue=0 Rev=0 rDate=0/0/0 Addition=0 aDate=0/0/0 aRev=0 arDate=0/0/0  Solo C/S Series 10 C/S Series 73 THE NO-INTERFERENCE AREA   Remimeo  HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 23 DECEMBER 1971 Remimeo Solo C/S Series 10 C/S Series 73 THE NO-INTERFERENCE AREA From R6 Solo to OT III one does not do anything except keep the pc winning for R6 Solo to OT III. This is the critical band of the Gradation Chart. On Flag it was learned the hard way that you don't do other major auditing actions between these two points. Example: Action -- Completed R6, Clear and OT I, then a Dianetic Completion was attempted. Result -- failure. Right Action -- Complete Dianetics before R6. Right Action -- let it go until OT III well begun, then complete Dianetics. Example: Pre OT doing OT II. A new PTS RD is done. Failure. Right Action -- do it before R6 or after OT III. Example: R6 done. Drug RD given. Result. Poor. Right Action -- Do Drug RD before R6. EXCEPTION It will be found that a pc cannot confront doing Solo Grades. The reason will be found to be Drugs. All pcs who "cannot run engrams" CAN run Drug Engrams. They are afraid because they get into the bank heavily when on Drugs. Only Drugs can be run. So a pc who has "done R6 and Clearing Course but hasn't made it" will be found to be a rabbiting (frightened and running away) druggie. He can and will run Drug Engrams. Thus the right action is to do a full Drug Rundown, then start the pc all over again at R6. It is an exception only because he hasn't done his Solo anyway. REPAIRS Where a Pre OT hasn't made the grade of a Solo level (or gets sick afterwards) a full repair must be done and the failed grade must be completed before he goes on up. It is possible to repair a Pre OT between R6 and OT III so long as you are not trying to handle his whole case but only repairing the grade he missed. TRs Never order TRs after Solo Materials study or before OT III is attested. TRs should be done before or during Solo Auditing study but not after materials are issued. And the TR Course may not be done from then on to OT III. 466 A partially completed earlier TR Course found to be hanging up a pc on Solo Grades can be handled to completion and should be. This does not mean long additional hours of TR 0. It usually means word clearing on the TR materials and rehab. MAJOR ACTIONS It is a very losing game to throw a major rundown in between R6 and OT III. Such as L10 after Clearing and before OT I. The result is a mess. The way to recover such a blunder is to get the pc rehabbed or to a rest point and then finish up the Solo Grades to OT III attest and then complete the rundown. SET UP It is therefore VERY important that a pc be fully set up including Dianetics before he is let onto R6 Solo materials study. AUDITING SKILL None of this states that you cannot improve a pc's auditing skill between R6 and OT III (excepting only TRs). BIG wins are to be had by doing so. THE MAJOR CAUSE OF FAILURE ON SOLO GRADES IS THE INABILITY TO AUDIT. You can take a Pre OT who didn't really make Clear or OT I and move him back to R6 study and retread him as an auditor and then let him move back up the line and he'll win. The sources of failure on Solo are 1. No Drug RD. 2. Dianetics Incomplete. 3. Case not set up. 4. Inability to audit. SUMMARY Realize that from R6 to OT III you have a closed band for other major actions. So don't let people onto R6 Auditing who have points 1-4 out. If it has happened, patch it up as you can and let the pre OT get on with it. Then after the first OT III attest, do whatever you like or that needs to be done before sending him on to OT IV. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.rd Copyright $c 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 467  L. RON HUBBARD Founder